(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Community Texts | Project Gutenberg | Children's Library | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Additional Collections
Search: Advanced Search
Anonymous User (login or join us)
Upload
See other formats

Full text of "Lycoming College catalog"

LYCOMING 
COLLEGE 

Founded 1812 Williamsport, Pennsylvania 



CATALOG 1989 - 1990 



Digitized by the Internet Archive 

in 2010 with funding from 

Lyrasis IVIembers and Sloan Foundation 



http://www.archive.org/details/lycomingcollegec198990lyco 



Contents 

Welcome to Lycoming 3 

The Academic Program 5 

The Curriculum 23 

Student Services 66 

Admission 68 

Financial Matters 71 

The Campus 76 

Academic Calendar, 1989-1990 78 

Directory 79 

Administrative Staff/Faculty 80 

The Alumni Association 89 

Index 91 



The general regulations and policies stated in this catalog are in effect for the 1989-90 academic year. Students 
beginning their first term at Lycoming College in the fall of 1989 or the spring of 1990 are thereafter governed 
by the policies slated in this catalog. Requirements governing a student's major are those in effect at the 
time a major is formally declared and officially accepted by the major department. 

If changes are made in subsequent editions of the catalog to either general requirements or major requirements, 
students may be permitted the option of following their original program or a subsequent catalog version, 
but the College always reserves the right to determine which requirements apply. 

If a student interrupts his or her education without a leave of absence, the catalog requirements in effect 
at the time of readmission will apply. Students on an approved leave of absence retain the same requirements 
they had when they entered, if their leaves do not extend beyond one year. 

Lycoming College reserves the right to amend or change the policies and procedures stated in this catalog 
without prior notice to those who may be affected by them. The provision of this publication are not to 
be regarded as an irrevocable contract between the applicant and/or the student and Lycoming College. 



Communicating with Lycoming College 

Please address specific inquiries as follows: 

Director of Admissions: 

Admissions; requests for publications 

Treasurer: 

Payment of bills; expenses 

Director of Financial Aid: 

Scholarships and loan fund; financial assistance 

Dean of College: 

Academic programs; faculty; faculty activities 

Dean of Student Services: 

Some activities; residence halls; religious life; health services; 
academic support services 

Registrar: 

Student records; transcript requests; academic policies 

Career Development Center: 

Career counseling; employment opportunities 

Executive Director for College Advancement: 
Institutional relations; annual fund; gift programs 

Director of Alumni and Parent Relations: 
Alumni information; parent support 

Director of Public and Media Relations: 

Public information; publications; sports information; media relations 

All correspondence should be addressed to: 
Lycoming College 
Williamsport, Pennsylvania 17701 

The College telephone number is (717) 321-4000 

Visitors 



Lycoming welcomes visitors to the campus. If you would like a guided tour, 
call the Office of Admissions (717) 321-4126 before your visit to arrange a 
mutually convenient time. 

Toll Free Number 1-800-345-3920 



Lycoming College welcomes applications from prospective students regardless of age, sex. race, 
religion, handicap, finances, national or ethnic origin, or color. Lycoming does not discriminate on the 
basis of age. sex, race, religion, handicap, finances, national or ethnic origin, or color in the 
administration of any of its policies and programs. 



Welcome to Lycoming 



Lycoming is an independent, coeduca- 
tional college dedicated to providing the 
type of learning that can be used for a 
lifetime — the liberal arts and sciences. 

Lycoming's academic relevance 
derives from its enduring commitment to 
the value of this type of education, as 
offered by a superior teaching faculty. 
The College's principal aim is to help 
students develop a central core of inte- 
grated values, skill, information, and 
strategies while they learn to communi- 
cate, reason, make decisions, under- 
stand, and use their imagination. This 
type of education can lead to productive 
and fulfilling lives in many fields while 
allowing lifelong growth and develop- 
ment. 

Lycoming awards bachelor of arts 
degrees in 31 major fields, a bachelor of 
fine arts degree in sculpture, and a 
bachelor of science degree in nursing. 
The curriculum is challenging. Because 
it is built upon the two principles of the 



liberal arts known as distribution and 
concentration, it allows students to study 
in breadth and depth. 

Students who have special interests 
not met entirely by a major field can 
design their own majors. Or, if they are 
interested in teaching, medicine, law, 
dentistry, or the ministry, they can take 
courses needed to enter their advanced 
study. 

Students also can study engineering, 
forestry or environmental studies, 
podiatric medicine, optometry, medical 
technology, and sculpture through 
cooperative programs operated by 
Lycoming with other colleges and uni- 
versities. Or, they can study abroad or in 
Philadelphia, Pa., Washington, D.C., or 
New York City through other off- 
campus study programs. 

Most students complete their program 
of study in four years, usually by taking 
four courses each fall and spring semes- 
ter. But students also can take one course 




during Lycoming's May term, or two 
courses during the summer term. 

Recognizing students" concerns about 
careers, Lycoming offers extensive 
counseling through the Career Develop- 
ment Center and advisory committees for 
prelaw, prehealth professions, and pre- 
medical students. The College also oper- 
ates a wide-ranging internship program 
that allows students to earn academic 
credit while working at area businesses, 
government offices, and nonprofit orga- 
nizations. 

Lycoming's ratio of students to faculty 
is 15 to one, which means that most 
classes are small and there is abundant 
opportunity for individual attention. All 
faculty members teach. More than 70 
percent of Lycoming's faculty hold the 
highest degrees in their fields from the 
nation's outstanding colleges and univer- 
sities. And, faculty members take their 
advising seriously. They care about stu- 
dents, and encourage and guide them so 
they receive the education they want. 

Nineteen buildings sit on Lycoming's 
main campus. Most of them have been 
built since 1950. The modern buildings 
include the eight residence halls; the 
library; the Academic Center, which 
houses the Arena Theatre, planetarium,, 
computer center, and art gallery; the 
student union; the physical education/ 
recreation center, including a six-lane, 
25-yard pool; a completely renovated 
fine arts center with excellent facilities 
to accommodate sculpture, painting, 
drawing, printmaking, ceramics and 
photography; and a music building, 
which houses individual music practice 
rooms and an electronic-music studio. 

Scheduled to open in the spring of 
1990, the $8.3 million science facility 
will be one of the finest undergraduate 
science facilities in the East. The build- 
ing will be three levels, totalling more 
than 63,000 square feet. It will contain 
new biology and chemistry laboratories, 
lecture and seminar rooms, a small 
science library and a greenhouse, as well 
as classrooms and faculty offices. 

Lycoming houses approximately 900 
of its 1,250 students in the residence 
halls, which include double and single 
rooms. Most students find the campus 



friendly and comfortable, with all of the 
buildings easy to reach from anywhere 
on campus. Students come from a variety 
of economic classes, religious beliefs, 
and geographic areas, although most stu- 
dents call Pennsylvania, New Jersey, or 
New York their home. They work and 
play together in an atmosphere of respect 
and tolerance. 

The College offers a variety of extra- 
curricular activities. Recent Artist Series 
events have included the Broadway 
musicals Big River and The Mystery 
of Edwin Drood, Pilobolus Dance 
Theatre, The Northeastern Philhar- 
monic, and The New York City Opera 
National Company. Admission to all 
Artist Series events is free for Lycoming 
students. Student government groups 
help to plan campus activities and 
social events. Numerous clubs, honor 
societies, social fraternities and sorori- 
ties, the student newspaper, yearbook 
and literary magazine, and the band 
and widely acclaimed choir meet other 
student interests. Students who like 
to perform or compete can act on the 
Arena Theatre stage or play on inter- 
collegiate or intramural sports teams. 
Intercollegiate teams for men include 
football, soccer, basketball, wrestling. 



tennis, golf, swimming, track and field, 
and cross country. Intercollegiate teams 
for women include basketball, tennis, 
field hockey, swimming, track and field, 
cross country, and softball. 

In addition, students who like hiking, 
backpacking, skiing, camping, fishing, 
hunting, kayaking, spelunking, and 
other outdoor sports will find Lycom- 
ing's location ideal. 

Lycoming is situated on a slight 
prominence near downtown Williams- 
port, a small city nestled along the West 
Branch of the Susquehanna River in 
northcentral Pennsylvania's rolling hills 
and valleys. Yet, the College is within a 
four-hour drive of metropolitan centers 
such as New York City, Philadelphia, 
Pittsburgh, Washington, D.C., Balti- 
more, Syracuse, Rochester, and the New 
Jersey shore points. The Williamsport- 
metro area is home to about 75,000 per- 
sons. 

Lycoming enjoys a relationship with 
The United Methodist Church. It sup- 
ports the Methodist tradition of provid- 
ing an education for persons of all faiths. 

Fully accredited, Lycoming is a mem- 
ber of the Middle States Association of 
Colleges and Schools , and the University 
Senate of The United Methodist Church. 



It is a member of the Association of 
American Colleges, the Pennsylvania 
Association of Colleges and Universi- 
ties, the Commission for Independent 
Colleges and Universities, the National 
Commission on Accrediting, and the 
National Association of Schools and 
Colleges of The United Methodist 
Church. 

HISTORY 

Lycoming College was founded in 1812 
as the Williamsport Academy, an 
elementary and secondary school. 
Thirty-six years later, the academy 
became the Williamsport Dickinson 
Seminary under the patronage of The 
Methodist Episcopal Church. The semi- 
nary operated as a private boarding 
school until 1929, when a college curri- 
culum was added and it became the Wil- 
liamsport Dickinson Seminary and 
Junior College. In 1947, the junior col- 
lege became a four-year degree-granting 
college of liberal arts and sciences. It 
adopted the name Lycoming, derived 
from the Indian word "lacomic," 
meaning "Great Stream." The word 
Lycoming has been common to north- 
central Pennsylvania since colonial days. 




Academic Program 



THE BACHELOR OF 
ARTS DEGREE 

Lycoming is committed to the principle 
that a liberal arts education is the best 
hope for an enlightened citizenry. Con- 
sequently, the bachelor of arts degree is 
conferred upon the student who has 
completed an educational program 
incorporating the two principles of the 
liberal arts known as distribution and 
concentration. The objective of the dis- 
tribution principle is to insure that the 
student achieves breadth in learning 
through the study of the major dimen- 
sions of human inquiry: the humanities, 
the social sciences, and the natural sci- 
ences. The objective of the concentra- 
tion principle is to provide depth of 
learning through completion of a pro- 
gram of study in a given discipline or 
subject area known as the major. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE 
BACHELOR OF ARTS DEGREE 

Every degree candidate is expected to 
complete the following requirements in 
order to qualify for graduation: 

— complete the distribution program. 

— complete a major consisting of at 
least eight courses while achieving 
a minimum grade point average of 
2.0 in those courses. 

— earn one year of credit in physical 
education. Athletic training 
courses may count towards this 
requirement. All students must 
demonstrate competence in swim- 
ming. (Medical exemptions may 
be granted by the College physi- 
cian after an examination and 
review of the student's medical 
history and family physician's 
report.) 

— pass a minimum of 32 units (128 
semester hours) with a minimum 
cumulative average of 2.0. Addi- 
tional credits beyond 128 semester 
hours may be completed provided 
the minimum 2.0 cumulative aver- 
age is maintained. 

— complete in residence the final 
eight courses offered for the 
degree at Lycoming. 



— satisfy all financial obligations 
incurred at the College. 

— complete the above requirements 
within seven years of continuous 
enrollment following the date of 
matriculation. 

All exemptions or waivers of specific 
requirements are made by the Commit- 
tee on Academic Standards. 

THE BACHELOR OF 
FINE ARTS DEGREE 

The bachelor of fine arts degree is speci- 
fically designed to train professional 
artists. The BFA in sculpture is a syn- 
thesis of three diverse forms of educa- 
tion: a studio art program that emphas- 
izes the skills and concepts of the visual 
language; an apprenticeship that takes 
technical expertise as the departure 
point, and the scholastic method 
employed in both art history and the 
general-education component. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR 
THE BACHELOR OF 
FINE ARTS DEGREE 

Every BFA degree candidate is expected 
to complete the following requirements 
in order to qualify for graduation: 

— complete the 12-course Art De- 
partment course of study, while 
achieving a minimum grade point 
average of 2.0 in these courses. 

— complete the distribution pro- 
gram. 

— pass a minimum of 32 units (128 
semester hours) with a minimum 
cumulative average of 2.0 in 
these courses. 

— complete one of the field speciali- 
zation apprenticeships at the John- 
son Atelier Technical Institute of 
Sculpture. 

— earn one year of credit in physical 
education. Athletic training 
courses may count towards this 
requirement. All students must 
demonstrate competence in swim- 
ming. (Medical exemptions may 
be granted by the College physi- 
cian after an examination and 



review of the student's medical 
history and family physician's 
report.) 

— complete in residence the final 
eight courses offered for the 
degree at Lycoming. 

— satisfy all financial obligations 
incurred at the College. 

— have a public exhibition of origi- 
nal art work and make an oral 
defense. 

THE BACHELOR OF SCIENCE 
IN NURSING DEGREE 

The program of study leading to the 
bachelor of science in nursing degree is 
designed to prepare men and women as 
beginning practitioners of professional 
nursing, qualified for first-level posi- 
tions in a variety of health settings and 
for graduate study in nursing. Upon 
satisfactory completion of the program, 
a graduate is eligible to write the State 
Board of Nursing examination for licen- 
sure as a registered nurse. The goal of 
the program is to develop a liberally 
educated and self-directed individual 
who is prepared to contribute to the wel- 
fare of the nation through the practice of 
professional nursing which supports the 
promotion and restoration of health of 
individuals and families in a variety of 
settings. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR 

THE BACHELOR OF SCIENCE 

IN NURSING DEGREE 

Every BSN degree candidate is expected 
to complete the following requirements 
in order to qualify for graduation: 

— complete the 13-course major with 
a minimum cumulative average of 
2.0, including the required May 
term following the junior year. 

— complete the distribution require- 
ments for the BSN degree. 

— complete a minimum of 32 units 
(128 semester hours) with a mini- 
mum cumulative average of 2.0. 

— earn one year of credit in physical 
education. Athletic training 
courses may count towards this 
requirement. All students must 



demonstrate competence in swim- 
ming. (Medical exemptions may 
be granted by the College physi- 
cian after an examination and 
review of the student's medical 
history and family physician's 
report.) 

— complete in residence the final 
eight courses offered for the 
degree at Lycoming. 

— satisfy all financial obligations 
incurred at the College. 

— complete the degree requirements 
within a five-year period after 
admission to the nursing major. 
Candidates who are unable to meet 
this requirement must petition for 
an extension. 

WRITING ACROSS 

THE CURRICULUM PROGRAM 

L Purpose 

The Lycoming College Writing 
Across the Curriculum Program has 
been developed in response to the con- 
viction that writing skill promotes intel- 
lectual growth and is a hallmark of the 
educated person. The program has 
therefore been designed to achieve two 
major, interrelated objectives: 

(1) to enhance student learning in 
general and subject mastery in parti- 
cular, and 

(2) to develop students" abilities to 
communicate clearly. In this pro- 
gram students are given opportuni- 
ties to write in a variety of contexts 
and in a substantial number of 
courses, in which they receive 
faculty guidance and reinforcement. 

IL Program Requirements 

In order to graduate from Lycoming 
all students must complete the following 
writing requirements: 

A. English 005 (Workshop in 
Developmental Writing) or 
exemption from the course. 

B. English 106 (Composition) and 
one other English course. 

C. A writing component in all dis- 
tribution courses completed at 
Lycoming. 

D. Two courses designated as 
writing-intensive, or "W" courses. 



( 1 ) Successful completion of 
English 106 is a prerequisite 
for enrollment in writing- 
intensive courses. 

(2) All courses designated "W" 
are numbered 200 or above. 

(3) Each student must complete 
one "W" course from 
among those offered by the 
major department, or, with 
departmental approval, from 
a related department. The 
other "W" course com- 
pleted must be from a depart- 
ment other than the major 
department. In the case of 
students with multiple 
majors, one "W" course 
must be completed from one 
of those majors. The second 
course may be taken in one 
of the student's other majors. 

(4) Students should take one 
"W" course during the 
sophomore year and one 
during the junior year — 
though other sequences are 
possible and may in certain 
circumstances be advisable. 

(5) A writing intensive course 
may not duplicate a course 
taken to satisfy II. B. 

THE DISTRIBUTION PROGRAM 

A course can be used to satisfy only one 
distribution requirement. Courses for 
which a grade of "P" is recorded may 
not be used toward the fulfillment of the 
distribution requirements. (Refer to 
page 10 for an explanation of the grad- 
ing system.) A course in any of the fol- 
lowing distribution requirements refers 
to a full-unit (four semester hours) 
course taken at Lycoming, any appro- 
priate combination of fractional unit 
courses taken at Lycoming which accu- 
mulate to four semester hours, or any 
single course of three or more semester 
hours transferred from another institu- 
tion. For the BSN degree, see special 
modified distribution requirements on 
page 7. 

English — Students are required to 



demonstrate competence in basic writ- 
ing skills and to pass English 106 and 
one other unit of English. Competence 
in basic writing skills may be demon- 
strated either by passing the Achieve- 
ment Examination in English Composi- 
tion or by earning a Pass in English 
005. A student must demonstrate this 
competence before being permitted to 
enroll in English 106. Unless impossible 
because of failure to complete English 
005, English 106 must be taken during 
the freshman year; English 106 or 
consent of instructor is required before 
enrolling in any other English course. 
Students may choose any course from 
the department's offerings to satisfy 
the requirement for another unit in 
English. 



Foreign Language or Mathematics 

— Students are required to meet a mini- 
mum basic requirement in either a fore- 
ign language or the mathematical sci- 
ences. 

Foreign Language. Students may 
choose from among French, German, or 
Spanish and are required to pass two 
courses on the intermediate or higher 
course level. Placement at the appropri- 
ate course level will be determined by the 
faculty of the Department of Foreign 
Languages and Literatures. Students 
who have completed two or more years 
of a given language in high school are 
not admitted for credit to the elementary 
course in the same foreign language 
except by written permission of the 
chairman of the department. French 228 
and Spanish 331 will meet part of this 
requirement only if the section taught in 
the language is completed. 

Mathematics. Students are required to 
demonstrate competence in basic algeb- 
ra and to pass three units of Mathemati- 
cal science other than Mathematics 005. 
Competence in basic algebra may be 
demonstrated either by passing the basic 
algebra section of the Mathematics 
Placement Examination or by passing 
Mathematics 005. By demonstrating 
higher competence on the Mathematics 
Placement Examination, students may 
reduce the requirement to two units of 



mathematical science. No more than 
one unit may be taken in computer sci- 
ence. 

Religion or Philosophy — Students 
are required to pass two courses in either 
religion or philosophy. Any two religion 
courses may be used to fulfill the 
philosophy/religion distribution require- 
ment, with this exception: only one 
course from the combination Religion 
120-121 may be selected for distribu- 
tion. 

Fine Arts — Students are required to 
pass two courses as indicated in art, lit- 
erature, music, or theatre. 

Art. Any two courses. 

Literature. Any two literature courses 
selected from the offerings of the 
Departments of English and Foreign 
Languages and Literatures (French, 
German, or Spanish). 

Music. Any combination of eight (8) 
credits, including applied music, 
ensemble, and music department 
courses. 

Theatre. The fine arts distribution 
requirement may be satisfied by select- 
ing any two of the following recom- 
mended courses: Theatre 100, 110, 140, 
148, 332, 333, or other courses with the 
consent of the instructor. 

Natural Science — Students are 
required to pass any two courses as 
indicated in one of the following 
disciplines: astronomy and physics, 
except Astr 114 and 115; biology, 
or chemistry. 

History and Social Science — Students 
are required to pass two courses as indi- 
cated in economics, history, political 
science, psychology, or sociology/ 
anthropology. 

Economics. Any two courses. 

History. Any two courses, except 
History 222. 

Political Science. Any two courses. 

Psychology. Psychology 1 10 and one 
other course. 

Sociology/ Anthropology. Sociology/ 
Anthropology 110 plus another course. 



THE DISTRIBUTION PROGRAM 
FOR THE BSN DEGREE 

English — Same as B.A. degree. 
Mathematical Sciences — compe- 
tence in basic algebra as demon- 
strated by completion of, or 
exemption from Math 005; Mathe- 
matics 103; and Computer Science 
108, 125, or Mathematics 214. 
Religion and Philosophy — Relig- 
ion 120 and Philosophy 219. 
Fine Arts/Foreign Language — two 
courses from one department as 
follows: 

Art — any two (2) courses 
Literature — any two literature 
courses selected from the depart- 
ments of English and Foreign 
Languages and Literatures 
Music — any combination of eight 
(8) credits, including applied 
music, ensemble, and music 
department courses 
Theatre — any two (2) courses 
from among Theatre 100, 110, 
140, 148, 332, 333, or other 
courses with the consent of the 
instructor 
Language — any two (2) courses at 
the intermediate or higher level. 
No student who has had two or 
more years of a given foreign 
language in high school shall be 
admitted to the elementary 
courses in that same language 
for credit, except by written per- 
mission of the chairman of the 
department. 
Natural Science — Chemistry 108, 

115 
Social Science — Psychology 1 10 
and 1 17; Sociology and anthropol- 
ogy — one from among Soc 1 10. 
1 14, 220, 222. 224, 227, 228, 229. 
331, 334, and 335. 

THE MAJOR 

Students are required to complete a 
series of courses in one departmental or 
interdisciplinary (established or individ- 
ual) major. Specific course require- 
ments for each major offered by the 
College are listed in the curriculum sec- 
tion of this catalog. Students must earn a 



2.0 or higher grade-point average in 
those courses stipulated as comprising 
the major. (This requirement is not met 
by averaging the grades for all courses 
completed in the major department.) 
Students must declare a major by the 
beginning of their junior year. Depart- 
mental and established interdisciplinary 
majors are declared in the Office of the 
Registrar, whereas individual interdis- 
ciplinary majors must be approved by 
the Committee on Curriculum Develop- 
ment. Students may complete more than 
one major, each of which will be 
recorded on the transcript. Students may 
be removed from major status if they are 
not making satisfactory progress in the 
major. This action is taken by the Dean 
of the College upon the recommenda- 
tion of the department, coordinating 
committee (for established interdiscip- 
linary majors), or Curriculum Develop- 
ment Committee (for individual inter- 
disciplinary majors). The decision of the 
Dean of the College may be appealed to 
the Academic Standards Committee by 
the student involved or the recommend- 
ing department or committee. 

Departmental Majors — Departmental 
majors are available in the following 
areas: 

Accounting 

Art History 

Art Studio 

Astronomy 

Biology 

Business Administration 

Chemistry 

Computer Science 

Economics 

English 

Foreign Languages, and Literatures 

French, German, Spanish 
History 
Mathematics 
Music 
Nursing 
Philosophy 
Physics 

Political Science 
Psychology 
Religion 

Sociology/ Anthropology 
Theatre 



Established Interdisciplinary Majors 

— The following established interdis- 
ciplinary majors include course work in 
two or more departments: 

Accounting-Mathematical Sciences 

American Studies 

Criminal Justice 

International Studies 

Literature 

Mass Communication 

Near East Culture and Archaeology 

Individual Interdisciplinary Majors 

— Students may design a major that is 
unique to their needs and objectives and 
which combines course work in more 
than one department. This major is 
developed in consultation with the stu- 
dent's faculty advisor and with a panel 
of faculty members from each of the 
sponsoring departments. The applica- 
tion is acted upon by the Curriculum 
Development Committee. The major 
normally consists of 10 courses beyond 
those taken to satisfy the distribution 
requirements. Students are expected to 
complete at least six courses at the 
junior or senior level. Examples of indi- 
vidual interdisciplinary majors are 
Racial and Cultural Minorities, Illustra- 
tion in the Print Medium, Environmen- 
tal Law, Advertising, Art/Business, 
Human Behavior, and Images of Man. 

Major in Sculpture Leading to 
Bachelor of Fine Arts Degree — 

Through a cooperative program with the 
Johnson Atelier Technical Institute of 
Sculpture, Mercerville, New Jersey, 
students may earn a BFA degree in 
sculpture. The major consists of a core 
academic program, a course of study in 
art, elective courses, and an apprentice- 
ship at the Johnson Atelier. 



THE MINOR 

The College awards two kinds of 
minors, departmental and interdisciplin- 
ary, in recognition of concentrated 
course work in an area other than the 
student's major. All minors are subject 
to the following limitations; 



— a minor must include at least 
two courses which are not counted 
in the student's major. 

— a student may receive at most two 
minors. 

— students with two majors may 
receive only one minor; students 
with three majors may not receive 
a minor. 

— students may not receive a minor 
in their major discipline unless 
their major discipline is Art and 
the minor is Art History. (A dis- 
cipline is any course of study in 
which a student can major. Tracks 
within majors are not separate dis- 
ciplines.) 

— a student may not receive a minor 
unless his average in the courses 
which count for his minor is a 
minimum of 2.00. 

— courses taken P/F may not be 
counted toward a minor. 

Students must declare their intention to 
minor by signing a form available in the 
Registrar's Office, getting required 
faculty signatures, and returning the 
completed form to the Records Room. 
When students complete a minor, the 
title will be indicated on their official 
transcript. Students must meet the 
requirements for the minor which are in 
effect at the time they declare a minor or 
which are in effect subsequent to that 
time and before they graduate. 

Departmental Minors — Require- 
ments for a departmental minor vary 
from department to department. Stu- 
dents interested in pursuing a depart- 
mental minor should consult that depart- 
ment for its policy regarding minors. 

Departmental minors are available in 
the following areas; 
ACCOUNTING 

Financial Accounting 

Managerial Accounting 

Federal Income Tax 
ART 

Art History 

Commercial Design 

Painting 

Photography 

Sculpture 



BIOLOGY 

BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

Marketing 

Finance 
CHEMISTRY 
ECONOMICS 
ENGLISH 

Literature 

Writing 
FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND 

LITERATURES 

French 

German 

Spanish 
HISTORY 

American History 

European History 

History 
MASS COMMUNICATION 
MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES 

Computer Science 

Mathematics 
PHILOSOPHY 

Philosophy 

Philosophy and Law 

Philosophy and Science 

The History of Philosophy 
POLITICAL SCIENCE 

Political Science 

Foreign Affairs 

Legal Studies 
PSYCHOLOGY 
RELIGION 

SOCIOLOGY/ANTHROPOLOGY 
THEATRE 

Theatre History & Literature 

Performance 

Technical Theatre 

Interdisciplinary Minors — Interdis- 
ciplinary minors include coursework in 
two or more departments. Students 
interested in interdisciplinary minors 
should consult the faculty coordinator of 
that minor. Interdisciplinary minors are 
available in the following areas; BIBLI- 
CAL LANGUAGES. CRIMINAL JUS- 
TICE. MASS COMMUNICATION, 
and WOMEN'S STUDIES. 



ACADEMIC ADVISEMENT 

One advantage of a small college is the 
direct, personal contact between a stu- 



dent and his or her college instructors 
who care about that student's personal, 
academic, and professional aspirations. 
The student can draw upon their years of 
experience to resolve questions about so- 
cial adjustment, workload, study skills, 
tutoring, and more. Perhaps the member 
of the faculty with the most impact on a 
student is the academic advisor. 

The freshman advisor, whom the stu- 
dent meets at summer orientation, assists 
with course selection by providing accu- 
rate information about requirements and 
programs and with personal adjustment 
by helping the student recognize his or 
her own goals. In addition, the advisor 
will refer students to other campus re- 
sources whenever the need is apparent. 

During the student's sophomore year, 
he or she will choose a major and select 
an advisor from the major department. 
The new advisor, while serving as a re- 
source for the student, can best advise 
that student about course selection and 
career opportunities. 

Advisors at Lycoming endeavor to 
contribute to our students' development 
in yet another way. We insist that stu- 
dents assume full responsibility for their 
decisions and academic progress. By 
doing so, we help to prepare them for the 
harder choices and responsibilities of the 
professional world. 

Also, Lycoming provides special 
advising programs for careers in medi- 
cine, law. and religion. Interested stu- 
dents should register with the appropriate 
advisory committee immediately after 
deciding to enter one of these profes- 
sions. 

Preparation for Educational Profes- 
sions — Lycoming College believes that 
the liberal arts provide the best prepara- 
tion for future teachers, thus all educa- 
tion students complete a liberal arts ma- 
jor in addition to the Lycoming College 
Teacher Education Certificate require- 
ments. Students can be certified in 
elementary education or one or more of 
the following secondary areas: art (K- 
12), biology, chemistry, English, 
French, general science (with biology or 
astronomy/physicsl tracks). German, 
mathematics, music (K-12), physics, so- 



cial studies, and Spanish. All teacher- 
education programs are approved by the 
Pennsylvania Department of Education. 
Pennsylvania certificates are recognized 
in most other states either through recip- 
rocal agreements or by transcript evalua- 
tion. 

Preparation for Health Professions 

— The program of pre-professional 
education for the health professions 
(allopathic, dental, osteopathic, pediat- 
ric and veterinary medicine, optometry, 
and pharmacy) is organized around a 
sound foundation in biology, chemistry, 
mathematics, and physics and a wide 
range of subject matter from the humani- 
ties, social sciences, and fine arts. At 
least three years of undergraduate study 
is recommended before entry into a pro- 
fessional school; the normal procedure is 
to complete the bachelor of arts degree. 

Students interested in one of the 
health professions or in an allied health 
career should make their intentions 
known to the admissions office when 
applying and to the Health Professions 
Advisory Committee (HPAC) during 
their first semester. This committee 
advises students concerning prepara- 
tion for and application to health- 
professions schools. All pre-health 
professions students are invited to join 
the student Pre-Health Professions 
Association. (See also descriptions 
of the nursing program and of the 
cooperative programs in podiatric 
medicine, optometry, and medical 
technology.) 

Preparation for Legal Professions 

— Lycoming offers a strong academic 
preparation for students interested in law 
as a profession. Admission to law school 
is not predicated upon a particular major 
or area of study; rather, a student is en- 
couraged to design a course of study (tra- 
ditional or interdisciplinary major) 
which is of personal interest and signifi- 
cance. While no specific major is recom- 
mended, there are certain skills of par- 
ticular relevance to the pre-law student; 
clear writing, analytical thinking, and 
language comprehension. These skills 
should be developed during the under- 



graduate years. 

Pre-law students should register with 
the Legal Professions Advisory Commit- 
tee (LPAC) upon entering Lycoming and 
should join the Pre-Law Society on cam- 
pus. LPAC assists the pre-law student 
through advisement, compilation of re- 
commendations, and dissemination of 
information and materials about law and 
the legal profession. The Pre-Law Socie- 
ty has sponsored films, speakers, and 
field trips, including visits to law school 
campuses. 

Preparation for Theological Profes- 
sions — The Theological Professions 
Advisory Committee (TPAC) acts as a 
"center" for students, faculty, and clergy 
to discuss the needs of students who want 
to prepare themselves for the ministry, 
religious education, advanced training in 
religion, or related vocations. Also, it 
may help coordinate internships for stu- 
dents who desire practical experience in 
the parish ministry or related areas. Upon 
entering Lycoming, students should reg- 
ister with TPAC if they plan to investi- 
gate the religious vocations. 

In general, students preparing to 
attend a theological seminary should ex- 
amine the suggestions set down by the 
Association of Theological Schools 
(available from TPAC). Recommended 
is a broad program in the liberal arts, a 
major in one of the humanities (English, 
history, languages, literature, philoso- 
phy, religion) or one of the social scien- 
ces (American studies, criminal justice, 
economics, international studies, politic- 
al science, psychology, sociology- 
anthropology), and a variety of electives. 
Students preparing for a career in reli- 
gious education should major in religion 
and elect five or six courses in psycholo- 
gy, education, and sociology. This prog- 
ram of study will qualify students to 
work as an educational assistant or a 
director of religious education after 
graduate study in a theological seminary. 

REGISTRATION 

During the registration period, students 
select their courses for the next semester 
and register their course selections in the 



Office of the Registrar. Course selection 
is made in consultation with the student's 
faculty advisor in order to insure that the 
course schedule is consistent with Col- 
lege requirements and student goals. Af- 
ter the registration period, any change in 
the student's course schedule must be 
approved by both the faculty advisor and 
Office of the Registrar. Students may not 
receive credit for courses in which they 
are not formally registered. 

During the first five days of classes, 
students may drop any course without 
any record of such enrollment appear- 
ing on the permanent record, and they 
may add any course that is not closed. 
Students wishing to drop a course 
between the fifth day and the 12th 
week of classes must secure a with- 
drawal form from the Office of the 
Registrar. Withdrawal grades are not 
computed in the grade point average. 
Students may not withdraw from courses 
after the 12th week of a semester and the 
comparable period during the May and 
summer terms. 

In two-credit ( V2 unit) courses meeting 
only during the last half of any semester, 
students may drop/add for a period of 
five days, effective with the mid-term 
date shown on the academic calendar. 
Withdrawal from half-semester courses 
with a withdrawal grade may occur with- 
in six weeks of the beginning of the 
course. It is understood that the period of 
time at the beginning of the semester and 
at the mid-point of the semester will be 
identical, for example, a period of five 
days as indicated above. 

THE UNIT COURSE SYSTEM 

Instruction at Lycoming College is 
organized, with few exceptions, on a 
departmental basis, most courses are unit 
courses, meaning that each course taken 
is considered to be equivalent to four 
semester hours of credit. Exceptions 
occur in applied music and theatre 
practicum courses, which are offered for 
either one-half or one semester hour of 
credit, and in departments that have 
elected to offer certain courses for the 
equivalent of one, two or three semester 
hours of credit. Further, independent 



studies and internships carrying two 
semester hours of credit may be de- 
signed. The normal student course load 
is four courses during the fall and spring 
semesters. Students who elect to attend 
the special sessions may enroll in one 
course during the May term and one or 
two courses in the summer term. A 
student is considered full time when 
enrolled for a minimum of three courses 
during the fall or spring semesters, 
one course for the May term, and two 
courses for the summer term. Students 
may enroll in five courses during the fall 
and spring during semesters if they are 
Lycoming scholars or were admitted to 
the Dean's List at the end of the previous 
semester. Exceptions may be granted by 
the Dean of the College. Overloads are 
not permitted during the May and 
summer terms. 



THE SYSTEM OF GRADING 
AND REPORTING OF GRADES 

The evaluation of student performance 
in credit courses is indicated by the use 
of traditional letter symbols. These sym- 
bols and their definitions are as follows: 
A Excellent — Signifies superior 
achievement through mastery of content 
or skills and demonstration of creative 
and independent thinking. 
B Good — Signifies better-than- 
average achievement wherein the stu- 
dent reveals insight and understanding. 
C Satisfactory — Signifies satisfactory 
achievement wherein the student's work 
has been of average quality and quantity. 
The student has demonstrated basic 
competence in the subject area and may 
enroll in additional course work. 
D Passing — Signifies unsatisfactory 
achievement wherein the student met 
only the minimum requirements for 
passing the course and should not 
continue in the subject area without 
departmental advice. 
F Failing — Signifies that the student 
has not met the minimum requirements 
for passing the course. 
I Incomplete work — Assigned in 
accordance with the restrictions of 
established academic policy. 



R A repeated course — Students shall 

have the option of repeating courses for 

which they already have received a 

passing grade in addition to those which 

they have failed. Credit is received only 

once for the course. The most recent 

course grade will count toward the 

G.P.A. 

P Passing work, no grade assigned — 

Converted from traditional grade of A 

through D. 

X Audit — Work as an auditor for 

which no credit is earned. 

W Withdrawal — Signifies withdrawal 

from the course from the sixth day 

through the twelfth week of the semester. 

The cumulative grade point average 
(GPA) is calculated by multiplying 
quality points by credits and dividing 
the total quality points by the total cred- 
its. A quality point is the unit of mea- 
surement of the quality of work done by 
the student. 



Grade 





Quality Points 




Earned 


le 


for each semester 




hour 


A 


4.00 


A- 


3.67 


B-h 


3.33 


B 


3.00 


B- 


2.67 


C + 


2.33 


C 


2.00 


c- 


1.67 


D-H 


1.33 


D 


1.00 


D- 


0.67 


F 


0.00 



The grade point average for the major 
is calculated in the same manner for the 
courses required for the major. 

A minimum of 2.00 is required for 
the cumulative grade point average and 
for the grade point average in the major 
to meet the requirements for graduation. 
You cannot compute your cumulative 
GPA by averaging your semester 
GPA's. 

Use of the pass/fail grading option is 
limited as follows (this does not apply to 
Education 005 and English 005): 



10 



- students may enroll on an P/F 
basis in no more than one 
course per semester and no more 
than four courses during the 
undergraduate career. 

- P/F courses completed after 
declaration of the major may not 
be used to satisfy a requirement 
of that major, including courses 
required by the major depart- 
ment which are offered by other 
departments. (Instructor-desig- 
nated courses are excepted from 
this limitation.) 

courses for which a grade of P is 
recorded may not be used toward 
fulfillment of any distribution 
requirement. 

students may not enroll in English 
106 on an P/F basis, 
a course selected on an P/F basis 
which is subsequently withdrawn 
will not count toward the four- 
course limit. 

instructor-designated courses may 
be offered during the May term 
with the approval of the Dean of 
the College. Such courses are not 
counted toward the four-course 
limit. 

P grades are not computed in the 
grade point average, 
students electing the P/F option 
may designate a minimum accept- 
ance letter grade from A to B-. If 
the student earns the designated 
grade or better, the grade will be 
recorded in the permanent record 
and computed in the grade point 
average. If a passing grade lower 
than the designated grade is 
earned, a grade of P will be 
recorded in the permanent record, 
but will not be computed in the 
grade point average. If a student 
selects P/F (with no designated 
minimum acceptance grade) and 
earns a grade of A to D-, a P will 
be recorded on the permanent 
record but not computed in the 
grade point average. In all cases, 
if a student earns a grade of F 
this grade will be recorded in the 
permanent record and computed 
in the student's grade point 



average. 

students must declare the P/F 
option before the end of the 
period during which courses may 
be added during any given sem- 
ester, half-semester, or term, 
instructors are not notified which 
of their students are enrolled on 
an P/F basis. 

students electing the P/F option 
are expected to perform the same 
work as those enrolled on a 
regular basis. 

Incomplete grades may be given 
if, for absolutely unavoidable rea- 
sons (usually medical in nature), 
the student has not been able to 
complete the work requisite to the 
course. An incomplete grade must 
be removed within six weeks of 
the next regular semester. 

Students shall have the option 
of repeating courses for which 
they already have received a pass- 
ing grade in addition to those 
which they have failed. Recording 
of grades for all repeated courses 
shall be governed by the following 
conditions: 

a course may be repeated only 
one time. 

both attempts will be recorded on 
the student's transcript, 
credit for the course will be given 
only once. 

the most recent grade will count 
toward the G.P.A. with this excep- 
tion: A "W" grade cannot replace 
another grade. 

a repeated course will be counted 
toward the total number of unsuc- 
cessful attempts. 



ATTENDANCE 

The academic program at Lycoming is 
based upon the assumption that there is 
value in class attendance for all students. 
Individual instructors have the preroga- 
tive of establishing reasonable absence 
regulations in any course. The student is 
responsible for learning and observing 
these regulations. 



STUDENT RECORDS 

The policy regarding student educational 
records is designed to protect the privacy 
of students against unwarranted intru- 
sions and is consistent with Section 438 
of the General Education Provision Act 
(commonly known as the Family Educa- 
tional Rights and Privacy Act of 1974, as 
amended). The details of the College 
policy on student records and the proce- 
dures for gaining access to student re- 
cords are contained in the current issue 
of Student Handbook, which is available 
in the library and the Office of the Dean 
of Student Services. 

ACADEMIC STANDING AND 
ACADEMIC HONESTY 

Students will be placed on academic 
probation if either the number of hours 
completed or cumulative grade point 
average falls below the following stan- 
dards: 

Semester Hours Cumulative 

(Full-time) Completed GPA 

1 12 1.66 

2 24 1.85 

3 40 1.90 

4 56 2.00 

5 72 2.00 

6 88 2.00 

7 104 2.00 

8 120 2.00 

In order to meet graduation require- 
ments, students must complete 128 cre- 
dit hours. Students who are enrolled part 
time or for fewer than the normal four 
courses per term will be expected to com- 
plete an equivalent proportion of their 
program each semester. 



Students will be subject to suspension 
from the College if they: 

— are on probation for two consecu- 
tive semesters; 

— achieve a grade point average of 
1 .00 or below during any one semester. 
Students will be subject to dismissal 
from the College if they: 



II 



— can not reasonably complete all re- 
quirements for a degree; 

— exceed 24 semester hours of unsuc- 
cessful course attempts (grades of F, 
W. and R) except in the case of with- 
drawal for medical or psychological 
reasons. 

The integrity of the academic process of 
the College requires honesty in all phases 
of the instructional program. The Col- 
lege assumes that students are committed 
to the principle of academic honesty. 
Students who fail to honor this commit- 
ment are subject to dismissal. Procedural 
guidelines and rules for the adjudication 
of cases of academic dishonesty are 
printed in The Faculty Handbook and 
The Pathfiner (the student academic 
handbook), copies of which are available 
in the library. 

TRANSFER CREDIT 

College students who wish to study 
at other campuses must obtain prior 
written approval to do so from their 
advisor and the Lycoming College 
registrar. Coursework counting toward 
a major or minor must be approved in 
advance by the chairperson of the 
department in which the major or minor 
is offered. Once a course is approved, the 
credit and grades for the course will 
transfer to Lycoming and be calculated 
in the student's grade point average as 
if the courses were taken here. This 
means that "D" and "F" grades will 
transfer as well as all other grades. In 
addition, students are expected to be 
registered at Lycoming for their last eight 
courses. Requests for waivers of this 
regulation must be sent to the Committee 
on Academic Standards. Final determi- 
nation of transfer credit will be made by 
the Lycoming College registrar based on 
official transcripts only. 

CREDIT BY EXAMINATION 

Advanced Placement — Entering fresh- 
men who have completed an advanced 
course while in secondary school and 
who have taken the appropriate adv- 
anced-placement examination of the 
College Entrance Examination Board 



(CEEB) are encouraged to apply for cre- 
dit and advanced placement at the time of 
admission. A grade of three or above is 
considered satisfactory. Students should 
inform the Registrar's Office and their 
academic advisor immediately when 
advanced placement examinations have 
been taken. 

College Level Examination Prog- 
ram (CLEP) — Students may earn col- 
lege credit for superior achievement 
through CLEP. By achieving at the 75th 
percentile or above on the General Ex- 
aminations and the 65th percentile or 
above on approved Subject Examina- 
tions, students may earn up to 50 percent 
of the course requirements for a bachelor 
of arts degree. Although these examina- 
tions may be taken after enrollment, new 
students who are competent in a given 
area are encouraged to take the examina- 
tion of their choice during the second 
semester of their senior year so that 
Lycoming will have the test scores avail- 
able for registration advisement for the 
first semester of enrollment. Further in- 
formation about CLEP may be obtained 
through the secondary-school guidance 
office or the Office of Admissions or the 
Registrar at Lycoming College. Students 
should inform the Registrar's Office and 
their academic advisor immediately 
when CLEP examinations have been 
taken. 

ACADEMIC HONORS 

Deans's List — Students are admitted to 
the Dean's List at the end of the fall and 
spring semesters if they have completed 
at least 15 credits with other than P or 
R grades, and have a minimum grade 
point average of 3.50 for the semester. 

Graduation Honors — Students are 
awarded the bachelor of arts degree, the 
bachelor of fine arts degree . or the bache- 
lor of science in nursing degree with hon- 
ors when they have earned the following 
grade point averages based on all courses 
attempted at Lycoming, with a minimum 
of 64 credits (16 units) required for a 
student to be eigible for honors: 

summa cum laude 3.90-4.00 



magna cum laude 3.50-3.89 

cum laude 3.25-3.49 

Academic Honor Awards, Prizes, 
and Societies — Superior academic 
achievement is recognized through the 
conferring of awards and prizes at the 
annual Honors Day convocation, the 
Academic Awards banquet, and Com- 
mencement and through election to 
membership in honor societies. 

Societies 

Biology Beta Beta Beta 

Freshmen Men Blue Key 

Freshmen Women Gold Key 

Economics .... Omicron Delta Epsilon 

English Sigma Tau Delta 

General Academic Phi Kappa Phi 

History Phi Alpha Theta 

Nursing Sigma Theta Tau* 

Philosophy Phi Sigma Tau 

Physics Sigma Pi Sigma 

Political Science Pi Sigma Alpha 

Psychology Psi Chi 

Social Science Pi Gamma Mu 

Tlieatre .. Alpha Psi Omega (Omega Chi) 
*charter application filed in Spring 1988 

Prizes and Awards 

American Chemical Society Award — 
The award, sponsored by the Susquehan- 
na Valley Chapter of the society, is given 
to the outstanding senior in chemistry 
who plans to enter the profession. 

Accounting Society Service Award — 
The award is given for outstanding ser- 
vice to the Lycoming College Account- 
ing Society. 

American Institute of Chemists Prize — 
The prize, given by the Philadelphia 
section of the institute, goes to a senior 
major for excellence in chemistry. 

William T. and Ruth S. Askey Music 
Prize — given to a graduating senior who 
is recognized for his/her proficiency as a 
music major. 

Jack C. Buckle Award — The award is 
given annually to a junior male student 
with high moral qualities, who has made 



12 



an unusual contribution to campus life 
through leadership in student activities. 

Byron C. Brunstetter Science Award — 
The award is given for outstanding 
achievement in chemical and biological 
sciences. 

CRC Press Chemistry Achievement 
Award — The award is given to that 
freshman who has exhibited the highest 
academic achievement in chemistry. 

Chieftain Award — The College's most 
prestigious award is given to the senior 
who has contributed most to Lycoming 
through support of school activities; who 
has exhibited outstanding leadership 
qualities; who has worked effectively 
with other members of the College com- 
munity; who has evidenced a good moral 
code; and whose academic rank is above 
the median for the preceding senior 
class. 

Civic Choir Award — The award is given 
to the College choir member who has 
outstanding musical ability and who has 
made significant leadership contribu- 
tions to the choir. 

Class of 1907 Prize — The prize is given 
to the senior who has been oustanding in 
the promotion of College spirit through 
participation in athletics and other activi- 
ties. 

Benjamin C. Conner Prize — The prize 
is given to the graduating student who 
has done outstaiiding work in mathema- 
tics. 

Biology Service Award — student who 
has shown good academic work and has 
fostered the ideals of the department by 
willingness to become involved in the 
activities of the department. 

Freshman Biology A ward — freshman 
who has obtained the highest overall 
average in Biology 110-111 (major 
biology lecture and laboratory). 

Durkheim Award — The award is given 
to the senior sociology/anthropology ma- 



jor who has done outstanding work in the 
field. 

Bishop William Perry Eveland Prize — 
The prize is given to the senior who has 
shown progress in scholarship, loyalty, 
school spirit, and participation in school 
activities. 

Excellence in Two-Dimensional Art 
Award — The award is given to the out- 
standing senior art major in this field. 

Excellence in Three-Dimensional Art 
Award — The award is given to the out- 
standing senior art major in this field. 

Excellence in Theatre Performance 
Award — The award is given to the stu- 
dent who has been outstanding as a per- 
former in the Arena Theatre. 

Excellence in Technical Theatre Award 
— The award is given to the student who 
has been outstanding as a technician for 
the Arena Theatre. 

Excellence in Political Science A ward — 
The award goes to the senior political 
science major who has performed with 
excellence. 

W. Arthur Fans Memorial Prize — Prize 
given in memory of Dr. W. Arthur Faus. 
a former Professor of Philosophy at 
Lycoming College, to the graduating 
senior who has done outstanding work in 
philosophy. 

J. W. Ferree Award — Given in memory 
of the first mathematics professor at 
Lycoming's lorerunner, the Dickinson 
Seminary, the award goes to the student 
most active in mathematical sciences. 

Facult}- Prize — The prize is given to the 
commuting student with satisfactory 
scholarship and who has been outstand- 
ing in promotion of school spirit through 
participation in school activities. 

Diirant L. Furey III Memorial Prize — 
The prize is given to the senior account- 
ing major who has shown outstanding 
achievement in accounting. 



Gillette Foreign Language Prizes — The 
prizes are given to the French, German, 
and Spanish majors who have achieved 
excellence in foreign languages. 

John P. Graham Award — Named in 
honor of a professor emeritus, the award 
is given to the senior English major who 
achieves the highest average in English. 

Edward J. Gray Prizes — The prizes are 
given to the graduating students with the 
highest and second highest averages. 

Dan Gustafson Award — In memory of a 
former member of the English Depart- 
ment, the award is given to the senior 
English major whose analytical writing 
demonstrates the highest standards of 
literary and critical excellence. 

IRUSKA Awards — The awards denote 
membership in the society for juniors 
who are very active on campus. 

Junior Book Award — The award is 
given to the outstanding junior political 
science major. 

Elisha Benson Kline Prize — The prize is 
given to the senior mathematics major 
with outstanding achievement in the 
field. 

The Kramer and Hoffmann Associates 
Award — for superior achievement in 
Federal Income Tax. 

Charles J. Kocian Awards — The 
awards are given to the accounting, busi- 
ness administration, and economics ma- 
jors who show the greatest proficiency in 
statistics; the mathematics major who 
shows the greatest proficiency in applied 
mathematics; the graduating senior who 
shows the greatest proficiency in compu- 
ter science and operations research; the 
graduating senior business administra- 
tion major with highest grade point aver- 
age; the graduating senior with highest 
average in the class and the graduating 
nursing major with highest grade point 
average. 



13 



Don Lincoln Larrabee Law Prize — The 
prize is given to the graduating student 
who has shown outstanding scholarship 
in legal principles. 

The John M. Lindemuth Endowed Prize 
Fund — The John M. Lindemuth En- 
dowed Prize Fund, established in 1986 
by Mr. and Mrs. John M. Lindemuth of 
Williamsport, Pennsylvania, provides 
annual cash awards for varsity football 
players who earn the highest cumulative 
grade point average in their chosen field 
of academic study at Lycoming College. 
This prize is managed in compliance 
with current NCAA regulations concern- 
ing scholastic awards for athletes. 

C. Daniel and Jeanne Little Award — 
Presented in memory of two Lycoming 
alumni, the award is given to the out- 
standing student in public administra- 
tion. 

The Gertrude B. Madden Mass Com- 
munication Award — Established in 
1985 by the students of the Mass Com- 
munication Society, the award is to be 
presented annually to the senior mass 
communication major who, in the judg- 
ment of his or her peers, has best inte- 
grated academic excellence, profession- 
al development in a mass media field and 
contribution to campus media. 

The Makisu Award — The award is given 
for outstanding service to the college 
community, for dedication above and 
beyond the realm of one's obligations to 
the College. 

John C. McCune Memorial Prizes — 
The prizes are given to the senior majors 
in mathematics, biology, chemistry, 
physics, philosophy, and psychology 
who have attained the highest averages. 

Ethel McDonald Pax Christ i Award — 
The award is given for outstanding but 
quiet consistency in the life of faith and 
the practice of Christianity, noteworthy 
personal integrity and humble loving 
compassion expressed in daily life. 



Walter G. Mclver Award — Named after 
Lycoming's former choir director, the 
award is given to the choir member who 
has made outstanding campus contribu- 
tions outside of choir. 

Department of Nursing Award for Cli- 
nical Excellence — outstanding achieve- 
ment in the clinical setting. 

Department of Nursing Faculty A ward 

— senior nursing major who best exem- 
plifies the spirit of the profession. 

Lycoming College Nursing Honor Society 
Research Recognition A ward — given 
to the nursing student who has demon- 
strated an in-depth understanding of 
the research process, as evidenced by a 
completed research project, with formal 
dissemination of the results of the study. 

Pennsylvania Institute of Certified Pub- 
lic Accountants Award — The award is 
given to the senior accounting major who 
has demonstrated high scholastic stand- 
ing and qualities of leadership. 

Pocahontas Award — The award is 
given to Lycoming's outstanding female 
athlete. 

Psi Chi Service Award — The award is 
given for contributions to the Psychology 
Department. 

Research and Writing Prize in History — 
The prize is given to the student who 
does the best work in History 45. 

The Professor Logan A. Richmond 
Accounting Prize — is awarded annually 
to a graduating senior who has done out- 
standing work in accounting and demon- 
strated exceptional proficiency in 
writing. 

The Janet A. Rodgers Academic Award 

— established in honor of the founding 
chair of the Department of Nursing, pro- 
vides an annual $100 award to senior 
nursing student who demonstrates ex- 
ceptional academic achievement and has 
been an active participant in health- 
related programs. 



Mary L. Russell Award — Named in 
honor of a professor emeritus of music, 
the award is given for outstanding music- 
al achievement. 

Sadler Prize — The prize is given to the 
student with the highest achievement in 
calculus, foundations of mathematics, 
algebra, and analysis. 

Nathan A . Scheib Memorial Music Fund 
— In memory of a friend of the College, 
the fund provides financial assistance to 
qualified deserving students for adv- 
anced training in music. 

Senior Management Award — The 
award is given to the senior business ma- 
jor with the best senior project in Busi- 
ness Administration 41. 

Senior Scholarship Prize in History — 
The prize is given to the senior major 
with the highest average. 

Service to Lycoming Award — Spon- 
sored by the Office of Student Services, 
the award is given to students who have 
made outstanding contributions to 
Lycoming. 

Frances K. Skeath Award — The award 
is given to the senior with outstanding 
achievement in mathematics. 

J. Milton Skeath Award — The award is 
given for superior undergraduate 
achievement and potential for further 
work in psychology. 

Sophomore Intermediate Accounting 
Award — for the accounting major 
with the highest average in Intermediate 
Accounting at the end of the spring term. 

John A. Streeter Memorial Award in 
Economics — The award is given to the 
graduating student with outstanding 
achievement in economics. 

John A. Streeter Memorial Award in 
Music — The award is given to the 
College band member who has out- 
standing musical ability and who has 



14 



made significant leadership contri- 
butions to the band. 

Tomahawk Award — The award is given 
to Lycoming's outstanding male athlete. 

Trask Chemistry Prize — The prize is 
given to the senior chemistry major who 
has done outstanding work in the field. 

Wall Street Journal Awards — Two 
awards are given. One is given to the 
senior business major for excellence in 
the field and service to the College com- 
munity. A second award is given for ex- 
cellence in economics. 

Williamsport Rotary Club Nursing Prize 
— established in 1988, this endowed 
prize provides annual interest to a regis- 
tered nurse with the highest cumulative 
grade point average. Candidates should 
have successfully completed a minimum 
of 24 academic credits toward the BSN 
degree. 

Sol "Woody" Wolf Award — The award 
is given to the junior athlete who has 
shown the most improvement. 

Women of Lycoming Scholarship — The 
scholarship is given to the junior woman 
student who has shown satisfactory scho- 
larship, outstanding school spirit, and 
who is active in campus activities. 

Departmental Honors — Honors pro- 
jects are normally undertaken only in a 
student's major, and are available only to 
exceptionally well-qualified students 
who have a solid background in the area 
of the project and are capable of con- 
siderable self-direction. The prere- 
quisites for registration in an honors 
program are as follows: 

— a faculty member from the depart- 
ment(s) in which the honors project is to 
be undertaken must agree to be the direc- 
tor and must secure departmental 
approval of the project. 

— the director, in consuhation with 
the student, must convene a committee 
consisting of two faculty members from 
the department in which the project is to 
be undertaken, one of whom is the direc- 



tor of the project, and one faculty mem- 
ber from each of two other departments 
related to the subject matter of the study. 

— the honors committee must then 
certify by their signatures on the applica- 
tion that the project in question is 
academically legitimate and worthy of 
pursuit as an honors project, and that the 
student in question is qualified to pursue 
the project. 

— the project must be approved by the 
Committee on Individual Studies. 

Students successfully complete hon- 
ors projects by satisfying the following 
conditions in accordance with guide- 
lines established by the Committee on 
Individual Studies: 

— the student must produce a sub- 
stantial research paper, critical study, or 
creative project. If the end product is a 
creative project, a critical paper analyz- 
ing the techniques and principles em- 
ployed and the nature of the achievement 
represented in the project shall be sub- 
mitted. 

— the student must successfully ex- 
plain and defend the work in a final oral 
examination given by the honors com- 
mittee. 

— the honors committee must certify 
that the student has successfully de- 
fended the project, and that the student's 
achievement is clearly superior to that 
which would ordinarily be required to 
earn a grade of "A" in a regular indepen- 
dent-studies course. 

— the Committee on Individual Stu- 
dies must certify that the student has 
satisfied all of the conditions mentioned 
above. 

Except in unusual circumstances, honors 
projects are expected to involve indepen- 
dent study in two consecutive unit 
courses. Successful completion of the 
honors project will cause the designation 
of honors in that department to be placed 
upon the permanent record. Acceptable 
theses are deposited in the College lib- 
rary. In the event that the study is not 
completed successfully or is not deemed 
worthy of honors, the student shall be 
re-registered in independent studies and 
given a final grade for the course. 



Auditors — Any person may audit 
courses at Lycoming at one-fourth tui- 
tion per course. Laboratory and other 
special fees must be paid in full. Ex- 
aminations, papers, and other evaluation 
devices are not required of auditors, but 
individual arrangements may be made to 
complete such exercises with the consent 
of the instructor. The option to audit a 
course must be declared during the same 
period (currently five days) at the begin- 
ning of each semester, half-semester, or 
term as drop/add and pass/fail and must 
be completed in the Registrar's Office. 

SPECIAL FEATURES 

Academic Resource Center — The 

Academic Resource Center, located on 
the first floor of Rich Hall, provides a 
variety of free services to the campus 
community. 

The ARC provides one-on-one peer 
tutoring in writing, math, foreign 
languages, and sciences on a walk-in 
basis and peer tutoring by arrangement 
in other subjects. Writing tutors use 
questioning techniques to help others 
develop confidence and independence as 
writers. Other tutors provide class- 
room support by assisting students 
with homework assignments and exam 
review. 

Additional services available through 
the ARC include the following: 

— Survival Skills Workshops on 
topics such as time management, 
stress management, note-taking 
from lectures and textbooks, 
word processing for beginners, 
and proofreading techniques; 

— Paper File, a file of graded essays 
maintained by course; 

— Documentation Style Manual, 
for use when documenting a 
research paper; 

— the Writing Room, a quiet place 
for writers to work; and 

— self-paced computer assisted 
instructional programs in typing 
and speed reading and compre- 
hension. 

Developmental Program — The de- 
velopmental program is provided for stu- 



15 



dents who are identified as being able to 
benefit from specialized classroom in- 
struction in college-level reading and 
writing skills. Students develop these 
basic skills in the context of the regular 
academic curriculum. Both reading and 
writing skills are taught as part of an 
integrated curriculum consisting of a 
one-half unit course in developmental 
writing (ENGLISH 005) and a one-half 
unit course in developmental reading and 
study skills (EDUCATION 005). These 
courses are coordinated with one of the 
following areas; economics, history, 
political science, psychology, or sociol- 
ogy. Math skills are taught in a one-half 
unit algebra course (mathematics 005) 
which is conducted on an individualized 
basis with tutorial support. 

Placement tests in English and mathe- 
matics are administered as a part of the 
orientation program prior to matricu- 
lation. Scores on these tests determine 
placement in Education 005, English 
005, and/or Mathematics 005. A 
placement test may be scheduled only 
once after matriculation. 

Independent Studies — Independent 
studies are available to any qualified stu- 
dent who wishes to engage in and receive 
academic credit for any academically 
legitimate course of study for which he or 
she could not otherwise receive credit. It 
may be pursued at any level (introduc- 
tory, intermediate, or advanced) and in 
any department, whether or not the stu- 
dent is a major in that department. Stu- 
dies projects which duplicate catalog 
courses are sometimes possible, and are 
subject to the same provisions which 
apply to all studies projects. In order for a 
student to be registered in an indepen- 
dent-study course, the following condi- 
tions must be satisfied: 

— an appropriate member of the 
faculty must agree to supervise the pro- 
ject and must certify by signing the ap- 
plication form that the project is 
academically legitimate and involvef an 
amount of work appropriate for the 
amount of academic credit requested, 
and that the student in question is qual- 
ified to pursue the project. 



— the studies project must be 
approved by the chairman of the depart- 
ment in which the studies project is to be 
undertaken. 

— after the project is approved by the 
instructor and by the chairman of the 
appropriate department, the studies pro- 
ject must be approved by the Committee 
on Individual Studies. 

In addition, participation in indepen- 
dent-studies projects, with the exception 
of those which duplicate catalog courses, 
is subject to the following: 

— students may not engage in more 
than one independent-studies project 
during any given semester. 

— students may not engage in more 
than two independent-studies projects 
during their academic careers at Lycom- 
ing College. 

As with other academic policies, any 
exceptions to these two rules must 
be approved by the Committee on 
Academic Standards. 

Internship Program — An in- 
ternship is a course jointly sponsored by 
the College and a public or private agen- 
cy or subdivision of the Collge in which a 
student is enabled to earn college credit 
by participating in some active capacity 
as an assistant, aide, or apprentice. At 
least one-half of the effort expended by 
the intern should consist of academic 
work related to agency situations. The 
objectives of the internship program are 

( 1 ) to further the development of a cen- 
tral core of values, awarenesses, 
strategies, skills, and information 
through experiences outside the clas- 
sroom or other campus situations, and 

(2) to facilitate the integration of theory 
and practice by encouraging students to 
relate their on-campus academic experi- 
ences more directly to society in general 
and to possible career and other post- 
baccalaureate objectives in particular. 

Any junior or senior student in good 
academic standing may petition the 
Committee on Individual Studies for 
approval to serve as an intern. A max- 
imum of 1 6 credits can be earned through 
the internship program. Guidelines for 



program development, assignment of 
tasks and academic requirements, such 
as exams, papers, reports, grades, etc., 
are established in consultation with a 
faculty director at Lycoming and an 
agency supervisor at the place of in- 
ternship. 

Students with diverse majors have par- 
ticipated in a wide variety of internships, 
including those with the Allenwood 
Federal Prison Camp, Lycoming County 
Commissioners Office, Department of 
Environmental Resources, Head Start, 
Lycoming County Historical Society, 
business and accounting firms, law 
offices, hospitals, social service agen- 
cies, banks, and Congressional offices. 

May Term — The May term is a four- 
week voluntary session designed to pro- 
vide students with courses listed in the 
catalog and experimental and special 
courses that are not normally available 
during the fall and spring semesters and 
summer term. Some courses are offered 
on campus; others involve travel. A 
number offer interdisciplinary credit. 
Illustrations of the types of courses 
offered during the May term are: 

(a) Study-Travel: Cultural tours of 
Germany, Spain, and France; Archaelo- 
gical expeditions to the Middle East; 
Anthropological expeditions to study tri- 
cultural communities in New Mexico; 
Utopian Communities; Revolutionary 
and Civil War Sites; Colonial America 
on Tour; Art on the East Coast; The New 
Kingdom in Ancient Egypt. 

(b) On-Campus: Field Geology, Field 
Ornithology, Energy Economics, Wri- 
ter's Seminar, Psychology of Group Pro- 
cesses, Collective Bargaining, Aquatic 
Biology, Medical Genetics, Energy 
Alternatives, White Collar Crime. Las- 
ers and their Applications. Selected 
Short Story Writers and their Works, 
Popular Forms of Contemporary Fiction, 
Administrative and Organizational Be- 
havior of Police, Plant and Greenhouse 
Management, and Street Law. 

Although participation in the May 
term is voluntary, student response has 
been outstanding with approximately 20 
percent of the student body enrolling. In 
addition to the courses themselves. 



16 



attractions include small and informal 
classes and reduced tuition rates. 

Part Time Students — Students who 
do not wish to pursue a degree at Lycom- 
ing College may, if space permits, regis- 
ter for credit or audit courses on either a 
part-time or full-time basis. Students 
who register for one or two courses are 
considered to be enrolled part time; stu- 
dents who register for three or four 
courses are considered to be enrolled full 
time. 

Anyone wishing to register as a non- 
degree student must fill out an applica- 
tion form in the Admissions Office, pay 
a one-time application fee and pay the 
tuition rate in effect at the time of each 
enrollment. After a non-degree student 
has attempted four courses, the Dean of 
the College reserves the right to grant or 
deny permission to continue to register 
in this category. 

All non-degree students are subject to 
the general laws and regulations of the 
College as stated in the College Catalog 
and the Student Handbook. The College 
reserves the right to deny permission to 
register to individuals who do not meet 
the standards of the College. 

Students who wish to change from a 
non-degree to a degree status must reapp- 
ly (with no application fee) and satisfy all 
conditions for admission and registration 
in effect at the time of application for 
degree status. 

Study Abroad — Students have the 
opportunity to study abroad under au- 
spices of approved universities and agen- 
cies. While study abroad is particularly 
attractive to students majoring in foreign 
languages and literatures, this opportun- 
ity is open to all students in good 
academic standing. Mastery of a foreign 
language is desirable but not required in 
all programs. Dr. Richard Barker, assis- 
tant professor of foreign languages and 
literatures, serves as coordinator for the 
Study Abroad Program. Interested stu- 
dents may contact him about opportuni- 
ties available and procedural questions. 

Teacher Intern Program — The pur- 
pose of the teacher intern program is to 



provide individuals who have completed 
a baccalaureate degree with the oppor- 
tunity to become certified teachers 
through on-the-job training. Interns can 
earn a Lycoming College Teacher 
Education Certificate and be certified by 
the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania in 
elementary education or one or more of 
the following secondary areas: art, biolo- 
gy, chemistry, English. French, general 
science (with biology or astronomy/phy- 
sics tracks), German, mathematics, 
music, physics, social studies, and 
Spanish. 

Interested individuals should file a for- 
mal application with the Education De- 
partment for admission to the Intern 
Program. Upon completion of the ap- 
plication process, interns receive a letter 
of Intern Candidacy from the Pennsylva- 
nia Department of Education which the 
candidate then uses to apply for a 
teaching position. Necessary profession- 
al coursework can be completed prior to 
the teaching experience or coordinated 
with the teaching experience when indi- 
viduals obtain teaching positions. 

NOTE: Lycoming College cannot assume re- 
sponsibility for the health, safety, or welfare of 
any student engaged in or en route to or from 
any off-campus study or activity not under the 
exclusive jurisdiction of this institution. 



COOPERATIVE PROGRAMS 

Lycoming has developed several 
cooperative programs to provide stu- 
dents with opportunities to extend their 
knowledge, abilities, and talents in 
selected areas through access to the spe- 
cialized academic programs and facili- 
ties of other colleges, universities, 
academies, and hospitals. Although 
thorough advisement and curricular 
planning are provided for each of the 
cooperative programs, admission to 
Lycoming and registration in the prog- 
ram of choice do not guarantee admis- 
sion to the cooperating institution. The 
prerogative of admitting students to the 
cooperative aspect of the program rests 
with the cooperating institution. Stu- 
dents who are interested in a cooperative 
program should contact the coordinator 



during the first week of the first semester 
of their enrollment at Lycoming. This is 
necessary to plan their course programs 
in a manner that will insure completion 
of required courses according to the 
schedule stipulated for the program. All 
cooperative programs require special 
coordination of course scheduling at 
Lycoming. 

Engineering — Combining the 
advantages of a liberal-arts education 
and the technical training of an engineer- 
ing curriculum, this program is offered in 
conjunction with The Pennsylvania State 
University. Students complete three 
years of study at Lycoming and two years 
at the cooperating university . Upon satis- 
factory completion of the first year of 
engineering studies, Lycoming awards 
the bachelor of arts degree. When stu- 
dents successfully complete the second 
year of engineering studies, the cooper- 
ating university awards the bachelor of 
science degree in engineering. 

At Lycoming, students complete the 
distribution program and courses in 
physics, mathematics, and chemistry. 
The Pennsylvania State University of- 
fers aerospace, agricultural, ceramic, 
chemical, civil, electrical, engineering 
science, environmental, industrial, 
mechanical, mining and nuclear 
engineering. 

Forestry or Environmental Studies 

— Lycoming College offers a coopera- 
tive program with Duke University in 
environmental management and fore- 
stry. Qualified students can earn the 
bachelor's and master's degrees in five 
years, spending three years at Lycoming 
and two years at Duke. All Lycoming 
distribution and major requirements 
must be completed by the end of the 
junior year. At the end of the first year at 
Duke, the A.B. degree will be awarded 
by Lycoming. Duke will award the pro- 
fessional degree of Master of Forestry or 
Master of Environmental Management 
to qualified candidates at the end of the 
second year. 

The major program emphases at Duke 
are Forest Resource Management, Re- 
source Economics and Policy, and Re- 



17 



source Ecology. The program is flexible 
enough, however, to accommodate a 
variety of individual designs. An under- 
graduate major in one of the natural sci- 
ences, social sciences, or business may 
provide good preparation for the prog- 
rams at Duke, but a student with any 
undergraduate concentration will be con- 
sidered for admission. All students need 
at least two courses each in biology, 
mathematics, and economics. 

Students begin the program at Duke in 
July after their junior year at Lycoming 
with a one-month session of field work in 
natural resource management. They 
must complete a total of 48 units which 
generally take four semesters. 

Some students prefer to complete the 
bachelor's degree before undertaking 
graduate study at Duke. The master's 
degree requirements for these students 
are the same as for those students enter- 
ing after the junior year, but the 48-unit 
requirement may be reduced for com- 
pleted relevant undergraduate work of 
satisfactory quality. All credit reductions 
are determined individually and consider 
the student's educational background 
and objectives. 

Medical Technology — Students de- 
siring a career in medical technology 
may either complete a bachelor of arts 
program followed by a clinical internship 
at any American Medical Association- 
accredited hospital, or they may com- 
plete the cooperative program. Students 
electing the cooperative program nor- 
mally study for three years at Lycoming, 
during which time they complete 24 unit 
courses, including the College distribu- 
tion requirements, a major, and require- 
ments of the National Accrediting Agen- 
cy for Clinical Laboratory Sciences 
(NAACLS). The current requirements of 
the NAACLS are: four courses in che- 
mistry (one of which must be either orga- 
nic or bio-chemistry); four courses in 
biology (including courses in microbiol- 
ogy and immunology), and one course in 
mathemtics. 

Students in the cooperative program 
usually major in biology, following a 
modified major of six unit courses that 
exempts them from Ecology (Biology 



224) and Plant Sciences (Biology 225). 
Students must take either Microbiology 
(Biology 221) or Microbiology for the 
Health Sciences (Biology 226), and 
either Animal Physiology (Biology 223) 
or Cell Physiology (Biology 335). The 
cooperative program requires successful 
completion of a one-year internship at an 
American Medical Association- 
accredited hospital. Lycoming is affili- 
ated with the following accredited hos- 
pitals; Divine Providence, Rolling Hill, 
Robert Packer, Lancaster, and Abing- 
ton. Students in the cooperative program 
receive credit at Lycoming for each of 
eight unit courses in biology and chemis- 
try successfullly completed during the 
clinical internship. Successful comple- 
tion of the Registry Examination is not 
considered a graduation requirement at 
Lycoming College. 

Students entering a clinical internship 
for one year after graduation from 
Lycoming must complete all of the re- 
quirements of the cooperative program, 
but are not eligible for the biology major 
exemptions indicated above. Upon gra- 
duation, such students may apply for 
admission to a clinical program at any 
hospital. 

Optometry — Through the Acceler- 
ated Optometry Education Curriculum 
Program, students interested in a career 
in optometry may qualify for admission 
to the Pennsylvania College of 
Optometry after only three years at 
Lycoming College. After four years at 
the Pennsylvania College of Optometry a 
student will earn a Doctor of Optometry 
degree. Selection of candidates for the 
professional segment of the program is 
completed by the admissions committee 
of the Pennsylvania College of 
Optometry during the student's third 
year at Lycoming. (This is one of two 
routes that students may choose. Any 
student, of course, may follow the regu- 
lar application procedures for admission 
to the Pennsylvania College of 
Optometry or another college of 
optometry to matriculate following com- 
pletion of his or her baccalaureate prog- 
ram.) During the three years at Lycom- 
ing College, the student will complete 24 



unit courses, including all distribution 
requirements, and will prepare for his or 
her professional training by obtaining a 
solid foundation in biology, chemistry, 
physics, and mathematics. During the 
first year of study at the Pennsylvania 
College of Optometry, the student will 
take 39 semester hours of basic science 
courses in addition to introductions to 
optometry and health care. Successful 
completion of the first year of profes- 
sional training will complete the course 
requirements for the A.B. degree at 
Lycoming College. 

Most students will find it convenient 
to major in biology in order to satisfy the 
requirements of Lycoming College and 
the Pennsylvania College of Optometry. 
Such students are allowed to complete a 
modified biology major which will ex- 
empt them from two biology courses; 
Ecology (Biology 224) and Plant Scien- 
ces (Biology 225). (This modified major 
requires the successful completion of the 
initial year at the Pennsylvania College 
of Optometry.) Students desiring other 
majors must coordinate their plans with 
the Health Professions Advisory Com- 
mittee in order to insure that they have 
satisfied all requirements. 

The Philadelphia Urban Semester — 

A full semester liberal arts program for 
professional development and field study 
is now available to Lycoming students. 
The program components are; field 
placement; City Seminar; evening semi- 
nars; and living and learning in the city. 
The program is open to students major- 
ing in any discipline or program. The 
Philadelphia Urban Semester is spon- 
sored and administered by the Great 
Lakes Colleges Association (Albion, 
Antioch, Denison, De Pauw, Earlham, 
Hope, Kalamazoo, Kenyon, Oberlin, 
Ohio Wesleyan, Wabash, Wooster). 

Normally the above special-semester 
programs are open only to juniors. 

NOTE: Lycoming College cannot assume re- 
sponsibility for the health, safety, or welfare of 
students engaged in or en route to or from any 
off-campus studies or activities which are not 
under the exclusive jurisdiction of this institu- 
tion. 



18 



Podiatry — Students interested in 
podiatry may either seek admission to a 
college of podiatric medicine upon com- 
pletion of the bachelor of arts degree or 
through the Accelerated Podiatric 
Medical Education-Curriculum Program 
(APMEC). The latter program provides 
an opportunity for students to qualify for 
admission to the Pennsylvania College of 
Podiatric Medicine (PCPM) or the Ohio 
College of Podiatric Medicine (OCPM) 
after three years of study at Lycoming. 
At Lycoming, students in the APMEC 
program must successfully complete 24 
unit courses, including the distribution 
requirements and a basic foundation 
in biology, chemistry, physics, and 
mathematics. During the first year of 
study at PCPM or OCPM, students 
must successfully complete a program of 
basic science courses and an introduction 
to podiatry. Successful completion of the 
first year of professional training will 
contribute toward the fulfillment of the 
course requirements for the bachelor of 
arts degree at Lycoming. 

Most students in the cooperative prog- 
ram will major in biology; if so, they will 
be allowed to complete a modified major 
which will exempt them from two biolo- 
gy courses: Ecology (Biology 224) and 
Plant Sciences (Biology 225). (This 
modified major requires the successful 
completion of the initial year at PCPM or 
OCPM). 

Students interested in a career in 
podiatric medicine should indicate their 
intentions to the Health Professions 
Advisory Committee. 

U.S. Army Reserve Officers Train- 
ing Corps Program (R.O.T.C.) — The 

program provides an opportunity for 
Lycoming students to enroll in R.O.T.C. 
Lycoming notes enrollment in and suc- 
cessful completion of the program on 
student transcripts. Military Science is a 
four-year program divided into a basic 
course given during the freshman and 
sophomore years and an advanced course 
given during the junior and senior years. 
Students who have not completed the 
basic course may qualify for the adv- 
anced course by completing summer 
camp between the sophomore and junior 



years. Students enrolled in the advanced 
course receive an annual stipend of 
$1 ,000. One course each in written com- 
munication, human behavior and milit- 
ary history will fulfill the professional 
military education requirements. 
R.O.T.C. scholarship cadets must also 
complete one semester of a foreign lan- 
guage. 

Students successfully completing the 
advanced course and advanced summer 
camp between the junior and senior years 
will qualify for a commission as a Sec- 
ond Lieutenant in the United States Army 
upon graduation, and will incur a service 
obligation in the active Army or Army 
Reserves. The only expense to the stu- 
dent for this program is the $75 uniform 
deposit, which is refundable, less costs. 

Sculpture — The Art Department 
with the Johnson Atelier Technical Insti- 
tute of Sculpture in Mercerville, New 
Jersey, offers a BFA degree in sculpture. 
It uses a classical apprenticeship 
approach as its teaching method. This 
ancient method of teaching is combined 
at Johnson with the most modem and 
technically advanced foundry and fabri- 
cating techniques. 

The Art Department offers a synthesis 
program that interrelates the student ex- 
perience at both institutions. This is 
achieved by having the student rotate be- 
tween Lycoming and the atelier so that 
each form of education is preparation for 
the other. Lycoming offers a core 
academic program, a course of study in 
the Art Department, and elective course 
opportunities. Lycoming gives eight 
course units of college credit to the stu- 
dent for having successfully completed 
one of the apprenticeship programs at the 
Johnson Atelier. 

All work completed by the student at 
Lycoming by the end of the sophomore 
year will be applicable to a bachelor of 
arts degree with a major in art should the 
student decide to withdraw from the BFA 
program. If the student should withdraw 
from the cooperative program prior to 
completing the apprenticeship at the 
Johnson Atelier, Lycoming will give up 
to four units of credit or one semester's 
work for the internship. If, however, the 



student completes more work at the ate- 
lier than the four units, that extra work 
will not be credited to the bachelor of arts 
degree; it will only be used as part of the 
bachelor of fine arts degree, and then 
only if the course at the atelier is com- 
pleted. 

This course of study is very rigorous. 
It will require that the student be in- 
volved almost continuously, either at 
Lycoming or at the Johnson Atelier, dur- 
ing the four years it will take to complete 
the degree. (See Art Department listing 
for specific program.) 

Student Enrichment Semester — 

This voluntary program is designed to 
expand academic and life opportunities 
for students and to provide for participa- 
tion in specialized programs and courses 
not available at Lycoming. Other mem- 
bers of the program are Bucknell and 
Susquehanna Universities, the Williams- 
port Area Community College, and 
Bloomsburg, Lock Haven, and Man- 
sfield Universities. Students other than 
freshmen enroll full or part time for cre- 
dit, normally for one semester or term, at 
any participating institution in selected 
courses. Students in the program remain 
fully enrolled as degree candidates at 
their home institutions. A special oppor- 
tunity within the program is the cross- 
registration arrangement with the Wil- 
liamsport Area Community College, 
whereby students may enroll for less than 
a full-time course load while remaining 
enrolled in courses at Lycoming. 

Student Teaching Abroad — Lycom- 
ing College has estabished a cooperation 
program with Moorhead State University 
whereby teacher education students may 
do all or part of their student teaching in a 
foreign country. 

This program offers exceptional stu- 
dents the opportunity to student teach in 
nearly any country in the world. Students 
are placed in independent international 
schools where English is the instruction- 
al language. An effort is made to assign 
students in geographical areas that will 
enrich their backgrounds, serve their 
special interests and expand their cultural 
horizons. 



19 



Washington, United Nations and 
London Semester and Capitol Semes- 
ter Internship Program — With the 
consent of the Department of Pohtical 
Science, selected students are permitted 
to study in Washington, D.C., at The 
American University for one semester. 
They may choose from seven different 
programs: Washington Semester, Urban 
Semester, Foreign PoHcy Semester, In- 
ternational Development Semester, Eco- 
nomic Policy Semester, Science and 
Technology Semester, American Studies 
Semester. 

With the consent of either the Depart- 
ment of History or Political Science, 
selected students may enroll at Drew 
University in Madison, New Jersey, in 
the United Nations Semester, which is 
designed to provide a first-hand ac- 
quaintance with the world organization. 
Students with special interests in world 
history, international relations, law, and 
politics are eligible to participate. 

The London Semester programs of 
Drew and The American Universities 
emphasize European history, politics, 
and culture. Interested students partici- 
pate with the consent of either the De- 
partments of History or Political Sci- 
ence. 

The Capitol Semester Internship Prog- 
ram is available to eligible students on a 
competitive basis. The program is co- 
sponsored by Pennsylvania's Office of 
Administration and Department of 
Education. Paid Internships are available 
to students in most majors. Interested 
students should contact the Career De- 
velopment Center for additional in- 
formation. 

THE SCHOLAR PROGRAM 

The Lycoming College Scholar Prog- 
ram is a special program designed to 
meet the needs and aspirations of highly 
motivated students of superior intellec- 
tual ability. The Lycoming Scholar satis- 
fies the general distribution require- 
ments, but on a more exacting level and 
with more challenging courses than the 
average student. Lycoming Scholars also 
participate in special courses and semi- 
nars and in serious independent study 



culminating in a senior project super- 
vised by their major department. 

Students are admitted to the program 
by invitation of the Scholar Council, the 
group which oversees the program. The 
council consists of a Director and four 
other faculty selected by the Dean of the 
College, and four students elected by 
current scholars. The guidelines gov- 
erning selection of new scholars are 
flexible: academic excellence, intellec- 
tual curiosity, and creativity are all taken 
into account. Students who desire to par- 
ticipate in the Scholar Program but are 
not invited may petition the Scholar 
Council for consideration. 

To graduate as a Scholar, a student 
must have at least a 3.0 cumulative 
average. Scholars must take the First 
Year Scholar Seminar during their first 
year in the program and the Senior 
Scholar Seminar during their last year in 
residence at Lycoming. In addition, the 
following distribution requirements must 
be met. (Slightly modified requirements 
exist for students in the cooperative 
programs; a list of these requirements 
can be obtained from the Scholar 
Council.) 

Scholar Distribution Requirements 
for Students in AB 
and BFA Programs. 

A. English. Scholars must complete 
English 106 and one literature course 
numbered 200 or higher. The Scholar 
Council strongly recommends that 
qualified scholars enroll in the honors 
section of English 106 if scheduling 
permits. English 106 must be taken 
during the freshman year. 

B. Foreign Language/Mathematical 
Sciences. Scholars must satisfy the re- 
quirement in either language or mathe- 
matical sciences. Language: Scholars 
must complete two courses numbered 
1 1 1 or higher (excluding courses taught 
in English). Mathematical Sciences: The 
mathematical placement test determines 
whether a Scholar must take two or three 
courses for distribution. At least one 
course must be selected from Mathema- 
tics 116, 128, 130, or 214. Only one 
computer science course may be used to 



fulfill the mathematical sciences require- 
ment. 

C. Philosophy/Religion. Scholars 
must satisfy this requirement in either of 
the two areas. Philosophy: Two courses 
numbered 221 or higher. Religion: Two 
courses numbered 222 or higher. 

D. Fine Arts. Scholars must satisfy the 
requirement in one of four areas. Art: 
Two options are available in art. Either 
two courses from Art 222, 223, 331, 
332, 333, 334, 335 (Art History), or two 
courses from Art 1 1 1 , 1 15, 220, and 225 
(Studio Art). Music: The equivalent of 
twounitsof credit from Music 117, 167, 
168, 169, 330 or higher. Theatre: Two 
courses from Theatre 140 or higher, ex- 
cluding Theatre 148. Literature: Two 
literature courses from English 220 or 
higher. Foreign Languages and Litera- 
tures 225, or French, German, or Span- 
ish 323 or higher. 

E. Natural Sciences. Scholars must 
satisfy the requirements in one of three 
areas. Astronomy/ Physics: Two courses 
numbered 1 1 1 or higher. Biology: Two 
courses numbered 110 or higher. Che- 
mistr\\- Two courses numbered 1 10 or 
higher. 

F. History/Social Sciences. Scholars 
must satisfy the requirements in one of 
five areas. Economics: Two courses 
numbered 1 10 or higher. History: Two 
courses, one of which must be numbered 
200 or higher. Political Science: Two 
courses numbered 116 or higher. 
Psychology: Two courses including 
Psychology 1 10 and one course num- 
bered 224 or higher (excluding Psychol- 
ogy 338). Sociology/Anthropology: Two 
courses from Sociology 110, 220, 224, 
226, 227, 229, 300 or higher. 

Scholar Distribution Requirements 
for Students in BSN Program 

A. English. Same as for BA and BFA 
degrees. 

B. Mathematical Science. Same as for 
BA and BFA degrees. (Note that the 
nursing major requires Mathematics 103 
and one from Computer Science 108 
125, or Mathematics 214). 

C. Philosophy/Religion. Met by tak- 
ing Philosophy 219 and Religion 120. 



20 



D. Fine Arts/Language. Same as for 
BA and BFA scholars. 

E. Natural Sciences. Met by Biology 
113, Biology 114, Biology 226 (required 
for the major). 

F. History/Social Science. Met by 
Psychology 110, Psychology 117, (re- 
quired for the major) and one course in 
Sociology 300 or higher. (This sociology 
course may be taken in lieu of the intro- 
ductory guided elective in Sociology for 
the BSN.) 

All Scholar Students must complete 
the following: 

G. Physical Education. Scholars must 
satisfy the same physical education re- 
quirements stipulated by the College for 
all students. 

H. Designated Courses. In addition to 
completing the distribution require- 
ments, Scholars will be required to 
complete two upper-level courses chosen 
from a list of "designated" courses 
selected and maintained by the Scholar 
Council. "Designated" courses must be 
outside of a scholar's major unless 
the scholar has more than one major. 
Normally, Scholars will not begin taking 
designated courses until their sophomore 
year. 

I. Senior Project. In the senior year, 
scholars must successfully complete an 
independent studies or departmental 
honors project which has been approved 
in advance by the Independent Studies 
Committee and the Scholar Council. 
This project must be presented orally as 
part of the Senior Scholar Seminar and be 
accepted by the Scholar Council. 

J. Scholars must complete a major and 
32 units, exclusive of the First Year and 
Senior Scholar Seminars. 

K. In the case of transfer students and 
those who seek to enter the program after 
their freshman year and in other cases 
deemed by the Scholar Council to in- 
volve special or extraordinary circumst- 
ances, the Council shall make adjust- 
ments to the scholar distribution require- 
ments provided that in all cases such ex- 
ceptions and adjustments would still 
satisfy the regular College distribution 
requirements. 



■nr 




21 




22 



Curriculum 



Numbers 001-049 Developmental 

courses 

Numbers 100-149 Introductory courses 

and Freshman level courses 

Numbers 200-249 Intermediate courses 

and Sophomore level courses 

Numbers 300-349 Intermediate courses 

and Junior level courses 

Numbers 400-449 Advanced courses and 

Senior level courses 

Numbers N50-N59* Non-catalogue 

courses offered on a limited basis 

Numbers 160-169 Applied Music 

Theatre Practicums and other fractional 

credit courses 

Numbers 470-479 Internships 

Numbers N80-N89* Independent Study 

Numbers 490-49 1 Independent Study for 

Departmental Honors 
*N = course level 1. 2, 3, or 4 as deter- 
mined by department 
Courses not in sequence are listed separ- 
ately, as: 

Drawing Art 1 1 1 

Color Theory Art 212 

Courses which imply a sequence are in- 
dicated with a dash between, meaning 
that the first semester must be taken prior 
to the second, as: 

Intermediate French 

French 111-112 

All students have the right of access to all 
courses. 

ACCOUNTING 

Associate Professor: Kuhns 
Assistant Professor: Wienecke 
Part-time Instructor: Crossley 

The purpose of the accounting major is 
to help prepare the student for a career 
within the accounting profession. The 
major has two tracks. Track I is designed 
for students whose primary interests lie 
in the financial area or public accounting 
and provides preparation for the Certi- 
fied Public Accountant Examination; 
Track II is designed for students with an 
interest in management accounting and 
provides preparation for the Certified 
Management Accountant Examination. 

Track I — Financial Accounting re- 



quires: Accounting 110, 220-221, 330, 

440, 441, 443, 445, Mathematics 103, 
Computer Science 108, and one unit to 
be selected from Accounting 225, 226, 
331, 442, 446, 447, and 448 or In- 
ternship. Business 110 may be substi- 
tuted for Accounting 110 if a student 
changes majors. Duplicate credit will 
not be granted. 

Students seeking entry into the public 
accounting field are advised to investi- 
gate the professional requirements for 
certification in the state in which they 
intend to practice so that they may meet 
all educational requirements prior to gra- 
duation. All Track I majors are advised 
to enroll in Economics 110 and 111, 
Business 335, 336, and 338, and one of 
the following: Business 340, Economics 

220, or 337. 

Track II — Management Accounting re- 
quires: Accounting 110, 220, 330-331, 
444, and 470 or 480; Mathematics 103; 
Computer Science 108; and Business 
338, 339, and 440. All Track II majors 
are advised to enroll in Economics 1 10 
and 1 1 1 and Business 335 and 336. Stu- 
dents planning to sit for the Certified 
Management Accountant Examination 
are advised to enroll in Accounting 440, 

441 , 442, and 443. Business 110 may be 
substituted for Accounting 110 if a stu- 
dent changes majors. Duplicate credit 
will not be granted. 

Three minors are offered by the De- 
partment of Accounting. The following 
courses are required to complete a minor 
in Financial Accounting: Accounting 
110, 220, 221, 443, 447 and any other 
accounting course or independent study. 
A minor in Managerial Accounting re- 
quires the completion of Accounting 
1 10, 220, 330-331 and 444. To obtain a 
minor in Federal Income Tax, a student 
must complete Accounting 110, 220- 

221, 441, and 442. 



110 ELEMENTARY 

ACCOUNTING THEORY 
An introductory course in recording, clas- 
sifying, summarizing, and interpreting the 
basic business transaction. Problems of clas- 
sification and interpretation of accounts and 
preparation of financial statements are stu- 
died. Not open to students who have re- 



ceived credit for Business 110. Prere- 
quisite: Second-semester freshman or con- 
sent of instructor. 



220-221 



INTERMEDIATE 
ACCOUNTING THEORY 



An intensive study of accounting statements 
and analytical procedures with an emphasis 
upon corporate accounts, various decision 
models, price-level models, earnings per 
share, pension accounting, accounting for 
leases, and financial statement analysis. Pre- 
requisite: Accounting 1 10. 

225 HNANCIAL STATEMENT ANALYSIS 
Deals with the analysis of financial state- 
ments as an aid to decision making. The 
theme of the course is understanding the 
financial data which are analyzed as well as 
the methods by which they are analyzed and 
interpreted. This course should prove of 
value to all who need a thorough understand- 
ing of the uses to which financial statements 
are put as well as to those who must know 
how to use them intelligently and effectively. 
This includes accountants, security analysts, 
lending officers, credit analysts, managers, 
and all others who make decisions on the 
basis of financial data. Prerequisite: 
Accounting 1 10 or Business 110. 

226 GOVERNMENT AND 
FUND ACCOUNTING 

This course is designed to introduce account- 
ing for not-for-profit organizations. Muni- 
cipal accounting and reporting are studied. 
Prerequisite: Accounting 110 or Business 
110. One-half unit of credit. 

330-331 COST AND BUDGETARY 
ACCOUNTING THEORY 
Methods of accounting for material, labor, 
and factory overhead expenses consumed in 
manufacturing using job order, process, and 
standard costing. Application of cost 
accounting and budgetary theory to decision 
making in the area of make or buy, expansion 
of production and sales, and accounting for 
control are dealt with. Prerequisites: 
Accounting 220 and Mathematics 103 or 
consent of instructor. 

440 AUDITING THEORY 

A study of the science or art of verifying, 
analyzing, and interpreting accounts and re- 
ports. The goal of the course is to emphasize 
concepts which will enable students to 
understand the philosophy and environment 
of auditing. Special attention is given to the 
public accounting profession, studying au- 
diting standards, professional ethics, the leg- 
al liability inherent in the attest function, the 
study and evaluation of internal control, the 
nature of evidence, the growing use of statis- 
tical sampling, the impact of electronic data 
processing, and the basic approach to plan- 



23 



ning an audit. Finally, various audit reports 
expressing independent expert opinions on 
the fairness of financial statements are stu- 
died. Prerequisites: Accounting 221, 
Mathematics 103, and Computer Science 
108. 

441 FEDERAL INCOME TAX 

Analysis of the provisions of the Inlemal 
Revenue Code relating to income, deduc- 
tions, inventories, and accounting methods. 
Practical problems involving determination 
of income and deductions, capital gains and 
losses, computation and payment of taxes 
through withholding at the source and 
through delcaration are considered. Planning 
transactions so that a minimum amount of tax 
will result is emphasized. Prerequisite: 
Accounting 110 or consent of instructor. 

442 FEDERAL INCOME TAX 
ADMINISTRATION AND PLANNING 
An analysis of the provisions of the Internal 
Revenue Code relating to partnerships, 
estates, trusts, and corporations. An exten- 
sive series of problems is considered, and 
effective tax planning is emphasized. Prere- 
quisite: Accounting 441 . 

443 ADVANCED ACCOUNTING I 

Certain areas of advanced accounting theory, 
including business combinations and con- 
solidated fmancial statements. Prerequisite: 
Accounting 221. One-half unit of credit. 

AAA CONTROLLERSHIP 

Control process in the organization. General 
systems theory, financial control systems, 
centralization-decentralization, performance 
measurement and evaluation, forecasts and 
budgets, and marketing, production and fi- 
nance models for control purposes. Prere- 
quisite: Accounting 331 or consent of in- 
structor. 

445 AUDITING PRACTICE 

An audit project is presented, solved and 
the auditor's report written. THIS 
COURSE IS LIMITED TO STUDENTS 
WHO HAVE EITHER COMPLETED 
OR ARE ENROLLED IN ACCOUNTING 
440. One-half unit of credit. Grade will be 
recorded as "P" or "F. " 

446 SEMINARS ON APB OPINIONS 
AND FASB STANDARDS 

A seminar course for accounting majors with 
library assignments to gain a workable 
understanding of the highly technical opin- 
ions of the Accounting Principles Board and 
standards of the Financial Accounting Stan- 
dards Board. One term paper. Possible trip to 
New York City to attend a public hearing of 
the Financial Accounting Standards Board. 
Prerequisite: Accounting 110. May term. 



447 ADVANCED ACCOUNTING II 

An intensive study of partnerships, install- 
ment and consignment sales, branch 
accounting, bankruptcy and reorganization, 
estates and trusts, government entities, and 
non-profit organizations. Prerequisite: 
Accounting 221. One-half unit of credit. 

448 CONTEMPORARY PROBLEMS 
FOR CPA CANDIDATES 

Problems from the Accounting Practice 
sections of Past C.P.A. e.xaminations, 
which require a thorough knowledge of the 
core courses in their solution, are assigned. 
The course is intended to meet the needs 
of those interested in public accounting 
and preparation for the Certified Public 
Accountant's examination. Prerequisite: 
Accounting 330 or consent of instructor. 
One-half unit of credit. Grade will be 
recorded as "P" or "F." 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Interns in accounting typically work off cam- 
pus under the supervision of a public or pri- 
vate accountant. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index) 
Typical examples of recent studies in 
accounting are: computer program to gener- 
ate fmancial statements, educational core for 
public accountants, inventory control, and 
church taxation. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index) 



ACCOUNTING — 
MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES 

Associate Professor; Kuhns 
(Coordinator) 

The accounting-matiiematical sciences 
interdisciplinary major is designed to 
offer, within a liberal-arts framework, 
courses which will aid in constructing 
mathematical models for business deci- 
sion making. Students obtain the neces- 
sary substantial background in both 
mathematical sciences and accounting. 
Required accounting courses are: 
Accounting 110, 220-221, 330-331. 
441, 442. In mathematical sciences re- 
quired courses are: Computer Science 
125 and 321 and Mathematics 112, 128, 
129, 338 and either 103 or 332. Recom- 
mended courses include: Mathematics 



130, 238, 333; Business 223, 335, 336, 
338, 339; Computer Science 108, 246; 
Economics 110, 111; Psychology 224, 
225; and Sociology-Anthropology 110. 



AMERICAN STUDIES 

Professor: Piper 
(Coordinator) 

The American Studies major offers a 
comprehensive program in American 
civilization which introduces students to 
the complexities underlying the develop- 
ment of America and its contemporary 
life. Thirteen courses are included. 

FOUR CORE REQUIREMENTS — 
The primary integrating units of the ma- 
jor, these courses, some team-taught, 
will encourage students to consider ideas 
from different points of view and help 
them to correlate information and 
methods from various disciplines: 

1 . America As a Civilization: American 
Studies 200 (First semester of major 
study) 

2. American Tradition in the Arts and 
Literature: American Studies 220 

3. Research and Methodology: History 
449 or Sociology/ Anthro 447 (junior 
or senior year) 

4. Internship or Independent Study 
(Junior or senior year) 

CONCENTRATION AREAS — Six 

courses in one option and three in the 
other are needed. Six primary concentra- 
tion-option courses in American Arts or 
American Society build around the in- 
sights gained in the core courses. They 
focus particular attention on areas most 
germane to academic and vocational in- 
terests. The three additional courses 
from the other option give further 
breadth to an understanding of America. 
Students also will be encouraged to take 
elective courses relating to other cul- 
tures. 

Students should design their American 
Studies major in consultation with the 
program coordinator. 



24 



American Arts Concentration Option 

Art 332 — American Art of the 20th Centui7 
English 222 — American Literature I 
English 223 — American Literature II 
Music 118 — American Music I 
Music 119 — American Music II 
Theatre Studies — American Theatre 

American Society 
Concentration Option 

Economics 224 — Urban Problems 

Histor>'442 — U.S. Social and Intellectual History 

to 1877 

History 443 — U.S. Social and Intellecmal History 

since 1877 

Political Science 331 — Civil Rights and Liberties 

Political Science 335 — Law and Society 

Sociology 334 — Racial and Cultural Minorities 



200 AMERICA AS A CIVILIZATION 

An analysis of the historical, sociocultural, 
economic, and political perspectives of 
American civlization with special attention 
to the interrelationships between these va- 
rious orientations. May be taken for either 
one-half unit (Section 200A) or full unit 
(Section 200B): declared majors and 
prospective majors should take the full-unit 
course. 200B. Alternate years. 

220 AMERICAN TRADITION IN 
THE ARTS AND LITERATURE 
The relationship of the arts and literature to 
the various historical periods of American 
life. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP 
N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 



ART — 

Professor: Shipley 
Associate Professor: Bogle 
Assistant Professor: Golahny 

(Chairperson) 
Part-time Instructor: Willis 
Adjunct Faculty at Johnson Atelier: 

Bartons, Barrie, Lash, Pitynski The 
Art Department offers two majors in 
the B.A. Degree (Studio Art and Art 
History) and a second degree program, 
a B.F.A. Degree in Sculpture. 

The B.A. Degree — Studio Art 

To complete a Bachelor of Arts 



degree with a major in studio art. the 
student must complete the seven-course 
foundation program, the requirements 
for an area of specialization and partici- 
pate in senior exhibition. 

Foundation Program 

Art 1 1 1 Drawing I 

Art 115 Two-Dimensional Design 

Art 116 Figure Modeling 

Art 212 Color Theory 

Art 222 Survey of Art: Pre-history 

Through the Middle Ages 
Art 223 Survey of Art: From the 

Renianssance Through the Modem Age 
Art 227 Introduction to Photography 

Areas of Specialization 

I. Painting 

Art 220 Painting I 

Art 221 Drawing II 

Art 330 Painting II 

Art 446 Studio Research 

and two art history courses num- 
bered 
300 or above. 

II. Printmaking 

Art 221 Drawing II 

Art 228 Printmaking I 

Art 338 Printmaking II 

Art 446 Studio Research 

and two art history courses num- 
bered 
300 or above. 

III. Sculpture 

Art 225 Sculpture I 

Art 226 Figure Modeling II 

Art 335 Sculpture II 

Art 446 Studio Research 
and two art history courses numbered 
300 and above. 

IV. Commercial Design 

Art 221 Drawing II 

Art 237 Photography II 

Art 442 Special Projects with 

Commercial Design 
Art 443 Computer Graphics for 

Commercial Design 
GCO 511 Layout and Design 

GCO 512 Typopgrahic Composition 



A student is encouraged to take 
the following courses: Internship 
(Art 470-479), Advertising (Business 
332), Writing for Special Audiences 
(Mass Communication 323), Intro- 
duction to Mass Communication 
(Mass Comm 110), Social Psy- 
chology (Psy 224). 

V. Generalist Art Major to be 
taken by those students who are 
seeking teaching certification in 
Art): 
Art 119 Ceramics I 

Art 220 Painting I 

Art 225 Sculpture I 

Art 228 Printmaking I 

and two art history courses num- 
bered 300 or above. In addition to 
Art Department courses, under the 
generalist major, the student must 
complete the art certification pro- 
gram in the Education Department. 

VI. Photography 

Art 337 Photography II 

Art 340 Color Photography 

Art 341 Large Format View/ 

Camera Photography 
Art 446 Student Research 

and two art history courses numbered 

300 or above. 

The B.A. Degree — Art History 

To complete a bachelor of arts degree 
with a major in art history, a student 
must take courses in art history, studio 
art. and history and/or religion. A stu- 
dent majoring in art history is advised to 
take a foreign language. 

Required of all students: 
Art 222 Survey of Art: Pre-History 
Through the Middle Ages 
Art 223 Survey of Art: From 

Renaissance Through the Modem Age 
Art 447 Art History Research 

Choose four of the following: 
Art 331 20th Century European Art 
Art 332 American Art of the 20th 

Century 

Art 333 19th Century European 

and American Art 

Art 334 Art of the Renaissance 



25 



Art 336 
Art 339 



Art of the Baroque 
Women in Art 



Choose two of the following; 
Art 1 1 1 Drawing I 

Art 115 Two-dimensional Design 

Art 116 Figure Modeling I 

Art 227 Introduction to Photography 

Choose two of the following: 



History 210 
History 212 

History 318 

Religion 113 

Religion 1 14 

Religion 226 



Ancient History 

Medieval Europe and its 

Neighbors 

History of Renaissance 

Thought 

Old Testament Faith 

and History 

New Testament Faith 

and History 

Biblical Archaeology 



It is furthermore suggested that the 
student choose electives in other depart- 
ments that may complement the studies 
of art history. Among these recom- 
mended electives are: 

French 4 1 2 French Literature of the 
19th Century 
English 336 Shakespeare 

Music 1 17 Survey of Western Music 
Music 335 History of Western Music I 
Music 336 History of Western Music II 
Theatre 332 History of Theatre I 

Theatre 333 History of Theatre II 



The BFA degree in sculpture: 

The student completes a specified 
course of study in the Art Department, 
the Lycoming College distribution re- 
quirements, and one of the field spe- 
cialization apprenticeship programs at 
the Johnson Atelier in Mercerville, New 
Jersey. 

The Art Department course of study 
consists of 12 courses in studio and art 
history: Figure Modeling I and II (Art 
1 16 and 226), Sculpture I and II (Art 225 
and 335). Drawing I and II (Art 1 1 1 and 
221), Introduction to Photography (Art 
227), 2-D Design (Art 115). Survey of 
Art (Art 222 and 223), and two addition- 
al courses in Art History (Art 331, 332, 
333, 334, 336, 339). 



Twelve additional course units are re- 
quired of the student. The student must 
meet the requirements of the distribution 
program within these courses. 

The student must also complete one of 
the field specialization apprenticeships at 
the Johnson Atelier Technical Institute of 
Sculpture in Mercerville, New Jersey. 
This requires the student to be at the 
Johnson Atelier for a period of between 
16 and 23'/2 months. The student re- 
ceives eight course units of credit at 
Lycoming College for successfully com- 
pleting the field specialization appren- 
ticeship at Johnson Atelier. It is expected 
that the work for the apprenticeship com- 
ponent will be completed during the 
summers and the junior year. 

Admission to the BFA degree program 
is on the basis of meeting the admission 
standards of Lycoming College, and pas- 
sing a portfolio review and interview by 
members of the Lycoming College Art 
Department. 

Five minors are being offered by 
the Art Department. Requirements for 
each follow: Art History: Art 222, 223 
and two advanced art history courses; 
Commercial Design: Art 111, 115, 212, 
223,511 and 512; Painting: Art 111, 115, 
220, 330 and 221 or 223; Photography: 
Art 111, 212, 223, 227, 337 and 340 or 
341; Sculpture: Art 116, 225, 226, 335 
and 111, 119 or 445. 



1 1 1 DRAWING I 

Study of the human figure with gesture and 
proportion stressed. Student is made familiar 
with different drawing techniques and 
media. Some drawings from nature. Offered 
in alternate semesters with Drawing II and 
III. 

1 1 5 TWO-DIMENSIONAL DESIGN 

The basic fundamentals found in the two- 
dimensional arts: line, shape, form, space, 
color, and composition are taught in rela- 
tionship to the other two-dimensional arts. 
Perceptual theories and their relationships to 
what and why we see what we see in art are 
discussed with each problem. 

1 16 nOURE MODELING I 

Understanding the figure will be approached 
through learning the basic structures and 
proportions of the figure. The course is con- 
ceived as a three-dimensional drawing class. 
At least one figure per student will be cast. 



119 CERAMICS I 

Emphasis placed on pottery design as it re- 
lates to function of vessels and the design 
parameters imposed by the characteristics of 
clay. The techniques of ceramics are taught 
to encourage expression rather than to dis- 
pense merely a technical body of informa- 
tion. 

212 COLOR THEORY 

A study of the physical and emotional 
aspects of color. Emphasis will be placed on 
the study of color as an aesthetic agent for the 
artist. The color theories of Johannes Itten 
will form the base for this course with some 
study of the theories of Albert Munsell. Fa- 
ber Berren. and Wilhelm Ostwald. 

220 PAINTING I 

An introduction of painting techniques and 
materials. Coordination of color, value, and 
design within the painting is taught. Some 
painting from the figure. No limitations as to 
painting media, subject matter, or style. Pre- 
requisite: An 115 or consent of instructor. 

221 DRAWING II 

Continued study of the human figure. Emph- 
asis is placed on realism and figure-ground 
coordination with the use of value and de- 
sign. Prerequisite: Art 111. 

222 SURVEY OF ART: PRE-HISTORY 
THROUGH THE MIDDLE AGES 

A survey of Western architecture, sculpture, 
and painting. Emphasis is on the interrelation 
of form and content and on the relatedness of 
the visual arts to their cultural environment: 
Paleolithic Art. Near East. Egypt, Greece, 
Rome, and Medieval Europe. 

223 SURVEY OF ART: FROM THE 
RENAISSANCE THROUGH THE 
MODERN AGE 

A survey of Western architecture, sculpture, 
and painting. Emphasis is on the interrelation 
of form and content and on the relatedness of 
the visual arts to their cultural environment: 
I4th-20th centuries. 

225 SCULPTURE I 

An introduction to the techniques, materials, 
and ideas of sculpture. Clay, plaster, wax, 
wood, and other materials will be used. The 
course will be concerned with ideas about 
sculpture as expression, and with giving 
material form to ideas. 

226 FIGURE MODELING II 

Will exploit the structures and understand- 
ings learned in Figure Modeling I to produce 
larger, more complex figurative works. 
There will be a requirement to cast one of the 
works in plaster. Prerequisites: Art 1 16 and 
consent of instructor. 



26 



227 INTRODUCTION TO PHOTOGRAPHY 

Objectives of the course are to develop tech- 
nical skills in the use of photographic equip- 
ment (cameras, films, darkroom, printmak- 
er) and to develop sensitivity in the areas of 
composition, form, light. picUire quality, 
etc. Each smdent must own or have access to 
a 35mm camera. 

228 PRINTMAKING 1 

Introduction to the techniques of silkscreen. 
intaglio, monotype, and lithography print- 
ing. One edition of at least six prints must be 
completed in each area. Prerequisite: Art 
111 or 115 or consent of instructor. 

229 CERAMICS II 

Continuation of Ceramics I. Emphasis on use 
of the wheel and technical aspects such as 
glaze making and kiln firing. Prerequisite: 
Art 119. 

330 PAINTING II 

Emphasis is placed on individual style and 
technique. Artists and movements in art are 
studied. No limitations as to painting media, 
subject matter, or style. Prerequisite: Art 
220. 

331 20TH CENTURY EUROPEAN ART 
Stylistic developments in Europe from 1880 
to the present, including Cubism. Fauvism, 
Expressionism, Dada, and Surrealism. 
Picasso, Matisse, Kandinsky, and Mondrian 
are among the major artists studied. 

332 AMERICAN ART OF THE 
20TH CENTURY 

The art of the United States from about 1880 
to the present, with emphasis on the innova- 
tions of Americans in painting, sculpture and 
architecture, and on the meaning and histor- 
ical roots of contemporary art. 

333 19TH CENTURY EUROPEAN 
AND AMERICAN ART 

The art of Western Europe and the United 
States from 1780-1900. with emphasis on 
painting in France. Those artists to be studied 
include David and Goya. Delacroix, Cour- 
bet. The Impressionists, Turner, Homer, 
Cole and Eakins. 

334 ART OF THE RENAISSANCE 

The art of Italy and Northern Europe from 
1330-1530, with emphasis on the painters 
Giotto, Masaccio, Leonardo da Vinci, 
Raphael, Titan, Van Eyck, and Dijrer, the 
sculptors Ghiberti, Donatello and Miche- 
langelo, and the architects Brunelleschi and 
Alberti. 

335 SCULPTURE n 

A continuation of Sculpture I (Art 225). 
Emphasis is on advanced technical process. 



Casting of bronze and aluminum sculpture 
will be done in the school foundry. Prere- 
quisite: Art 225. 

336 ART OF THE BAROQUE 

Seventeenth-century painting and sculpture 
in Italy and the Netherlands with emphasis 
on Bernini. Poussin, Rubens, and Rem- 
brandt, and with special attention given to 
the expressive, narrative, painterly, and tac- 
tile styles present in their art. 

337 PHOTOGRAPHY 11 

To extend the skills developed in Photogra- 
phy I (Art 227) by continued growth in 
technical expertise including instruction in 
the use and capabihties of large format 
view cameras. Emphasis is placed on 
conceptual and aesthetic aspects of 
photography. Prerequisite: Art 227. 

338 PRINTMAKING U 

Further study of the techniques of silkscreen , 
intaglio, monotype, and lithography printing 
with emphasis on multi plate and viscosity 
printing. Two editions of at least six prints 
must be completed in each of two areas. 
Prerequisite: Art 228. 

339 WOMEN IN ART 

A survey of women artists from a variety of 
viewpoints — aesthetic, historical, social, 
political and economic — which seeks to 
understand and integrate the contributions of 
women artists into the mainstream of the 
history of art. No prerequisite. 

340 COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 

Study of the techniques and aesthetics of 
color photography. Work will be directed 
towards the use of both color negative and 
color slide processes. Students will be 
required to learn the special requirements 
of photographing in both indoor and 
outdoor light conditions. A portfolio 
of color prints will be produced. Pre- 
requisites: Art 227 and 337. 

341 LARGE FORMAT VIEW CAMERA 
PHOTOGRAPHY 

Study of the techniques and aesthetics of 
the large format view camera in Fine Art 
Photography. Emphasis will be placed on 
the experience of using the large format 
view camera. Students will be encouraged 
to explore alternative photographic pro- 
cesses such as platinum printing, the gum 
bichromate process, etc. using the large 
negative produced. Prerequisites: Art 227 
and 337. 

440 PAINTING III 

Professional quality is stressed. There is 
some experimentation with new painting 
techniques and styles. 



441 DRAWING m 

Continued study of human figure, individual 
style, and professional control of drawing 
techniques and media are now emphasized. 

442 SPECIAL PROJECT IN COMMERCIAL 
DESIGN 

Concentrated research, preparation and 
execution of a series of projects in com- 
mercial design utilizing the traditional 
studio tools including airbrush, water- 
based mediums, colored pencils, and pen 
and ink. The following skills are involved: 
illustration, paste-up, typesetting, over- 
lays, lettering and layout. Prerequisite: 
GCO 511, 512 or consent of instructor. 

443 COMPUTER GRAPHICS FOR 
COMMERCIAL DESIGN 
Concentrated research, preparation and 
execution of a series of projects in com- 
mercial design utilizing computer imaging. 
Students will learn to generate original 
moving and still images in color using 
existing graphic creation software and 
peripheral devices, such as digitalizing 
cameras, digitalizing drawing devices, 
printers, and slide producers. Prerequisite: 
CGO 511, 512 or consent of instructor. 

445 SCULPTURE III 

In Sculpture III the shident is expected to 
produce a series of sculptures that follow a 
concepmal and technical line of develop- 
ment. Prerequisites: Art 116. 225, and 335. 

446 STUDIO RESEARCH 

Independent research in an elective studio 
area, conducted under the supervision of the 
appropriate faculty member, includes crea- 
tion of work which may be incorporated in 
the senior group exhibition. Student works in 
private studio assigned by the department. 

447 ART HISTORY RESEARCH 
Independent research, conducted under the 
supervision of the appropriate faculty mem- 
ber, includes the research and writing of a 
thesis, to be presented to a committee of Art 
Department faculty. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See mdex) 

Commercial design, interior design, and 
photography programs in local businesses, 
and museum work at the Lycoming County 
Historical Museum. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index) 

Recent smdies in anatomy. Aspects of the art 
nouveau. lithography, photography, pottery, 
problems in illustration, and watercolor. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index) 



27 



Graphic Arts 

Through special arrangements, the 
following courses offered at Williams- 
port Area Community College are avail- 
able only to Art majors in Commercial 
Design and Mass Communication ma- 
jors (GC0511 only). The WACC 
courses are taken as part of the student's 
schedule and are listed with Lycoming's 
offerings during registration periods. 

5 1 1 LAYOUT AND DESIGN 

Analysis of materials, tools, and techniques 
used in preparation of copy for reproduction; 
paste-up and color separation overlays. 3 cr. 

512 TYPOGRAPHIC COMPOSITION 

Fundamentals of typesetting. Theory and 
practice in the care and use of composing 
machines, both hot (mechanical) and cold 
(photo). 3 cr. 



ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS 

Associate Professor: Erickson 

(Chairperson) 
Assistant Professor: Fisher 

The department offers two majors. 
The major in astronomy is specifically 
designed to train students in the field of 
planetarium education; it also may serve 
as a basis for earning state certification as 
a secondary school teacher of general 
science. The major in physics can pre- 
pare students for graduate work in phy- 
sics, astronomy, and related physical sci- 
ences, for the cooperative program in 
engineering, for state certification as 
secondary school teachers of physics, or 
for technical positions in industry. 

Astronomy 

The major in astronomy requires 
Astronomy 111, either 1 1 2 or 113, 230, 
344, 445 and 446; Physics 225-226; 
Mathematics 128 and 129; and Chemis- 
try 1 10 and 1 11 or 330-33 1 . Juniors and 
seniors majoring in astronomy are also 
required to register for four semesters of 
Astronomy 349 & 449 (non-credit collo- 
quia). In addition, the following cognate 
courses are recommended: Physics 229 
and 333; Philosophy 223 and 333; and 
Art 227. 



104 HELD GEOLOGY 

A methods course introducing the field tech- 
niques needed to study the geology of an 
area. May or summer term only. 

105 HISTORY OF ASTRONOMY 

A comprehensive view of the evolution of 
astronomical thought from ancient Greece to 
the present, emphasizing the impact that 
astronomical discoveries and the conquest of 
space have had on Western culture. May or 
summer term only. 

107 OBSERVATIONAL ASTRONOMY 

A methods course providing the opportunity 
to make a variety of astronomical observa- 
tions, both visually and photographically, 
with and without telescopes. The planetar- 
ium is used to familiarize the student with the 
sky at various times during the year and from 
different locations on earth. May or summer 
term only. 

101 PRINCIPLES OF ASTRONOMY (B) 

1 1 1 PRINCIPLES OF ASTRONOMY (A) 

A summary of current concepts of the uni- 
verse from the solar system to distant galax- 
ies. Describes the techniques and instru- 
ments used in astronomical research. Pre- 
sents not only what is reasonably well known 
about the universe, but also considers some 
of the major unsolved problems. Astronomy 
101 and 111 share the same three hours of 
lecture and mo hours of laboratory each 
week. Ill has one additional hour each week 
for more advanced mathematical treatment 
of the material. Credit may not be earned for 
both 101 and 111 . Corequisite for 111: 
Mathematics 107 or consent of instructor. 

102 EARTH SCIENCE (B) 

112 EARTH SCIENCE (A) 

A study of the physical processes that con- 
tinually affect the planet Eadh, shaping our 
environment. Describes how past events and 
lifeforms can be reconstructed from pre- 
served evidence to reveal the history of our 
planet from its origin to the present. Empha- 
sizes the ways in which geology, meteorolo- 
gy, and oceanography interrelate with man 
and the environment. Astronomy 102 and 
112 share the same three hours of lecture and 
two hours of laboratory each week. 112 has 
one additional hour each week for more adv- 
anced mathematical treatment of the mate- 
rial. Credit may not be earned for both 102 
and 112. Corequisite for 112: Mathematics 
107 or consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

103 METEOROLOGY (B) 

113 METEOROLOGY (A) 

The general properties of the atmosphere and 
their measurements will be discussed in 
terms of basic physical laws. The large scale 
processes that create a suitable climate for 



life on Earth are discussed as well as the 
smaller scale processes that must be taken 
into account in scientific weather prediction. 
Astronomy 103 and 1 13 share the same three 
hours of lecture and two hours of laboratory 
each week. 1 13 has one additional hour each 
week for more advanced mathematical treat- 
ment of the material. Credit may not be 
earned for both 103 and 1 1 3 . Corequisite for 
113: Matherrmtics 107. Alternate years. 

114 MANNED SPACE FLIGHT I 
Traces the beginnings of rocketry and 
spaceflight capability from Sputnik (1957) 
through the conclusion of the Apollo 
moon landings (1972). Extensive use of 
NASA video and other audio-visual aids. 
Examination of scientific, engineering and 
political motivations. When taken in May 
Term, must be scheduled with Astronomy 
115. Not for distribution. Alternate years. 
Half unit. 

1 1 5 MANNED SPACE FLIGHT II 
Examines manned spaceflight from Skylab 
missions (1973-74) through Apollo-Soyuz 
Test Project, early Space shuttle missions, 
to current U.S. and Soviet space efforts. 
Extensive use of NASA video. Exami- 
nation of scientific, engineering, and 
political motivations. iVhen taken in May 
Term, must be scheduled with Astronomy 
114. Not for distribution. Alternate years. 
Half unit. 

230 PLANETARIUM TECHNIQUES 

A methods course covering major aspects of 
planetarium programming, operation and 
maintenance. Students are required to pre- 
pare and present a planetarium show. Upon 
successfully completing the course, sUidents 
are eligible to become planetarium assis- 
tants. Three hours of lecture and demonstra- 
tion and three hours of practical training per 
week. Prerequisites: Astronomy 101 or 11 1 
(Principles of Astronomy) or consent of in- 
structor. Alternate years. 

344 RELATIVITY AND COSMOLOGY 

A detailed presentation of the special theory 
of relativity, and a short view of the general 
theory and its classical proofs. Man's con- 
cepts of the universe, with particular atten- 
tion to alternative modern cosmological 
models. Discussion of the Cosmological 
Principle, its rationale, and its implications. 
Four hours of lecture per week. Prere- 
quisites: Astronomy 111 (Principles of 
Astronomy A) and Physics 225 (Introductory 
Physics with Calculus I). Alternate years. 
Cross-listed as Physics 344. 

445 STELLAR EVOLUTION 

The physical principles governing the inter- 
nal structure and external appearance of 
stars. Mechanisms of energy generation and 



28 



transport within stars. The evolution of stars 
from initial formation to final stages. The 
creation of chemical elements by nuc- 
leosynthesis. Four hours of lecture per week. 
Prerequisites: Astronomy 111 (Principles of 
Astronomy A} and Physics 226 (Introductory 
Physics with Calculus II). Alternate years. 

446 STELLAR DYNAMICS AND 
GALACTIC STRUCTURE 
The motion of objects in gravitational fields. 
Introduction to the n-body problem. The re- 
lation between stellar motions and the galac- 
tic potential. The large scale structure of 
galaxies in general and of the MiUcy Way 
Galaxy in particular. Four hours of lecture 
per week. Prerequisites: Astronomy III 
(Principles of Astronomy A j and Physics 225 
(Introductory Physics with Calculus I). 
Alternate years. 

349 & 449 ASTRONOMY AND 

PHYSICS COLLOQUIA 
This non-credit but required course for 
juniors and seniors majoring in astronomy 
and physics offers students a chance to meet 
and hear active scientists in astronomy, phy- 
sics, and related scientific areas talk about 
their own research or professional activities. 
In addition, majors in astronomy and physics 
must present two lectures, one given during 
the junior year and one given during the 
senior year, on the results of a literature sur- 
vey or on individual research. Students 
majoring in this department are required to 
attend four semesters during the junior and 
senior years. A letter grade will be given 
when the student gives a lecture. Otherwise 
the grade will be P/F. Students in the Coop- 
erative Program in Liberal Arts and En- 
gineering are required to attend two semes- 
ters and present one lecture during their 
junior year. Non-credit course. One hour per 
week. Cross-listed as Physics 349 & 449. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Independent studies may be undertaken in 
most areas of astronomy . 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 



Physics 

The major in physics requires Physics 
225-226, 331, 332, and four additional 
physics courses numbered 229 and 
above. Up to two courses chosen from 
Astronomy 111, 112, 113, 445, and 446 
may substitute for two of the four physics 



electives. Also required are Mathematics 
128 and 129, and Chemistry 1 10 and 1 1 1 
or 330-33 1 . Juniors and seniors majoring 
in physics are required to register for four 
semesters of Physics 349 & 449 (non- 
credit colloquia). In addition, the follow- 
ing cognate courses are recommended: 
Mathematics 231 and 238 (these are re- 
quired for the cooperative engineering 
program and by most graduate schools); 
Computer Science 125 (required for the 
cooperative engineering program); and 
Philosophy 223 and 333. A foreign lan- 
guage is recommended for students plan- 
ning on graduate study. 



106 ENERGY ALTERNATIVES 

A physicist's definition of work, energy, and 
power. The various energy sources available 
for use, such as fossil fuels, nuclear fission 
and fusion, hydro, solar, wind, and geoth- 
ermal. The advantages and disadvantages of 
each energy conversion method, including 
availability, efficiency, and environmental 
effects. Present areas of energy research and 
possible future developments. Projections of 
possible future energy demands. Exercises 
and experiments in energy collection, con- 
version, and utilization. May or summer 
term only. 

125-126 PHYSICS WITH LIFE 

SCIENCE APPLICATIONS 
The basic concepts, principles, and laws of 
physics are presented in this noncalculus in- 
troductory physics course. Topics include 
mechanics, elastic properties of matter, 
fluids, thermodynamics, electricity and 
magnetism, waves, optics, and radioactiv- 
ity. Many of the examples and problems used 
to illustrate the physics are selected from the 
life sciences. Three hours of lecture, one 
hour of recitation, and one three-hour 
laboratory per week. Prerequisite: 
Mathematics 107 or consent of instructor. 
(Credit may not be earned for both 125 and 
225 or for both 126 and 226.). 

m-llb INTRODUCTORY PHYSICS 
WITH CALCULUS 
A mathematically rigorous introduction to 
physics designed for majors in physics, 
astronomy, chemistry, and mathematics. 
Topics include mechanics, thermodynamics, 
electricity and magnetism, waves, optics, 
and modem physics. Five hours of lecture 
and recitation and one three-hour laboratory 
per week. Corequisite: Mathematics 128- 
129 (Calcidus I and II). (Credit may not be 
earned for both 125 and 225 or for both 126 
and 226). 



229 ELECTRONICS 

DC. and AC. circuit and network theory, 
active devices such as transistors, operation- 
al amplifiers, integrated circuits, and intro- 
duction to digital electronics will be covered. 
Three lectures and ttvo two-hour laboratory 
sessions per week. Prerequisites: Physics 
126 or 226, and Mathematics 109 or 128 or 
consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

331 MECHANICS 

Kinematics and dynamics of single particles 
and systems of particles. Rigid bodies. Intro- 
duction to the mechanics of continuous 
media. Moving reference frames. Lagran- 
gian mechanics. Four hours of lecture and 
three hours of laboratory per week. Prere- 
quisites: Physics 225 (Introductory Physics 
with Calculus I) and Mathematics 129 (Cal- 
culus II). 

332 ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 

The electromagnetic field, electrical poten- 
tial, magnetic field, and electric and magne- 
tic properties of matter. Electric circuits. 
Maxwell's equations. Laboratory includes 
electronics as well as classical electricity and 
magnetism. Four hours of lecture and three 
hours of laboratory per week. Prerequisite: 
Physics 226 (Introductory Physics with Cal- 
culus II). 

333 OPTICS 

Geometrical optics, optical systems, physic- 
al optics, interference, Fraunhofer and Fres- 
nel diffraction, and coherence and lasers will 
be covered. Three hours of lecture and three 
hours of labratory per week. Prerequisites: 
Physics 126 or 226, and Mathematics 109 or 
128 or consent of instructor . Alternate years. 

336 MATHEMATICAL METHODS OF 
PHYSICS 

Solution of ordinary linear differential 
equations using power and Laplace trans- 
forms, nonlinear differential and coupled 
differential equations, Fourier analysis 
using both trigonometric and complex 
exponential functions, complex variables, 
eigenvalue problems, infinite dimensional 
vector spaces, partial differential equations, 
boundary value problem solutions to the 
wave equation, heat flow equation, and 
Laplace's equation. Prerequisites: Math 
231 and 238. Alternate years. 

337 THERMODYNAMICS AND 
STATISTICAL MECHANICS 
Classical thermodynamics will be presented, 
showing that the macroscopic properties of a 
system can be specified without a knowledge 
of the microscopic properties of the consti- 
tuents of the system. Then statistical mecha- 
nics will be developed, showing that these 
same macroscopic properties are determined 



29 



by the microscopic properties. Four hours of 
lecture and recitation per week. Prere- 
quisites: Physics 226 (Introductory Physics 
with Calculus II) and Mathematics 129 (Cal- 
culus II). Alternate years. 

338 ATOMIC AND 

MOLECULAR PHYSICS 
The development of the principles and 
methods of quantum mechanics from the ear- 
liest evidence of quantization. Structure and 
spectra of atoms and molecules . Extension of 
quantum theory to the solid state. Four hours 
of lecture and recitation and one three-hour 
laboratory per week. Prerequisite: Physics 
226 (Introductory Physics with Calculus II) 
and Mathematics 129 (Calculus II). Alter- 
nate years. 

344 RELATIVITY AND COSMOLOGY 

A detailed presentation of the special theory 
of relativity, and a short view of the general 
theory and its classical proofs. Man's con- 
cepts of the universe, with particular atten- 
tion to alternative modem cosmological 
models. Discussion of the Cosmological 
Principle, its rationale, and its implications. 
Four hours of lecture per week. Prere- 
quisites: Astronomy 111 (Principles of 
Astronomy A) and Physics 225 (Introductory 
Physics with Calculus I). Alternate years. 
Cross-listed as Astronomy 344. 

439 INTRODUCTION TO 

QUANTUM MECHANICS 
Basic concepts and formulation of quantum 
theory. The free particle, the simple harmo- 
nic oscillator, the hydrogen atom, and cen- 
tral force problems will be discussed. Both 
time-independent and time-dependent per- 
turbation theory will be covered. Four hours 
of lecture and recitation. Prerequisite: either 
Physics 226 (Introductory Physics with Cal- 
culus II } or Chemistry 3S I (Physical Chemis- 
try II), and Mathematics 231 (Differential 
Equations). Cross-listed as Chemistry 439. 

447 NUCLEAR AND 

PARTICLE PHYSICS 
The course will consider properties of nuclei, 
nuclear models, radioactivity, nuclear reac- 
tions (including fission and fusion), and 
properties of elementary particles. The in- 
teractions of nuclear particles with matter 
and the detection of nuclear particles will be 
covered. It will be shown how observed phe- 
nomena lead to theories on the nature of 
fiindamental interactions, how these forces 
act at the smallest measurable distances, and 
what is expected to occur at even smaller 
distances. Four hours of lecture and recita- 
tion and two hours of laboratory per week. 
Prerequisites: either Physics 226 (Introduc- 
tory Physics with Calculus II) or Physics 126 
(Physics with Life Science Applications II), 
Mathematics 129, and either Physics 338 



(Atomic and Molecular Physics) or Chemis- 
try 1 10. Alternate years. 

349 & 449 ASTRONOMY AND 

PHYSICS COLLOQUIA 
This non-credit but required course for 
juniors and seniors majoring in astronomy 
and physics offers students a chance to meet 
and hear active scientists in astronomy, phy- 
sics, and related scientific areas talk about 
their own research or professional activities. 
In addition, majors in astronomy and physics 
must present two lectures, one given during 
the junior year and one given during the 
senior year, on the results of a literature sur- 
vey or on individual research. Students 
majoring in this department are required to 
attend four semesters during the junior and 
senior years. A letter grade will be given 
when the smdent gives a lecture. Otherwise 
the grade will be P/F. Students in the Coop- 
erative Program in Liberal Arts and En- 
gineering are required to attend two semes- 
ters and present one lecture during their 
junior year. Non-credit course. One hour per 
week. Cross-listed as Astronomy 349 & 449. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Interns in physics work off campus under the 
supervision of professional physicists em- 
ployed by local industries or hospitals. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Independent studies may be undertaken in 
most areas of physics. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 



BIOLOGY 



Professor: Angstadt 

(Chairperson) 
Associate Professor: Diehl, Gabriel, 

Zaccaria, Zimtnerman 
Assistant Professor: Pottmeyer 

A major consists of eight biology 
courses, including 110-111, 221, 222, 
223, 224, and 225. In addition, juniors 
and seniors majoring in Biology are re- 
quired to register for Biology 349/449 
(non-credit colloquium) during all 
semesters on campus. With departmental 
consent. Biology 226 may be substituted 
for Biology 221 . Only two courses num- 
bered below 200 may count toward the 
major. Departmental internships cannot 



be used to fulfill the eighth required 
course. In addition, three units of che- 
mistry and two units of mathematical sci- 
ence are required. The chemistry re- 
quirement must include at least one unit 
of organic chemistry chosen from Che- 
mistry 115, 220, or 221. The mathema- 
tical science courses must be chosen 
from Computer Science 125 and 
Mathematics 103, 107, 109, 128 or 
above. Certain specific exceptions to the 
core program will be made for three-year 
students enrolled in cooperative prog- 
rams. Such exceptions are noted under 
the particular cooperative program de- 
scribed in the Academic Program chapter 
of the catalog. Students interested in 
these programs should contact the prog- 
ram director before finalizing their indi- 
vidual programs. Credit may not be 
earned for both Biology 101 and 1 10 or 
for both Biology 102 and 111. Consent 
of instructor may replace Biology 1 10- 
111 as a prerequisite for all biology 
courses. 

A minor in Biology requires the com- 
pletion of four upper-level (200's or 
higher) courses, with their appropriate 
prerequisites. At least two of these must 
be from the 200' s series of courses. A 
minor with a special name (e.g.. En- 
vironmental Science) may be designed 
by an individual. 

101-102 PRINCIPLES OF BIOLOGY 

An investigation of biological principles, in- 
cluding ecological systems, form and func- 
tion in selected representative organisms 
(especially man), cell theory, molecular 
biology, reproduction, inheritance, adapta- 
tion, and evolution. The course is designed 
primarily for students not planning to major 
in the biological sciences. Three hours of 
lecture and one two-hour laboratory per 
week. 

1 10-11 1 INTRODUCTION TO BIOLOGY 

An introduction to the study of biology de- 
signed for students planning to major in the 
biological sciences. Major topics considered 
include the origin of life, cellular respiration 
and photosynthesis, genetics, development, 
anatomy and physiology, ecology, behavior, 
and evolution. Three hours of lecture and 
one three-hour laboratory per week. 

113-114 HUMAN ANATOMY 
AND PHYSIOLOGY 
Using the organ-systems approach, the 



30 



course is an introduction to the human body 
— its anatomy, physiology, and normal de- 
velopment — with particular attention to 
structure and function at all levels of its 
biological organization (molecular through 
organismal). Three hours of lecture, one 
hour of discussion, and one three-hour 
laboratory per week. Prerequisite: Chemis- 
try 115 or Chemistry 220 or consent of in- 
structor. 

221 MICROBIOLOGY 

A study of microorganisms. Emphasis is 
given to the identification and physiology of 
microorganisms as well as to their role in 
disease, their economic importance, and in- 
dustrial applications. Three hours of lecture 
and rvi'o two-hour laboratory periods per 
week. Prerequisite: Biology 110-111. Not 
open to students who have received credit for 
Biology 226. 

222 GENETICS 

A general consideration of the principles 
governing inheritance, including treatment 
of classical, molecular, cytological, phy- 
siological, microbial, human, and popula- 
tion genetics. Three hours of lecture and nvo 
two-hour laboratory periods per week. Pre- 
requisite: Biology 110-111. 

223 ANIMAL PHYSIOLOGY 

The mechanisms and functions of animal 
systems, including the autonomic, endoc- 
rine, digestive, cardio-vascular. respiratory, 
renal, nervous, and reproductive systems. 
Mammalian physiology is stressed. Three 
hours of lecture and one three-hour labora- 
tory per week. Prerequisite: Biology 110- 
111. 

224 ECOLOGY 

The study of the principles of ecology with 
emphasis on the role of chemical, physical. 
and biological factors affecting the distribu- 
tion and succession of plant and animal 
populations and communities. Included will 
be field studies of local habitats as well as 
laboratory experimentation. Two hours of 
lecture and one four-hour laboratory per 
week. Prerequisite: Biology 1 10-11 1 . 

225 PLANT SCIENCES 

A survey of the structure, development, 
function, classification, and use of plants and 
related organisms. The swdy will comprise 
four general topic areas; form, including 
morphology and anatomy of plants in growth 
and reproduction; function, concentrating on 
nutrition and metabolism peculiar to photo- 
synthetic organisms; classification systems 
and plant identification, and human uses of 
plants. Three hours of lecture and one three- 
hour laboratory per week. Prerequisite: 
Biology 110-111. 



lit MICROBIOLOGY FOR THE 
HEALTH SCIENCES 
A study of microorganisms with emphasis 
given to their taxonomy and their role in 
various aspects of human infectious disease. 
Mechanisms for treating and preventing in- 
fectious diseases will be presented. Labora- 
tory to include diagnostic culture proce- 
dures, antibiotic sensitivity testing, serolo- 
gy, anaerobic techniques and a study of 
hemolytic reactions. Three hours of lecture 
and four hours of laboratory per week. Pre- 
requisites: one year of introductory level 
biology, one year of chemistry or consent of 
instructor. Not open to students who have 
received credit for Biology 221. 

328 AQUATIC BIOLOGY 

A field-oriented course dealing with fresh- 
water ecosystems. Studies will include a sur- 
vey of the plankton, benthos, and fish — as 
well as the physical and chemical character- 
istics of water that influence their distribu- 
tion. Several local field trips and a one-week 
trip to a field station will familiarize students 
with the diversity of habitats and the techni- 
ques of limnologists. Alternative May terms. 
Prerequisites: Biology 110-111. 

329 TROPICAL MARINE BIOLOGY 

A field oriented course where students study 
the creatures of the fringing reefs, barrier 
reefs, lagoons, turtlegrass beds and man- 
grove swamps at a tropical marine labora- 
tory. Studies will include survey of plankton, 
invertebrates, and fish as well as the physical 
and chemical charactenstics that influence 
their distribution. Prerequisite: Biology 1 10- 
111. Alternate May terms. 

330 COMPARATIVE ANATOMY 
OF VERTEBRATES 

Detailed examination of the origins, struc- 
ture, and functions of the principal organs of 
the vertebrates. Special attention is given to 
the progressive modification of organs from 
lower to higher vertebrates. Three hours of 
lecture and one four-hour laboratory per 
week. Prerequisite: Biology 110-111. Alter- 
nate yeai s. 

334 INVERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY 
Comparative study of the invertebrate phyla 
with emphasis on phylogeny, physiology, 
morphology, and ecology. Two three-hour 
lecture/laboratory periods per week. Prere- 
quisite: Biology 110-111. Alternate years. 

335 CELLULAR PHYSIOLOGY 
Physicochemical background of cellular 
function: functions of membrane systems 
and organelles; metabolic pathways; bio- 
chemical and cellular bases of growth, de- 
velopment and responses of organisms. 
Three hours of lecture and one three-hour 



laboratory- per week. Prerequisites: Biology 
110-111 and a year of chemistry. Alternate 
years. 

336 EVOLUTION 

The study of the origin and modification 
of life on earth. Topics discussed include 
molecular evolution, population genetics, 
gene flow, natural selection, sexual se- 
lection, kin selection, neutral theory, 
extinction, co-evolution, and the evolution 
of man. Four hours of lecture per week. 
Prerequisite: Biology 110-111 or consent 
of the instructor. Alternate years. 

339 MEDICAL GENETICS 

This course is concerned with the rela- 
tionships of heredity to disease. Discussions 
will focus on topics such as chromosomal 
abnormalities, metabolic variation and dis- 
ease, somatic cell genetics, genetic screen- 
ing, and immunogenetics. Laboratory exer- 
cises will offer practical experiences in gene- 
tic diagnostic techniques. Prerequisite: Biol- 
ogy 101-102 or 110-111. May term only. 

3A2 ANIMAL BEHAVIOR 

A study of the causation, function, evolu- 
tion, and biological significance of animal 
behaviors in their normal environment and 
social contexts. Three hours of lecture and 
one four-hour laboratory- each week. Prere- 
quisite: Biology 110-111. Alternate years. 

346 VIROLOGY 

An introduction to the study of viruses. 
The course will cover virus anatomy and 
reproduction, diseases caused by viruses, 
modern treatments of viral infections and 
viral vaccines produced by recombinant 
DNA and other technologies. Course 
content will also include a description of 
how viruses are used as tools for genetic 
engineering and for studying cellular 
processes like membrane signal trans- 
duction, regulation of genetic expression 
and oncogenesis (cancer). Four hours of 
lecture per week. Prerequisite: Biology 
110-111 or consent of instructor. Alternate 
years. 

347 IMMUNOLOGY 

The course introduces concepts concerning 
how pathogens cause disease and host de- 
fense mechanisms against infectious dis- 
eases. Characterization of and relationships 
between antigens, haptens, and antibodies 
are presented. Serological assays will in- 
clude: agglutination precipitations, im- 
munofluorescence, immunoeletrophoresis, 
and complement fixation. Other topics are: 
immediate and delayed hypersensitivies 
(i.e. allergies such as hay fever and poison 
ivy), immunological renal diseases, im- 
munohematology (blood groups, etc.) 



31 



hybridome technology, the chemistry and 
function of complement autoimmunity, 
and organ graft rejection phenomena. 
Three hours of lecture, one three-hour 
laboratory, and one hour of arranged 
work per week. Prerequisite: Biology 
110-11 1. Alternate years. 

403 FIELD BIOLOGY FOR TEACHERS 

A methods course for students preparing to 
teach biology. Sources and methods of col- 
lecting and preserving various plant and 
animal materials. Summer term only. 

431 HISTOLOGY 

A study of the basic body tissues and the 
microscopic anatomy of the organs and 
strucnires of the body which are formed from 
them. Focus is on normal human histology. 
Three hours of lecture and one four-hour 
laboratory per week. Prerequisite: Biology 
110-111 . Alternate years. 

433 ECONOMIC AND 

SYSTEMATIC BOTANY 
Structure and classification of plants with 
emphasis on those species, particularly food 
and drug plants, having significance for hu- 
man affairs. Three hours of lecture and one 
three-hour laboratory per week. Prere- 
quisites: Biology 110-111, Biology 225. 
Alternate years. 

440 PARASITOLOGY AND 

MEDICAL ENTOMOLOGY 
The biology of parasites and parasitism. Stu- 
dies on the major groups of animal parasites 
and anthropod vectors of disease will involve 
taxonomy and life cycles. Emphasis will be 
made on parasites of medical and veterinary 
importance . Three hours of lecture and one 
three-hour laboratory per week. Prere- 
quisite: Biology 110-111 . Alternate years. 

441 VERTEBRATE EMBRYOLOGY 

A study of the development of vertebrates 
from fertilization to the fully formed fetus. 
Particular attention is given to the chick and 
human as representative organisms. Two 
three-hour lecture/ laboratory periods per 
week. Prerequisite: Biology 110-1 11 . Alter- 
nate years. 



444 BIOCHEMISTRY 

Emphasis is given to the metabolism of car- 
bohydrates, lipids, amino acids, proteins, 
and nucleic acids; integration of metabol- 
ism; and biochemical control mechanisms, 
including allosteric control, induction, 
repression signal transduction as well as 
the various types of of inhibitive control 
mechanisms. Three hours of lecture, one 
three-hour laboratory and one hour of 
arranged work per week. Prerequisite: 
Chemistry 220-221 or Chemistry 115, or 



consent of instructor. Cross-listed as 
Chemistry 444. Alternate years. 

445 RADIATION BIOLOGY 

A study of the effects of ionizing and non- 
ionizing radiations on cells, tissues and 
organisms. Consideration will be given to 
repair mechanisms and how repair deficien- 
cies elucidate the nature of radiation dam- 
age. Three hours of lecture and one three- 
hour laboratory per week. Prerequisites: 
Biology 110-111, one year of chemistry. 
Alternate years. 

446 PLANT ANATOMY 

AND PHYSIOLOGY 
A study of plant physiology as a function of 
plant anatomy. Metabolic relationships and 
environmental factors will be examined from 
a background of the structure and develop- 
ment of cells, tissues, organs, and whole 
plants. Three hours of lecture and one three- 
hour laboratory per week. Prerequisites: 
Biology 110-111. Biology 225. Alternate 
years. 

448 ENDOCRINOLOGY 

This course begins with a survey of the role 
of the endocrine hormones in the integration 
of body functions. This is followed by a 
study of the control of hormone synthesis and 
release, and a consideration of the mechan- 
isms by which hormones accomplish their 
effects on target organs. Two three-hour lec- 
ture! laboratory periods per week. Prere- 
quisite: Biology 110-111 . Alternate years. 

349 & 449 BIOLOGY COLLOQUIUM 

This course offers the student a chance to 
become familiar with research in the Biolo- 
gical Sciences using techniques such as 
meeting and talking with active researchers, 
reading and critically analyzing the current 
literature, and discussing the ideas and 
methods shaping Biology. Students will be 
required to read and analyze scientific pap- 
ers, actively participate in discussions. 
Students majoring in this department are 
required to enroll during all semesters 
spent on campus in the junior and senior 
years. The grade will be P/F. Non-credit 
course. One hour per week. Prerequisites: 
Biology majors with junior or senior class 
standing. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Recent samples of internships in the depart- 
ment include ones with the Department of 
Environmental Resources, nuclear medicine 
or rehabilitative therapies at a local hospital. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index) 

Departmental studies are experimentally 
oriented and may entail either lab or field 
work. 



490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 
Examples of recent honors projects have in- 
volved stream analysis, gypsy moth re- 
search, drug synthesis and testing. 



BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

Associate Professor: Weaver 

(Chairperson) 
Assistant Professor: Sterngold 
Instructor: Henninger 
Lecturers: Larrabee, Wagner 

To graduate with a major in business 
administration, a student must complete 
one of two tracks; 

Track I — Business Management 

This track is designed to train students 
in the functions of today's profit and non- 
profit organizations. The program pro- 
vides a well-balanced preparation for a 
wide variety of careers, including gener- 
al administration, personnel administra- 
tion, commercial banking, investments 
and portfolio management, security 
analysis, corporate financial manage- 
ment, general marketing, sales, product 
management, advertising, retail mer- 
chandising, and production and manu- 
facturing management. 

Required courses are Business 110, 
111, 223, 228-229, 338, 339, 440, 441; 
Mathematics 103. Business 332 or 443 
may be substituted for Business 229, and 
Business 340 may be substituted for 
Business 339. Accounting 110 may 
be substituted for Business 110 if the 
student is transferring into the busi- 
ness administration major, but duplicate 
credit will not be granted. 

Majors are encouraged to take Busi- 
ness 335, 336; Computer Science 108; 
Economics 110, 111; Mass Communi- 
cation 211, 323; Mathematics 112; 
Philosophy 216; and Psychology 225. 
Majors also are encouraged to take 
a foreign language. The additional 
elective offerings are intended to 
add depth in the areas of finance, 
marketing, and management. 



32 



Track II — Management Science 

This track is designed to train students 
in the quantitative aspects of business 
administration. It provides excellent 
undergraduate preparation for graduate 
study in management science, operations 
research, and quantitative business 
administration. The program also pro- 
vides a solid preparation for careers in 
production control, systems analysis, re- 
search, forecasting, industrial and tech- 
nical sales and any of the functional areas 
of business where quantitative training 
would be an added qualification. 

Required courses are Business 110, 
111, 223, 338; 339, 446; Economics 
110, 111, 441; Mathematics 103, 112, 
128, 129, 338; and Computer Science 
108. Accounting 110 may be substituted 
for Business 110 if the student is trans- 
ferring into the business administration 
major. 



Minors 

The Business Administration Depart- 
ment offers two minors. The following 
courses are required to complete a minor 
in Marketing: Business 228, 229, 332, 
445 , and 443 or 448 . A minor in Finance 
requires the completion of Business 338, 
339, 340, and Economics 220, 441, or 
Accounting 225. 



1 10 HNANCIAL ACCOUNTING 

An introduction to the art of measuring, 
communicating, and interpreting financial 
activity. Recording, classifying and sum- 
marizing business transactions, the inter- 
pretation of accounts, and the preparation 
of financial statements are studied. Not 
open to students who have received credit 
for Accounting 110. 



1 1 1 MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING 

An introduction to the various components of 
managerial accounting. Emphasis is placed 
on managerial problem solving techniques 
and the analysis of the results. Accounting 
systems, costing procedures, cost-volume 
profit relationships, managerial control pro- 
cesses and the use of computers as aids to 
decision making are swdied. Students will 
gain hands-on experience with various com- 
puter applications of managerial accounting. 
Prerequisite: Business 110 or Accounting 
110. 



223 QUANTITATIVE 

BUSINESS ANALYSIS 
Techniques of quantitative analysis useful in 
making business decisions. Topics include: 
decision theory, inventory models, network 
models, forecasting, and other selected ap- 
plications. Students will be introduced to 
computer applications of the quantitative 
models. Prerequisite: Mathematics 103 or 
consent of instructor. 

228-229 MARKETING MANAGEMENT 

Planning, organization, and control of the 
distribution activities of the firm, and an 
analysis and evaluation of the marketing sys- 
tem, its institutions, and processes. Applica- 
tion of marketing principles and the develop- 
ment of strategies for specific marketing 
problems. Product, channel flow, promo- 
tion, and pricing strategies explored. Read- 
ings, cases, and games. 

332 ADVERTISING 

Nature, scope, methods, and effects of 
promotion. Techniques of analysis and con- 
trol in the use of advertising and publicity as 
tools in developing business strategy. Prere- 
quisite: Business 228 or consent of in- 
structor. 

335 LEGAL PRINCIPLES I 

Lectures and analysis of cases on the nature, 
sources, and fundamentals of the law in 
general, and particularly as relating to con- 
tracts, agency, and negotiable instruments. 
Open only to juniors and seniors. 

336 LEGAL PRINCIPLES II 

Lectures on the fundamentals and history of 
the law relating to legal association, real 
property, wills, and estates. Open only to 
juniors and seniors. 

338 HNANCIAL MANAGEMENT I 

An introduction to working capital manage- 
ment and financial analysis and planning. 
Topics are covered through readings, cases 
and problen solving in the areas of decisions 
on current asset and liability structures, cash 
and marketable securities, accounts receiv- 
ables, inventory management and control, 
spontaneous financing, short-term borrow- 
ing, ratio and financial statement analysis, 
source and use statements, cash flow fore- 
casting, and financial statements forecast- 
ing. Prerequisites: Mathematics 103: Busi- 
ness 110. 111. and 223: or consent of in- 
structor. 

339 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT II 

A study of capital asset structure and long- 
term financial decisions. Topics are covered 
through readings, cases, and problem solv- 
ing in the areas of capital budgeting, includ- 
. ing risk and required rates of return, leverag- 



ing the firm, concepts of capital structures, 
dividend policy, external financing, term 
and lease financing, long-term debt, equity 
securities, convertible securities and war- 
rants. Prerequisite: Business 338 or consent 
of instructor. 

340 INVESTMENTS 

An introduction to the financial sector of the 
economy and the structure and functions of 
financial markets and the agencies involved; 
brokerage houses and stock exchanges; the 
various types of investments available. 
Techniques used to evaluate financial secur- 
ities. Also covered are recent developments 
in investment theory. Prerequisite: Business 
338 or consent of instructor. 

440 MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS 
Structural characteristics and functional rela- 
tionships of a business organiztion as well as 
the problems encountered in coordinating the 
internal resources of a firm. Emphasis on 
administrative efficiency and procedures. 

441 BUSINESS POLICIES 

Planning, organization, and control of busi- 
ness operations; setting of goals; coordina- 
tion of resources, development of policies. 
Analysis of strategic decisions encompas- 
sing all areas of a business, and the use and 
analysis of control measures. Emphasis on 
both the internal relationship of various ele- 
ments of production, finance, marketing, 
and personnel, and the relationship of the 
business entity toextemal stimuli. Readings, 
cases, and games. Prerequisites: Business 
223. 228-229. 338. 339. and440. orconsenl 
of instructor. Seniors only. 

442 PERSONNEL MANAGEMENT 

An introduction to the managerial problems 
of recruiting, selecting, training, and retrain- 
ing the human resources of the firm. Emph- 
asis is placed on the interrelationship of per- 
sonnel policies with management objectives 
and philosophies in such areas as fringe be- 
nefits, wage and salary policies, union acti- 
vities, and health and safety. 

443 RETAIL MANAGEMENT I 

Planning, organization, and control of the 
retailing firm. Competitive strategy develop- 
ment through store location, layout, admi- 
nistration organization, buying, and pricing. 
Cases, readings, and papers. Prerequisite: 
Business 228 or consent of instructor. 

445 MARKETING RESEARCH 

This is a study of the principles and practices 
of Marketing Research. The focus is on the 
development and application of Marketing 
Research Studies. Topics covered include 
selection of a research design, project plan- 
ning and scheduling, data specification and 



33 



gathering, quantitative methods to analyze 
data, interpretation of data, and research re- 
port writing. Readings, cases, and research 
project. Mathematics 103 and Business 228 
or consent of instructor. 

446 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT 

An introduction to the planning, organiza- 
tion, and controlling of operations in a pro- 
duction facility. The course also incorporates 
quantitative techniques and computer ap- 
plications used in the production and opera- 
tions management environment. Topics in- 
clude capacity and layout planning, facility 
location analysis, job design and work 
measurement, production scheduling, mate- 
rials requirement planning models, and qual- 
ity controls. Students will engage in the 
actual design of an inventory status file and 
MRP system. Prerequisite: Business 223 or 
consent of instructor. 

447 CREATIVE ADVERTISING 

A workshop concerned with theme, copy, 
and effective presentation of advertisements 
for pnnt media, radio, and direct mail. Pri- 
marily an exploration of creativity through 
analysis of works of artists and writers with 
application to practical advertising, and tai- 
lored to the interests of individual students. 
May term. Prerequisite: Business 332 or 
consent of instructor. 

448 SALES SEMINAR 

The role of selling in the economy. The art of 
creative selling; application of theories from 
the behavioral sciences to selling through the 
analysis of sales situations and techniques. 
Prerequisite: Business 228 or consent of in- 
structor. 

449 MANAGING THE 
SMALL BUSINESS 

How the potential businessman proceeds in 
establishing, operating, and profiting from a 
small business operation. Considered and 
analyzed are such aspects as marketing, 
managing, financing, promoting, insuring, 
establishing, developing, and staffing the 
small retail, wholesale service, and manu- 
facturing firm. May term. Prerequisite: 
Business III. 228. and 338 or consent of 
instructor. May term. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Typical examples are marketing analysis for 
a paper 'products firm, planning a branch 
store, hotel and real estate management, 
banking and insurance. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Examples of recent studies are: the economic 
impact of a college on a community; a 
marketing strategy for a local firm enterting 
the consumer market. 



490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 
A recent project was a study of the evolution 
of anti-trust legislation in the United States. 



CHEMISTRY 

Associate Professor: Franz 

(Chairperson) 
Assistant Professor: Berkheimer 

McDonald 
Instructor: Wolfskill 

A major in chemistry consists of Che- 
mistry 110-111, 220-22 1 , 330-33 1,332 
and 333; Physics 225-226; Mathematics 
128, 129 and one of the following 
courses: Mathematics 103, 231, 238, 
332, or Computer Science 125. 
Mathematics 231 and 238 and French or 
German are strongly recommended for 
students planning on graduate study in 
chemistry. To be certified in secondary 
education, chemistry majors must also 
pass two biology courses numbered 1 10 
or higher. 

A minor in Chemistry requires com- 
pletion of four courses numbered 220 or 
higher; at least one must be taken from 
each of the following groups: Group A 
(220-221, 440, 442, 444) and Group B 
(226 or 332, 330-331, 333, 439, 443). 
Named minors in specialized areas may 
be designed by students with depart- 
mental approval. 

108 CHEMICAL PRINCIPLES 

An introduction to the principles of inorganic 
chemistry. Topics include atomic and 
molecular structure, nomenclature, gases. 
solutions, acids and bases, kinetics, equilib- 
rium, oxidation-reduction, and stoichiomet- 
ry. The approach is primarily descriptive, 
with illustrations drawn mostly from the 
health sciences. Along with Chemistry 115. 
this course is designed for those students who 
require only two semesters of chemistry, and 
is not intended for students planning to enroll 
in chemistry courses numbered 200 or 
above. Three hours lecture, one hour discus- 
sion, and one three-hour laboratory period 
each week. Prerequisite: high school algeb- 
ra or Math 005. Not open for credit to stu- 
dents who have received credit for Chemistrv 
110. 



1 10 GENERAL CHEMISTRY I 

A quantitative introduction to the concepts 
and models of chemistry. Topics include 
stoichiometry. atomic and molecular struc- 
ture, nomenclature, bonding, thermoche- 
mistry, gases, solutions, and chemical reac- 
tions. The laboratory introduces the student 
to methods of separation, purification, and 
identification of compounds according to 
their physical properties. This course is de- 
signed for smdents who plan to major in one 
of the sciences. Three hours lecture, one 
hour discussion and one three-hour labora- 
tory period each week. Prerequisite: place- 
ment in Chemistry 1 10 is determined in part 
by a student's score on the mathematics 
placement examination. Not open for credit 
to students who have received credit for Che- 
mistry 108. except by permission of the Che- 
mistry Department. 



1 1 1 GENERAL CHEMISTRY II 

A continuation of Chemistry 110, with 
emphasis placed on the foundations of analy- 
tical, inorganic, and physical chemistry. 
Topics include kinetics, general and ionic 
equilibria, acid-base theory, electrochemis- 
try, thermodynamics, nuclear chemistry, 
coordination chemistry, and descriptive in- 
organic chemistry of selected elements. The 
laboratory treats aspects of quantitative and 
qualitative inorganic analysis. Three hours 
lecture, one hour discussion, and one three- 
hour laboratory period each week. Prere- 
quisite: Chemistry 1 10 or consent of the Che- 
mistry Department. 

1 15 BRIEF ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 

A descriptive study of the compounds of 
carbon. This course will illustrate the princi- 
ples of organic chemistry with material re- 
levant to students in medical technology, 
biology, nursing, forestry, education and the 
humanities. Topics include nomenclature, 
alkanes. arenes. functional derivatives, ami- 
no acids and proteins, carbohydrates and 
other naturally occurring compounds. This 
course is designed for students who require 
only one semester of organic chemistry. 
Three hours lecture, one hour discussion, 
and one four-hour laboratory period each 
week. Prerequisite: Chemistry 108 or 110. 
Not open for credit to students who have 
received credit for Chemistry 220. 



220-221 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 

A systematic study of the compounds of car- 
bon, including both aliphatic and aromatic 
series. The laboratory work introduces the 
student to simple fundamental methods of 
organic synthesis, isolation, and analysis. 
Three hours lecture and one four-hour 
laboratory period each week. Prerequisite: 
Chemistry 111. 



34 



226 CLINICAL ANALYSIS 

A presentation of selected wet-chemical and 
instrumental methods of quantitative analy- 
sis with an orientation toward clinical ap- 
plications in medical technology. Topics in- 
clude; general methods and calculations; 
solutions; titrations; photometric analyses 
(colorimetric, atomic absorption, flame 
emission); electrochemical methods (ion- 
selective electrodes, coulometry). automa- 
tion. Lecture, recitation, and laboratory dai- 
ly. Prerequisite: Chemistry 110-111 or con- 
sent of instructor . May not be taken for credit 
following Chemistry 332. May term only. 

330-331 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY 

A study of the fundamental principles of 
theoretical chemistry and their applications. 
The laboratory work includes techniques in 
physicochemical measurements. Three 
hours lecture and one four-hour laboratory 
period each week. Prerequisite: Chemistry 
111. Mathematics 129. and one year of phy- 
sics or consent of instructor. 

332 ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY 

A study of the fundamental methods of gra- 
vimetric, volumetric, and elementary in- 
strumental analysis together with practice in 
laboratory techniques and calculations of 
these methods. Two hours lecture and two 
three-hour laboratory periods each week. 
Prerequisite: Chemistry HI or consent of 
instructor. 

333 ADVANCED INORGANIC CHEMISTRY 
A study of modem theories of atomic and 
molecular structure and their relationship to 
the chemistry of selected elements and their 
compounds. Three hours lecture and one 
four-hour laboratory period each week. Pre- 
requisite: Chemistry 330. Mathematics 129. 
arui one year of physics or consent of in- 
structor. 

439 INTRODUCTION TO 
QUANTUM MECHANICS 

After presenting the origin, basic concepts. 
and formulation of quantum mechanics with 
emphasis on its physical meaning, the free 
particle, simple harmonic oscillator, and 
central-force problems will be investigated. 
Both time-independent and time-dependent 
perturbation theory will be covered. The ele- 
gant operator formalism of quantum mecha- 
nics will conclude the course. Four hours of 
lecture and recitation. Prerequisites: 
Mathematics 231. either Chemistry 331 or 
Physics 226, and consent of instructor. 
Cross-listed as Physics 439. 

440 ADVANCED ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 
Theory and application of modem synthetic 
organic chemistry. Topics may include ox- 
idation-reduction processes, carbon-carbon 
bond forming reactions, functional group 



transformations, and multistep syntheses of 
natural products (antiobiotics. antitumor 
agents, and antiviral agents). Three hours 
lecture and one four-hour laboratory period. 
Prerequisite: Chemistry 221 . 

442 SPECTROSCOPY AND 
MOLECULAR STRUCTURE 
Theory and application of the identifi- 
cation of organic compounds. Special 
emphasis will be placed on the utilization 
of spectroscopic techniques ('H-NMR, 
"C-NMR, IR, UV-VIS, and MS). Three 
hours lecture and one four-hour laboratory 
period each week. Prerequisites: Chemistry 
221, Chemistry 331, or consent of in- 
structor. 

443 ADVANCED 
ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY 

A study of advanced analytical methods with 
emphasis on chromatographic, electroche- 
mical, and spectroscopic methods of in- 
strumental analysis. Three hours lecture and 
one four-hour laboratory period each week. 
Prerequisite: Chemistry 331 and 332 or con- 
sent of instructor. 

444 BIOCHEMISTRY 

Emphasis is given to the metabolism of car- 
bohydrates, lipids, amino acids, proteins, 
and nucleic adds; integration of metabolism; 
and biochemical control mechanisms, in- 
cluding allosteric control, induction, repres- 
sion, signal transduction as well as the 
various types of of inhibitive control 
mechanisms. Prerequisite: Chemistry 221 
or 115 or consent of instructor. Cross- 
listed as Biology 444. 

348 & 448 CHEMISTRY COLLOQUIUM 

A seminar in which faculty, students, and 
invited professional chemists discuss their 
own reseach activities or those of others 
which have appeared in recent chemical liter- 
ature. Prerequisite: Three semesters of non- 
credit Chemistry Colloquium taken during 
the junior and senior years. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

The student will ordinarily work under su- 
pervision in an industrial laboratory and sub- 
mit a written report on the project. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
The smdent will ordinarily work on a labora- 
tory research project and will write a thesis 
on the work. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 
The smdent will ordinarily work on a labora- 
tory research project with emphasis being on 



the student's showing initiative and making a 
scholarly contribution. A thesis will be 
written . 



CRIMINAL JUSTICE 

Assistant Professor: Strauser 
(Coordinator) 

This major is designed to acquaint 
students with the American criminal 
justice system and to provide an under- 
standing of the social, psychological, 
philosophical, and political contexts 
within which the system of criminal 
justice functions. Its aim is to develop 
students" intellectual and scientific skills 
in raising and attempting to answer 
important questions about the system of 
justice and its place in society. The pro- 
gram offers opportunity for intern expe- 
rience in the field, and prepares for 
careers in the areas of law enforcement, 
probation and parole, prisons, and treat- 
ment services. 

The major has two tracks. Track I 
prepares for careers in law enforcement. 
Track II prepares for careers in correc- 
tions. 

Track I — Law Enforcement. 

The major consists of 10 courses, 
distributed as follows: 

A. Professional courses in criminal 
justice (three courses): 
Introduction to the Criminal Justice 
System (Sociology and Anthropolo- 
gy 115) 

Introduction to Law Enforcement 
(Sociology and Anthropology 223) 
The American Prison System 
(Sociology and Anthropology 339) 

B. Courses in the social, psychological, 
philosophical, and political context 
of the justice system (seven courses): 
Criminology (Sociology and Anthro- 
pology 300) and either Juvenile 
Delinquency (Sociology and Anthro- 
pology 221) or Racial and Cultural 
Minorities (Sociology and Anthro- 
pology 334) (two courses) 
Abnormal Psychology (Psychology 
116) (one course) 

America as a Civilization (American 
Studies 200), Afro- American His- 



35 



tory (History 230) or United States 
Social and Intellectual History Since 
1877 (History 443) (one course) 
Law and Society (Political Science 
335) and Civil Rights and Liberties 
(Political Science 331) (two courses) 
Philosophical Issues in Criminal 
Justice (Philosophy 218) (one 
course) 
C. Internship or practicum in law 
enforcement. (Recommended but 
not required for the major) 

Track II — Corrections. 

The major consists of 10 courses, 
distributed as follows: 

A. Professional courses in criminal 
justice (three courses): 
Introduction to the Criminal Justice 
System (Sociology and Anthropolo- 
gy 115) 

The American Prison System 
(Sociology and Anthropology 339) 
Introduction to Human Services 
(Sociology and Anthropology 222) 

B. Courses in the social, psychological, 
philosophical, and political context 
of the justice system (seven courses): 
Criminology (Sociology and Anthro- 
pology 300) and either Juvenile 
Delinquency (Sociology and Anthro- 
pology 221) or Racial and Cultural 
Minorities (Sociology and Anthro- 
pology 334) (two courses) 
Abnormal Psychology (Psychology 
116) (one course) 

America as a Civilization (American 
Studies 200), Afro- American His- 
tory (History 230) or United States 
Social and Intellectual History Since 
1877 (History 443) (one course) 
Law and Society (Political Science 
335) and Civil Rights and Liberties 
(Political Science 33 1 ) (two courses) 
Philosophical Issues in Criminal 
Justice (Philosophy 218) (One 
course) 

C. Internship or practicum in correc- 
tions. (Recommended but not 
required for the major). Prerequi- 
sites: Mathematics 103, Psychology 
431, and Psychology 239. These 
prerequisites may be waived in cer- 
tain cases by the coordinating com- 
mittee. 



Majors should seek advice con- 
cerning course selection from mem- 
bers of the coordinating committee 
and should note course prerequisites 
in planning their programs. 

A minor in Criminal Justice con- 
sists of five courses. Required 
courses include: Soc 115, Introduc- 
tion to Criminal Justice; and any four 
other courses in the Criminal Justice 
major listed above, at least three of 
which must be numbered 200 or 
above. To receive credit for a minor 
in Criminal Justice, a student must 
maintain a minimum 2.0 cum in 
courses completed for the minor. 



ECONOMICS 

Professor: Opdahl (Chairperson) 
Assistant Professor: Madresehee 

The major has two tracks. Track I is 
designed for the student whose primary 
interest lies in business management; 
Track II is designed to provide a broad 
understanding of economic theory and 
its application to economic, social, and 
business problems. In addition to pre- 
paring students for a career in business 
or government, this track provides an 
excellent background for graduate or 
professional studies. 

Track I — Managerial Economics 

requires Economics 110, 111, 332, and 
either 330 or 441; Business 110 and 111 
or Accounting 110 and 220; Business 
338 and 339, plus two electives from 
Economics 220, 229, 331, 335, 337, 
443, and Business 440. Business 340 
(Investments) may be substituted for 
Business 339 (Financial Management 
II). 

Track II — Political Economy 

requires Economics 110 and 111, 331, 
440, 330 or 441 , and three other courses 
in economics. Depending on their 
academic and career interests, students 
are encouraged to select a minor in 
another department such as political sci- 
ence, philosophy, or history. 



In addition, the following courses are 
recommended: all majors — Math 103 
and Business 223; majors planning gra- 
dute work — Math 112 and 128; Track 
II majors — Business 1 10 and 1 1 1 or 
Accounting 1 10 and 220. 

A minor in Economics requires the 
completion of Economics 110 and 111 
and three other economics courses num- 
bered 200 or above, or any four eco- 
nomics courses numbered 200 or above. 

102 CONSUMER ECONOMICS 

A course in "family" or "practical" eco- 
nomics, designed to teach students how they 
and their families can be intelligent consum- 
ers: that is, how they can spend, save, and 
borrow so as to maximize the value they 
receive for the income they have. Treats 
subjects such as intelligent shopping; the 
uses and abuses of credit; investing savings; 
buying insurance, automobiles, and houses; 
medical care costs; estates and wills, etc. 
Alternate years. 

110 PRINCIPLES OF 
POLITICAL ECONOMY I 
Macroeconomics. Deals with problems of 
the economic system as a whole. What 
influences the level of national income and 
employment? What is inflation and why do 
we have it? What is the role of government 
in a modem capitalistic system? How does 
business organize to produce the goods and 
services we demand? How are the American 
financial and banking systems organized? 
What is the nature of American unionism? 
What are the elements of government 
finance and fiscal policy? 

1 1 1 PRINCIPLES OF 
POLITICAL ECONOMY II 

This course focuses upon microeconomics 
and selected current economic problems. It 
deals with the relatively small units of the 
economy such as the firm and the family. 
Analyzes demand and supply. Discusses 
how business firms decide what and how 
much to produce and how goods and ser- 
vices are priced in different types of mark- 
ets. Also considers such problems as eco- 
nomic growth, international trade, poverty, 
discrimination, ecology, and alternative 
economic systems. 

220 MONEY AND BANKING 

Covers business fluctuations and 
monetary and fiscal policy; the financial 
organization of society; the banking system; 
credit institutions; capital markets, and 
international financial relations. Prerequi- 
site: Economics 110. 



36 



221 COMPARATIVE 

ECONOMIC SYSTEMS 
A comparative analysis of the underlying 
ideologies, the basic institutions, and the 
performance of selected economic systems. 
Alternate years. 

224 URBAN PROBLEMS 

The application of economic theory to the 
study of significant social, political, and 
economic problems associated with urbani- 
zation, including poverty, employment, 
education, crime, health, housing, land use 
and the environment, transportation, and 
public finance. Analysis of solutions 
offered. Alternate years. 

225 ENVIRONMENTAL ECONOMICS 

A study of the relationship between environ- 
mental decay and economic growth, with 
particular reference to failures of the price 
and property-rights systems; application of 
cost/benefit analysis, measures aimed at the 
creation of an ecologically viable economy. 

226 DEVELOPMENT OF LESS 
DEVELOPED COUNTRIES 

A study of the theories and problems of 
capital accumulation, allocation of 
resources, technological development, 
growth, planning techniques, and inslim- 
tions and international relations encountered 
by the developing nations. Alternate years. 

229 BUSINESS CYCLES 
AND FORECASTING 
An introduction to the nature and history of 
business fluctuations, the tools used in 
aggregate analysis, theories that seek to 
explain the cycle, and techniques used in 
forecasting economic activity. Prerequisite: 
Economics 1 10 or permission of the 
instructor. Alternate years. 

330 INTERMEDIATE MICROECONOMICS 
An advanced analysis of contemporary 
theory regarding consumer demand, pro- 
duction costs and theory, profit maximiza- 
tion, market structures, and the determin- 
ants of remms to the factors of production. 
Prerequisites: Economics 1 10 and III. 
Alternate years. 

331 INTERMEDIATE MACROECONOMICS 
An advanced analysis of contemporary 
theory and practice with regard to business 
fluctuations, national income accounting, 
the determination of income and employ- 
ment levels, and the use of monetary and 
fiscal policy. Prerequisites: Economics 110 
and 111 . Alterrmte years. 

332 GOVERNMENT AND THE ECONOMY 

An analytical survey of government's 
efforts to maintain competition through 



antitrust legislation; to supervise acceptable 
cases of private monopoly through public 
utility regulation and via means of regula- 
tory commissions, and to encourage or 
restrain various types of private economic 
activities. Prerequisites: Economics 1 10 
and 111 or consent of instructor. 

335 LABOR PROBLEMS 

The history of organized labor in the United 
States, including the structure of unions, 
employers' opposition to unions, the role of 
government in labor-management relations, 
the economic impact of unions. Alternate 
years. 

337 PUBLIC HNANCE 

An analysis of the fiscal economics of the 
public sector, including the development, 
concepts, and theories of public expendi- 
tures, taxation, and debt at all levels of 
American government. Includes also the use 
of fiscal policy as an economic control 
device. Prerequisites: Economics 110 and 
HI or consent of instructor. Alternate 
years. 

440 HISTORY OF ECONOMIC THOUGHT 
A discussion of the origins, development, 
and significance of the economic ideas 
embodied in the works of Smith. Marx, 
Schumpeter. Keynes, and others. Prerequi- 
sites: Economics 1 10 and III or consent of 
instructor. Alternate years. 

441 MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS 

The application of economic theory and 
methodology to the solution of business 
problems. Subjects include: optimizing 
techniques, risk analysis, demand theory, 
production theory, cost theory, linear pro- 
gramming, capital budgeting, market struc- 
tures, and the theory of pricing. Prerequi- 
sites: Economics 110 and 111. Some 
understanding of differential calculus is 
recommended. 

443 INTERNATIONAL TRADE 

A study of the principles, theories, develop- 
ment, and policies concerning international 
economic relations, with particular refer- 
ence to the United States. Subjects covered 
include: U.S. commercial policy and its 
development, international trade theory, 
tariffs and other protectionist devices, inter- 
national monetary system and its problems, 
balance of payments issues. Alternate 
years. Prerequisites: Economics 110 and 
111. 

AlQ-419 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Typically off campus in business, banking, 
or government, supervised by assigned 
employee of sponsoring organization. 



N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Superior students may select independent 
study in various courses, particularly in pre- 
paration for graduate school. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 



EDUCATION 



Assistant Professors: Conrad 

(Chairperson), Powers 
Part-time Instructors: Marks, Shivetts 

The Education Department offers 
Pennsylvania approved teacher certifica- 
tion programs in elementary and secon- 
dary education, as well as a school nurse 
certification program. 

Students seeking secondary certifica- 
tion must complete Education 200 and 
Psychology 338, as prerequisites to the 
professional semester (Education 446, 
447, 449), as well as the necessary sub- 
ject area courses. Students may earn 
secondary certification in one or more of 
the following areas: Art (K-12), biology, 
chemistry, English, French, general sci- 
ence, German, mathematics, music (K- 
12), physics, school nurse (K-12), social 
studies, and Spanish. 

Students seeking elementary certifica- 
tion must complete Education 200, 
Psychology 338, Mathematics 105, 
Education 000, 341, 342, 343, and 344 
as prerequisites to the professional 
semester (Education 445, 447 and 448). 

Students interested in the teacher- 
education program should refer to the 
Teacher Education Handbook, which 
specifies the current requirements for 
certification. Early consultation with a 
member of the Education Department is 
strongly recommended. Application for 
the professional semester must be made 
during the fall Semester of the junior 
year. The Department of Education 
admits to the professional semester only 
those applicants who are in good 
academic standing, have satisfactorily 
completed the participation require- 
ments, have paid the student teaching 



37 



fee, and have received a positive evalua- 
tion based upon: (a) letters from the stu- 
dent's major department; (b) letters from 
two additional faculty outside the De- 
partment of Education: (c) a screening 
interview conducted by the Education 
Department; and (d) a writing sample 
from the student. Major departments 
have different criteria for their recom- 
mendations. Therefore, the student 
should consult with the chairperson of 
the major department about those re- 
quirements. 



000 SEMINAR IN ART. MUSIC. PHYSICAL 
EDUCATION 

Each elementary student teacher attends a 
series of 1 8 seminars conducted prior to stu- 
dent teaching . during the Fall Semester of the 
senior year. These seminars, conducted by 
certified public school personnel, emphasize 
activities and knowledge which are helpful in 
the self-contained elementary classroom. 
Non-credit course. 

005 DEVELOPMENTAL SEMINAR 

The course focuses on developing reading 
and study skills which are useful in college. 
Reading comprehension, vocabulary build- 
ing, and critical reading are especially 
emphasized. Study skills, including time 
management, textbook reading, reading- 
study systems, notetaking. test-taking skills, 
and library reference skills are also stressed. 
Open only to freshmen who are enrolled in 
English 005 or with consent of instructor. 
One-half unit of credit. 

200 INTRODUCTION TO 

THE STUDY OF EDUCATION 
A study of teaching as a profession with 
emphasis on the economic, social, political, 
and religious conditions which influence 
American schools and teachers. Considera- 
tion is given to the school environment, the 
curriculum, and the children with the inten- 
tion that students will examine more rational- 
ly their own motives for entering the profes- 
sion. 

232 INSTRUCTIONAL MEDIA 
AND COMMUNICATIONS 
A study of the value, design, construction, 
and application of the visual and auditory 
aids to learning. Practical experience in the 
handling of audio-visual equipment and 
materials is provided. Application of audio- 
visual techniques. Application of the visual 
and auditory aids to learning. Students will 
plan and carry out actual teaching assign- 
ments utilizing various A-V devices. 



239 PUBLIC SCHOOL CURRICULUM 

An examination of the various curricula of 
the public schools and their relationships to 
current practices. Special attention will be 
given to the meaning and nature of the curri- 
culum, the desirable outcomes of the curricu- 
lum, conflicting and variant conceptions of 
curricular content, modem techniques of 
curricular construction, criteria for the eva- 
luation of curricula, the curriculum as a 
teaching instrument. Emphasis will be 
placed upon the curriculum work within the 
teaching field of each individual. 

341 TEACHING THE SOCIAL STUDIES 
IN THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 
Studies and experiences to develop a basic 
understanding of the structure, concepts, and 
processes of anthropology, economics, 
geography, history, political science, and 
sociology as they relate to the elementary 
school social-science curriculum. Practical 
applications, demonstrations of methods, 
and the development of integrated teaching 
units using tests, reference books, films, and 
other teaching materials. Observation and 
participation in Lycoming County 
elementary schools. Prerequisites: Educa- 
tion 200 and Psychology 338 or consent of 
instructor. 

342 TEACHING SCIENCE IN 
THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 
Science methods and materials interpreting 
children's science experiences and guiding 
the development of their scientific concepts. 
A study of the science content of the curricu- 
lum, its material, and use. Observation and 
participation in Lycoming County 
elementary schools. Prerequisites: Educa- 
tion 200 and Psychology 338 or consent of 
instructor. 

343 TEACHING LANGUAGE ARTS 
AND CHILDREN'S LITERATURE IN 
THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL. 

A course designed to consider the principal 
means of communication, oral and written, 
including both practical and creative uses. 
Attention will be given to listening, speak- 
ing, written expression, linguistics and 
grammar, spelling, and handwriting. Stress 
will be placed upon the interrelatedness of 
the language arts. Children's literature will 
be explored as a vehicle for developing 
creative characteristics in children and for 
ensuring an appreciation of the creative 
writing of others. Observation and partici- 
pation in Lycoming County elementary 
schools. Prerequisites: Education 200 and 
Psychology 338 or consent of instructor. 

344 TEACHING READING IN 
THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 

A basic course in the philosophy and ration- 



ale for the implementation of an elementary 
developmental-reading program from kin- 
dergarten through sixth grade. Emphasis is 
upon designing a reading instructional pro- 
gram which reflects the nature of the learn- 
ing process and recognizes principles of 
child development through examination of 
the principles, problems, methods, and 
materials used in elementary reading pro- 
grams. Observation and participation in 
Lycoming County elementary schools. Pre- 
requisites: Psychology 338. Education 200. 
or consent of instructor. 



The Elementary Professional Semester 

The following courses comprise the Elementary 
Professional Semester: 

Education 445 Methods of Teaching in the 
Elementary School 

Education 447 Problems in Contemporary 
American Education 

Education 448 Student Teaching in the 
Elementary School 



445 METHODS OF TEACHING 

IN THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 
(PART OF THE 
PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 
The course emphasizes the relationship 
between the theoretical studies of physical, 
social, and cognitive development and the 
elementary classroom environment. Parti- 
cular consideration will be given to the 
appropriate age and developmental level of 
the students with an emphasis upon selec- 
tion and utilization of methods in all the 
elementary subject areas, including art and 
music. Specific attention is given to the 
development of strategies for structuring 
lesson plans, for maintaining classroom 
control, and for overall classroom manage- 
ment. Direct application is made to the indi- 
vidual student-teaching experience. Prereq- 
uisites: Mathematics 105. Education 341. 
342. 343 and 344. or consent of instructor. 

447 PROBLEMS IN CONTEMPORARY 
AMERICAN EDUCATION 
(PART OF THE 
PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 
Seminar in the issues, problems, and chal- 
lenges encountered by teachers in the 
American public schools, especially those 
related to the student-teaching experience. 

448 STUDENT TEACHING 

IN THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 
(PART OF THE 
PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 
Professional experience under the super- 
vision of a selected cooperating teacher in 
a public elementary school in Lycoming 
County. Student teachers are required to 



38 



follow the calendar of the school district icti 

to which they are assigned. Two units i^fNtjUSrl 
maximum. 



Students are considered full time when enrolled in 
the Professional Semester. Those students needing 
an additional course must comply with the stan- 
dards stated in the College catalog. 

The Secondary Professional Semester 

The following courses comprise the Secondary 
Professional Semester: 

Education 446 Methods of Teaching in the 
Secondary School 

Eiducation 447 Problems in Contemporary 
American Education 

Education 449 Student Teaching in the 
Secondary School 

446 METHODS OF TEACHING 

IN THE SECONDARY SCHOOL 
(PART OF THE 
PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 
A study of materials, methods, and tech- 
niques with emphasis on the student's 
major. Stress is placed on the selection and 
utilization of visual and auditory aids to 
learning. Students teach demonstration les- 
sons in the presence of the instructor and the 
members of the class and observe superior 
teachers in Lycoming County secondary 
schools. Prerequisite: Education 200. Psy- 
chology 338, and pre-student teaching par- 
ticipation. 

447 PROBLEMS IN CONTEMPORARY 
AMERICAN EDUCATION 
(PART OF THE 
PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 
Seminar in the issues, problems, and chal- 
lenges encountered by teachers in the 
American public schools, especially those 
related to the student-teaching experience. 

449 STUDENT TEACHING IN THE 
SECONDARY SCHOOL 
(PART OF THE 
PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 

Professional laboratory experience under 
the supervision of a selected cooperating 
teacher in a public secondary school in 
Lycoming County. Student teachers are 
required to follow the calendar of the 
school district to which they are assigned. 
Two units maximum. 

Students are considered full time when eru'olled in 
the Professional Semester. Those students needing 
an additional course must comply with the stan- 
dards stated in the College catalog. 



Professors: Jensen (Chairperson), 

Van Marter 
Associate Professor: Rife 
Assistant Professors: Austin, Bidlake, 

Hawkes, Moses 
Part-time Instructor: Cronin 

A major consists of nine courses not 
including English 005 or 106. These nine 
courses must include English 217, 220, 
221, 222, 223, and one from English 335 
and 336. 

The remaining electives may include 
any course from English 1 12 and above 
not already taken to satisfy the preceding 
requirements. With the consent of the 
Department of English, an appropriate 
course from the offerings of other depart- 
ments may be substituted for an English 
elective. 

Majors seeking secondary certifica- 
tion in English are required to take En- 
glish 335, English 338, and Theatre 100. 

The Department of English partici- 
pates with seven others in the American 
Studies interdisciplinary major, in which 
American literature courses constitute an 
important part of the American-arts con- 
centration area. 

Because of its emphasis on com- 
munication skills, a major or a minor in 
English is excellent preparation for a 
wide range of professions. In addition to 
preparing students for graduate work or 
for teaching, a major or a minor in En- 
glish can be valuable for those interested 
in a career in law, ministry, publishing, 
editing or writing, and business, to name 
a few. 

Two minors are available in the De- 
partment of English. A minor in Litera- 
ture consists of five literature courses 
numbered 112 and above, three of which 
must be numbered 200 or above, and at 
least one of which must be numbered 300 
or above. With the written consent of the 
department, one writing course may be 
substituted for a hterature course. A 
minor in Writing consists of four 
courses: three from English 217, 228, 316 
and 338; and one Writing Intensive 



course in literature at the 300 level or 
above. 

005 WORKSHOP IN 

DEVELOPMENTAL WRITING 
Classroom and laboratory instruction in or- 
ganizing and writing the detailed paragraph 
and illustrative expository theme, with major 
emphasis on spelling, grammar, and sent- 
ence structure. Writing assignments and 
classroom exercises designed to ensure mas- 
tery of the student's special problems in basic 
writing. 

One-half unit grade of "P" will be as- 
signed when the student has successfully 
completed all of the work in the course. 
Required of, and limited to, those who 
have not been exempted from English 005. 

106 COMPOSITION 

Extensive practice in analytical writing. Spe- 
cial emphasis on developing the composing 
skills needed to articulate and defend a posi- 
tion in various situations requiring the use of 
written English. 

1 12 INTRODUCTION TO LITERATURE 

An introduction to the study of literature de- 
signed for the general student and utilizing 
one of the following approaches: major liter- 
ary genres, selected literary masterpieces, or 
traditional themes in literature. Prerequisite: 
English 106 or consent of instructor. 

217 CRITICAL WRITING 

Designed to provide intermediate students of 
literawre with the critical skills necessary for 
an understanding of poetry, fiction, drama, 
and film. Intensive reading and extensive 
practice in writing the critical essay. Re- 
quired of English majors. Prerequisite: En- 
glish 106 or consent of instructor. 

220 BRITISH LITERATURE I 

Literary forms, themes, and authors from the 
Anglo-Saxon through the Neoclassical 
periods. Such writers as Chaucer, Spenser, 
Shakespeare, Milton, Swift. Pope, and 
Johnson; representative works from Beowulf 
to Sterne's Sentimental Journey. Prere- 
quisite: English 106 or consent of instructor. 

221 BRITISH LITERATURE II 

Literary movements and authors from the 
Romantic Period to the present. Particular 
emphasis on such writers as Blake, Word- 
sworth, Shelley, Keats, Tennyson, Brown- 
ing, Arnold. Hardy, Yeats. Eliot. Prere- 
quisite: English 106 or consent of instructor. 

222 AMERICAN LITERATURE 1 

Brief survey of American literature and 
thought before 1800, followed by more in- 
tensive study of the literature and thought of 
the period 1800-1900. Major focus on the 



39 



works of Emerson, Thoreau. Poe, Hawth- 
orne, Melville, Whitman and Dickinson. 
Prerequisite: English 106 or consent of in- 
structor. 

223 AMERICAN LITERATURE II 

Major writers, movements, and tendencies 
in American literature during the present 
century. Such forces as naturalism, realism, 
and modernism; such writers as Twain, 
James, Hemingway, Faulkner, Frost, Eliot, 
and Stevens. Prerequisite: English 106 or 
consent of instructor. 

224 THE SHORT STORY 

Historical and critical study of the short 
story. Consideration of representative exam- 
ples of the form with emphasis on American 
and European writers of the 19th and 20th 
centuries. Prerequisite: English 106 or con- 
sent of instructor. 

225 THE NOVEL 

Historical smdy of the development of the 
novel from the 1 8th through the 20th centur- 
ies. Novels analyzed both as works of prose 
art and as mming points in the development 
of the novel. Alternate years. Prerequisite: 
English 106 or consent of instructor. 

228 CREATIVE WRITING WORKSHOP: 
nCTION AND POETRY 
A beginning course in the theory and practice 
of writing fiction and poetry. Students may 
concentrate in either genre or both. Alternate 
years. Prerequisite: English 106 or consent 
of instructor. 

316 ADVANCED WRITING 

An advanced writing course in analytical 
thinking and writing which develops skills 
in various modes of discourse designed for 
different audiences. Intended for students 
in all majors, the course seeks to improve 
the student's ability to write effectively. 
Prerequisite: A grade of C or belter in 
English 106 or consent of instructor. 
Alternatve years. 

330 ROMANTIC LITERATURE 

A study of the major poetry and fiction, plus 
some non-fiction prose, written during the 
years, 1789-1832. Emphasis on the work of 
at least three poets, two novelists, and 
assorted prose writers. Prerequisite: English 
106 or consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

331 MODERN HCTION 

Study of the novels and short fiction of such 
major British and American figures as Con- 
rad, Forster, Woolf, Lawrence, Joyce, 
Hemingway, Faulkner, Nabokov, and Bel- 
low. Prerequisite: English 106 or consent of 
instructor. 



332 MODERN POETRY 

A study of the poetry written in this century, 
beginning with Yeats and Eliot and con- 
tinuing through such writers as Frost, Wil- 
liams, Moore, Stevens, Auden, Lowell, 
Roethke, Thomas, Ginsberg, and Rich. Pre- 
requisite: English 106 or consent of instruc- 
tor. Alternate years. 

333 COMEDY, TRAGEDY, AND 
THE MODERN THEATRE 
Introduction to the theories of comedy and 
tragedy as those theories help us to deepen 
our response to the theatre. Major focus on 
plays, including musicals, from Ibsen and 
Shaw to the present. Prerequisite: English 
106 or consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

334 WOMEN AND LITERATURE 
Through an examination — literary, social, 
and historical — of selected British and 
American literature by women, this course 
will seek to identify those elements which 
distinguish women's particular contribution 
to the literary canon. Prerequisite: English 
106 or consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

335 CHAUCER 

A study of the major works with emphasis on 
The Canterbury Tales and Troilus and 
Criseyde. Some attention to the traditions out 
of which these works arose. Required of ma- 
jors seeking secondary certification in En- 
glish. Prerequisite: English 106 or consent 
of instructor. Alternate years. 

336 SHAKESPEARE 

A study of representative plays: comedies, 
tragedies, histories, romances. Attention 
given to Shakespeare's life and times. Prere- 
quisite: English 106 or consent of instructor . 
Alternate years. 

338 LINGUISTICS AND THE ANALYSIS 
OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE 
Introduction to methods of analyzing spoken 
and written English. Classroom work sup- 
ported by weekly tutorials, in which the stu- 
dent gains practical experience in identify- 
ing, diagnosing, and correcting basic com- 
munications problems. Required of majors 
seeking secondary certification in English. 
Prerequisite: English 106 or consent of in- 
structor. Alternate years. 

440 SELECTED WRITERS 

An intensive smdy of no more than three 
writers, selected on the basis of student and 
faculty interest. Possible combinations in- 
clude: Frost, Hemingway, and Faulkner; 
O'Connor, Welty, and Porter; Spenser and 
Milton; Hawthorne, Melville, and Dickens; 
Woolf, Forster, and Lawrence; Joyce and 
Yeats. May be repeated for credit if the wri- 
ters are different. Prerequisite: English 106 
or consent of instructor. Alternate years. 



441 TOPICS IN LITERATURE 

Examination of a literary theme, idea, or 
movement as it appears in one or more types 
of literature and as it cuts across various 
epochs. Possible topics include: American 
Novelists and Poets of the Jazz Age and 
Depression; Religion and Literature; Gothic 
Tradition in American Literature; Realism in 
the Novel; Literary Modernism; Literature 
and Mythology; The Hero in Literature. May 
be repeated for credit if the topic is different. 
Prerequisite: English 106 or consent of in- 
structor. Alternate years. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Interns typically work off campus in a pro- 
fession related to their career interest such as 
law, public relations, journalism, and others. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Recent studies include The Arthurian 
Legend, Shakespeare's Women, D.H. 
Lawrence, and T.S. Eliot: The Social Vi- 
sion. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 
Recent projects include The Creative Process 
in Literature and Art and Images of Women 
in the 1890's. 



FOREIGN LANGUAGES 
AND LITERATURES 



Associate Professors: Maples, 

MacKenzie (Chairperson) 
Part-time Instructor: Yeager 

Study of foreign languages and litera- 
tures offers opportunity to explore broad- 
ly the varieties of human experience and 
thought. It contributes both to personal 
and to international understanding by 
providing competence in a foreign lan- 
guage and a critical acquaintance with 
the literature and culture of foreign peo- 
ples. A major can serve as entree to 
careers in business, industry, govern- 
ment, publishing, education, journal- 
ism, social agencies, translating, and 
writing. It prepares for graduate work in 
literature or linguistics and the interna- 
tional fields of politics, commerce, law, 
health, and area studies. 

French, German, and Spanish are 
offered as major fields of study. The ma- 



40 



jor consists of at least eight courses num- 
bered 111 or above. Majors seeking 
teacher certification and students plan- 
ning to enter graduate school are advised 
to begin study of a second foreign lan- 
guage. The department encourages the 
development in breadth of programs, in- 
cluding allied courses from related fields 
or a second major, and also individual 
or established interdisciplinary majors 
combining interest in several literatures 
or area or cross-cultural studies; for ex- 
ample. International Studies, 20th Cen- 
tury Studies, the Major in Literature. 
Majors, teacher certification candidates, 
and all students are encouraged to spend 
at least a semester of study abroad by 
applying to one of the many programs 
available. The department maintains a 
file of such programs. 

Courses taught in English: Foreign 
Languages and Literatures 225, French 
228 (Section A) and Spanish 331 (Sec- 
tion A). 

Foreign Languages and Literatures 

225 CONTINENTAL LITERATURE 

A study of such major continental authors 
as Cervantes, Dostoevsky, Chekhov, Dante, 
Ibsen, Proust, Gide. Kafka. Hesse, Goethe, 
Sartre, Camus, Brecht, and lonesco. Works 
read in English translation will vary and be 
organized around a different theme or topic; 
recent topics have been existentialism, mod- 
ernism, drama, the Weimar era, and 20th 
century Scandinavian and German prose 
writers. Prerequisite: None. May be repealed 
for credit with consent of instructor. May be 
accepted toward the English major with 
consent of the Department of English. 

338 FOREIGN LANGUAGE: 
SYSTEMS AND PROCESS 
Study of basic linguistic concepts as a tool 
for language learning and teaching. Discus- 
sion and application of languge teaching 
techniques, including work in the language 
laboratory. Designed for future teachers of 
one or more languages and normally taken in 
the junior year. Students should arrange 
through the Department of Education to ful- 
fill in the same semester the requirements of 
a participation experience in area schools. 
Prerequisite: consent of instructor. 

French 

A major consists of a minimum of 
eight courses numbered 111 or above, 
including at least two from 402, 412, 



423, and 427. In addition, all majors who 
wish to be certified for teaching must 
pass courses 221-222, and Foreign Lan- 
guages and Literatures 338 (the latter 
course with a C or better). 

A minor in French consists of at least 
four courses numbered 221 and above. 
Courses 111 and 112 may be counted 
toward the minor, but then the minor 
must consist of at least five courses, three 
of which must be numbered 200 and 
above. 



101-102 ELEMENTARY FRENCH 

The aim of the course is to acquire the fun- 
damentals of the language with a view to 
using them. Regular practice in speaking, 
understanding, and reading. 

111-112 INTERMEDIATE FRENCH 

Review and development of the fun- 
damentals of the language for immediate use 
in speaking, understanding, and reading with 
a view to building confidence in self- 
expression. Prerequisite: French 102 or 
equivalent. 

221-222 FRENCH L.^NGUAGE PRACTICE 
Further training in speaking, listening com- 
prehension, reading, and writing. Includes 
extensive work in grammar. Prerequisite: 
French 112 or equivalent. 

228 MODERN FRANCE 

A course designed to familiarize students 
with political and social structures and cultu- 
ral attitudes in contemporary French society. 
Materials studied may include such docu- 
ments as newspaper articles, interviews and 
sociological surveys, and readings in his- 
tory, religion, anthropology, and the arts. 
Some attention to the changing education 
system and the family and to events and ideas 
which have shaped French society. May in- 
clude some comparative study of France and 
the United States. 

English Section: Not applicable toward 
satisfying the foreign language distribution 
requirement. Prerequisite: none. 

French Section: Offers readings, papers, 
and interviews in French for students with 
sufficient language skill. Can be applied to- 
ward the foreign language distribution re- 
quirement. Prerequisite: French 221 or con- 
sent of instructor. 

402 FRENCH LITERATURE TO 1800 

Major authors and movements from the 
Medieval, Renaissance, Classical and En- 
lightenment periods. Includes the chanson 
de geste, Villon, Montaigne, Corneille, 
Racine, Moliere, Voltaire and Rousseau. 



Prerequisite: French 222 or 228 or consent 
of instructor. Alternate years. 

412 FRENCH LITERATURE OF 
THE 19TH CENTURY 
The dimensions of the Romantic sensibility: 
Musset, Hugo, Vigny, Balzac, Stendhal 
Realism and Naturalism in the novels of 
Flaubert and Zola. Reaction in the poetry of 
Baudelaire. Rimbaud, Verlaine, and Mal- 
larme. Prerequisite: French 222 or 228 or 
consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

423 MODERN FRENCH THEATRE 

Major trends in French drama from the turn 
of the century to Existentialism and the 
Theatre of the .Absurd, Giraudoux, Anouilh, 
Sartre, Camus, Beckett. lonesco. Genet. 
Adamov, and others. Prerequisite: French 
222 or 228 or consent of instructor. 

All FRENCH LITERATURE OF 
THE 20TH CENTURY 
Representative poets and novelists of mod- 
em France. Readings selected from the 
works of authors such as Proust. Gide, Ara- 
gon, Giono, Mauriac. Celine. Malraux. 
Saint-Exupery, Camus, the "new novelists" 
(Robbe-Grillet. Butor. Sarraute. Le Clezio), 
and the poetry of Apollinaire, Valery. the 
Surrealists (Breton, Reverdy, Eluard, Char), 
Saint-John Perse, Supervielle, Prevert, and 
others. Some attention to works of French- 
speaking African writers. Prerequisite: 
French 222 or 228 or consent of instructor. 
Alternate years. 

441 ADVANCED LANGUAGE PRACTICE 
Intensive practice for advanced students who 
wish to improve further their spoken and 
written French. Includes work in oral com- 
prehension, phonetics, pronunciation, oral 
and written composition, and translation. 
Prerequisite: one course from French 402. 
412. 423, 427 or consent of instructor . 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index! 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Examples of recent studies in French include 
translation, existentialism, the classical 
period, enlightenment literature, and Saint- 
Exupery. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 



German 

A major consists of a minimum of 
eight courses numbered 1 1 1 or above. 
One unit of Foreign Languages and 
Literatures 225 may be included in the 



major with permission. German 431 or 
German 441 is required of all majors. 

All majors who wish to be certified for 
teaching must pass German 323 and 325. 
In addition to the eight courses for the 
major they must also pass Foreign Lan- 
guages and Literatures 338 with a grade 
of C or better. All majors are urged to 
enroll in History 416. Music 336, Poli- 
tical Science 220 and Theatre 335. 

A minor in German consists of at least 
four courses numbered 200 and above. 
Courses 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 may be counted 
toward the minor, but then the minor 
must consist of at least five courses, three 
of which must be numbered 200 and 
above. 

101-102 ELEMENTARY GERMAN 

Aim of course is to acquire the fundamentals 
of the language with a view to using them. 
Regular practice in speaking, understanding, 
and reading. 

111-112 INTERMEDIATE GERMAN 

Review and development of fundamentals of 
the language for immediate use in speaking, 
understanding, and reading with a view to 
building confidence in self-expression. Pre- 
requisite: German 102 or equivalent. 

221-222 COMPREHENSIVE REVIEW AND 
LANGUAGE PRACTICE 
A two-semester course designed to review 
and develop skills in speaking, listening, 
writing and reading. Grammar and vocabul- 
ary building are stressed with intensive re- 
view, writing practice and some reading on 
contemporary issues m German-speaking 
countries. As the course progresses, greater 
emphasis is placed on speaking, listening 
comprehension, and translation Some atten- 
tion is given to the development of the lan- 
guage and its relationship to English. Prere- 
quisite: German 112 or equivalent. 

323 SURVEY OF GERMAN LITERATURE 
AND CIVILIZATION I 
Designed to acquaint the student with impor- 
tant periods of German literature, representa- 
tive authors, and major cultural develop- 
ments in Germany. Austria, and Switzer- 
land. The-course deals with literature and 
culture from the Eiarly Middle Ages through 
the 18th century. Prerequisite: German 222 
or consetu of instructor. 

325 SURVEY OF GERMAN LITERATURE 
AND CIVILIZATION II 
Designed to acquaint the student with impor- 
tant periods of German literature, representa- 
tive authors, and major cultural develop- 



ments in Germany. Austria, and Switzer- 
land. The course deals with literature and 
culture from the 19th century to the present. 
Prerequisite: German 222 or consent of in- 
structor. 

411 THENOVELLE 

The German Novelle as a genre relating to 
various literary periods. Prerequisite: Ger- 
man 323 or 325 or consent of instructor. 

421 GERMAN POETRY 

A study of selected poets or the poetry of 
various literary periods. Possible topics in- 
clude; Romantic poetry, Heine. Rilke, and 
Benn. Prerequisite: German 323 or 325 or 
consent of instructor. 

431 GOETHE 

A study of the life and works of Goethe. 
Goethe's significance in the Classical penod 
and later. Readings in the major works. Pre- 
requisite: German 323 or 325 or consent of 
instructor. 

433 CLASSICAL GERMAN DRAMA 

The development of das klassische Drama 
with emphasis on works of Lessing, Goethe, 
KJeist, and Schiller. Prerequisite: German 
323 or 325 or consent of instructor. 

441 CONTEMPORARY GERMAN 
LITERATURE 

Representative poets, novelists and dramat- 
ists of contemporary Germany, Switzerland 
and Austria covering the period from 1945 to 
the present. Readings selected from writers 
such as: Borchert, Boll, Brecht, Benn, 
Frisch, Diirrenmatt, Bichsel. Handke, 
Walser, Grass and others. Prerequisite: Ger- 
man 323 or 325 or consent of instructor. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index) 

Examples of recent studies in German in- 
clude Classicism. Germanic Mythology, 
Hermann Hesse, the dramas of Frisch, and 
Diirrenmatt. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 

Greek 

Greek is not offered as a major. An 
interdisciplinary minor in Biblical Lan- 
guages requires the completion of Greek 
221. 222 and Hebrew 221 and 222. 

101-102 NEW TESTAMENT GRAMMAR 
AND READINGS 
Fundamentals of New Testament Greek 



grammar and readings of selected passages 
of the Greek text. Alternate years. 

221 READINGS IN THE 
SYNOPTIC GOSPELS 

A comparative study of the synoptic tradition 
in Greek. Prerequisite: Greek 102 or equiva- 
lent. Alterruite years. 

222 READINGS IN THE 
PAULINE EPISTLES 

Selected readings from the letters of Paul in 
Greek. Prerequisite: Greek 221 or equiva- 
lent. Alternate years. 

Hebrew 

Hebrew is not offered as a major. An 
interdisciplinary minor in Biblical Lan- 
guages requires the completion of Greek 
221, 222 and Hebrew 221 and 222. 

101-102 OLD TESTAMENT GRAMMAR 
AND READINGS 
Fundamentals of Old Testament Hebrew 
grammar and readings of selected passages 
of the Hebrew text. Alternate years. 

221 READINGS IN OLD 
TESTAMENT NARRATIVE 

A critical reading of the Hebrew text of 
selected narrative portions of the Old Testa- 
ment with special attention being given to 
exegetical questions. The text read varies 
from year to year. Prerequisite: Hebrew 102 
or equivalent. Alternate years. 

222 READINGS IN THE PROPHETIC 
BOOKS AND WISDOM LITERATURE 

A critical reading of the Hebrew text of 
selected portions of Old Testament prophecy 
and wisdom literature with special attention 
being given to exegetical questions. The text 
read varies from year to year. Prerequisite: 
Hebrew 221 or equivalent. Alternate years. 

Spanish 

A major consists of eight courses num- 
bered 1 1 1 or above. Foreign Languages 
and Literatures 338 does not count to- 
ward the major. 

All majors who wish to be certified for 
teaching in secondary school must pass 
Foreign Languages and Literatures 338 
(grade of C or better) and Spanish 418. 

A minor in Spanish consists of at least 
four courses numbered 200 and above. 
Courses 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 may be counted 
toward the minor, but then the minor 
must consist of at least five courses, three 
of which must be numbered 200 and 
above. 



42 



101-102 ELEMENTARY SPANISH 

Aim of course is to acquire the fundamentals 
of the language with a view to using them. 
Regular practice in speaking, understanding, 
and reading. 

111-112 INTERMEDIATE SPANISH 

Review and development of fundamentals of 
the language for immediate use in speaking, 
understanding, reading and writing with a 
view to building confidence in self- 
expression. Usually the student chooses 
from among the following areas for their 
work in building vocabulary and fluency: 
Spanish for Business and Economics, Span- 
ish for Social Services, Spanish for Law En- 
forcement, Spanish for Health Care Profes- 
sionals, or, for the student who does not plan 
to use the language for one of these specific 
career goals. Spanish for Communication. 
Prerequisite: Spanish 102 or equivalent. 

221-222 COMPREHENSIVE REVIEW AND 
LANGUAGE PRACTICE 
This course consists of a thorough review of 
grammar, drills for oral comprehension and 
expression, discussion of readings and the 
writing of compositions. It is designed to 
develop the smdent's ability to read, write 
and converse in Spanish with confidence. 
Prerequisite: Spanish 112 or equivalent. 

3 1 1 HISPANIC CULTURE 

To introduce students to the Spanish- 
speaking people — their values, customs and 
institutions, with reference to the geographic 
and historical forces governing present-day 
Spain and Spanish America. Prerequisite: 
Spanish 222 or consent of instructor . Alter- 
nate years. 

323 SURVEY OF SPANISH 

LITERATURE AND CIVILIZATION 
Designed to acquaint the student with impor- 
tant periods of Spanish literature, representa- 
tive authors, and major socio-economic de- 
velopments. The course deals with the litera- 
ture from the beginning to the present. Prere- 
quisite: Spanish 222 or consent of instructor . 
Alternate years. 

325 SURVEY OF SPANISH-AMERICAN 
LITERATURE AND CIVILIZATION 
Designed to acquaint the student with impor- 
tant periods of Spanish- American literature, 
representative authors, and major socio- 
economic developments. The course deals 
with the literature, especially the essay and 
poetry, from the 16th century to the present. 
Prerequisite: Spanish 222 or consent of in- 
structor. Alternate years. 

418 ADVANCED LANGUAGE PRACTICE 
Intensive practice for advanced students who 
wish to improve further their spoken and 



written Spanish. Includes work in oral com- 
prehension, pronunciation, oral and written 
composition, and translation. Prerequisite: 
One Spanish course at the 300' s level or 
consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

424 SPANISH LITERATURE OF 
THE GOLDEN AGE 

A study of representative works and princip- 
al literary figures in the poetry, prose, and 
drama of the 16th and 1 7th cenmries. Prere- 
quisite: Spanish 323, 325, or consent of in- 
structor. 

426 MODERN HISPANIC LITERATURE 

Readings of important works of drama, poet- 
ry, and prose from the major periods of 19th 
and 20th century Spanish and Latin- 
American literaWre. Prerequisite: Spanish 
323. 325. or consent of instructor. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Recent smdies include literary, linguistic, 
and cultural topics and themes such as urban 
problems as reflected in the modem novel. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 



HISTORY 



Professors: Larson, Piper (Chairperson) 
Associate Professor; Morris 

A major consists of 10 courses, in- 
cluding 110, 111, and 449, At least 
seven courses must be taken in the de- 
partment. The following courses may be 
counted toward fulfilling the major re- 
quirements: American Studies 200, Poli- 
tical Science 439, Religion 226 and 228. 
Other appropriate courses outside the de- 
partment may be counted upon depart- 
mental approval. For history majors who 
student teach in history, the major con- 
sists of nine courses. In addition to the 
courses listed below, special courses, in- 
dependent study, and honors are avail- 
able. Special courses recently taught and 
anticipated include a biographical study 
of European Monarchs, the European 
Left, the Industrialization and Urbaniza- 
tion of Modem Europe, Utopian Move- 
ments in America, the Peace Movement 
in America, The Vietnam War, and 



American Legal History. History majors 
are encouraged to participate in the in- 
ternship program. 

Three minors are offered by the De- 
partment of History. The following 
courses are required to complete a minor 
in American History: History 125, 126. 
and three courses in American history 
numbered 200 and above. A minor in 
European History requires the comple- 
tion of History 110, 111, and three 
courses in European history numbered 
200 and above. To obtain a minor in 
History (without national or geographic 
designation), a student must complete 
six courses in history, of which three 
must be chosen from History 110, 111, 
125 and 126 and three must be history 
courses numbered 200 and above. 



105 SELECTED THEMES IN 
WESTERN CIVILIZATION 
A survey of the political, economic, social, 
and cultural values and institutions in West- 
em Civilization from the time of classical 
Greece to the present. One-half unit of cre- 
dit. (Not open to students who have had His- 
tory no and nil 

110 EUROPE 1500-1815 

An examination of the political, social, 
cultural, and intellectual history of Europe 
and its relations with other areas of the world 
from 1500 to 1815. 

111 EUROPE 1815-PTesent 

An examination of the political, social, 
cultural, and intellectual history of Europe 
and its relations with other areas of the world 
from 1815 to the present. 

120 LATIN AMERICAN HISTORY 

An examination of the native civilization, the 
age of discovery and conquest. Spanish colo- 
nial policy, the independence movements, 
and the development of modem institutions 
and governments in Latin America. Alter- 
nate years. 

125 UNITED STATES HISTORY 1607-1877 
A study of the men, measures, and move- 
ments which have been significant in the 
development of the United States between 
1607 and 1 877. Attention is paid to the prob- 
lems of minority groups as well as to major- 
ity and national influences. 

126 UNITED STATES HISTORY 

1877-Present 

A study of men. measures, and movements 

which have been significant in the develop- 



43 



mem of the United States since 1877. Atten- 
tion is paid to the problems of minority 
groups as well as to majority and national 
influences. 

210 ANCIENT HISTORY 

A study of the ancient western world . includ- 
ing the foundations of the western tradition in 
Greece, the emergence and expansion of the 
Roman state, its experience as a republic, 
and its transformation into the Empire. The 
course will focus on the social and intellec- 
tual life of Greece and Rome as well as poli- 
tical and economic changes. Alternate vears. 

212 MEDIEVAL EUROPE AND 
ITS NEIGHBORS 

The history of Europe from the dissolution of 
the Roman Empire to the mid- 1 5th century. 
The course will deal with the growing 
estrangement of western Catholic Europe 
from the Byzantium and Islam, culminating 
in the Crusades; the rise of the Islamic 
Empire and its later fragmentation; the de- 
velopment and growth of feudalism; the con- 
flict of empire and papacy, and the rise of the 
towns. Alternate years. 

216 FRENCH REVOLUTION 
AND NAPOLEON 

An analysis of the political, social, and intel- 
lectual background of the French Revolu- 
tion, a survey of the course of revolutionary 
development, and an estimate of the results 
of the Napoleonic conquests and administra- 
tion. Prerequisite: History 1 10 or consent of 
instructor. Alternate years. 

218 EUROPE IN THE ERA OF 
THE WORLD WARS 

An intensive study of the political, econo- 
mic, social, and cultural history of Europe 
from 1900-1945. Topics include the rise of 
irrationalism. the origins of the First World 
War. the Communist and Fascist Revolu- 
tions, and the attempts to preserve peace 
before 1939. Prerequisite: History 111 or 
consent of instructor. 

219 CONTEMPORARY EUROPE 

An intensive study of the political, econo- 
mic, social, and cultural history of Europe 
since 1945. Topics include the post-war eco- 
nomic recovery of Europe, the Sovietization 
of Eastern Europe, the origins of the Cold 
War, decolonization, and the flowering of 
the welfare state. Prerequisite: History 111 
or consent of instructor. 

222 HISTORY OF WORLD WAR II 

A comprehensive examination of World War 
II emphasizing the effect of ideological, eco- 
nomic, and political forces on the formula- 
tion of military strategy and the conduct of 
operation; the nature and extent of the expan- 



sion of government powers; and the experi- 
ence of war from the perspective of ordinary 
civilians and military alike. Does not count 
toward distribution. 

226 COLONIAL AMERICA AND 
THE REVOLUTIONARY ERA 
The establishment of British settlements on 
the American continent, their history as col- 
onies, the causes and events of the American 
Revolution, the critical period following in- 
dependence, and proposal and adoption of 
the United States Constitution. Alternate 
years. 

230 AFRO-AMERICAN HISTORY 

A study of the experiences and participation 
of Afro-Americans in the United States. The 
course includes historical experiences such 
as slavery, abolition, reconstruction, and 
urbanization. It also raises the issue of the 
development and growth of white racism, 
and the effect of this racism on contemporary 
Afro-American social, intellectual, and poli- 
tical life. Alternate years. 

244 20TH CENTURY UNITED STATES 

This course begins with the Progressive Era 
and includes the political, economic, and 
social developments in the 20th century. 
Emphasis will be placed on the domestic and 
international demands which have faced the 
United States in the period following World 
War II. 

310 WOMEN IN HISTORY 

An examination of the social, political, eco- 
nomic and intellectual experience of women 
in the Western World from ancient times to 
the present. May be taken for either one-half 
unit (section 310A) or full unit (section 
3I0B); declared majors and prospective ma- 
jors should take the full-unit course, 310B. 

316 CONFLICT IN 

WESTERN CIVILIZATION 

An in-depth study of the changing nature of 
war and its relationship to the development 
of Western Civilization since the end of the 
Middle Ages. Particular emphasis will be 
placed on the role of war in the development 
of the modem nation state and the origins and 
nature of total war. Alternate years. 

320 DIPLOMATIC HISTORY OF 
EUROPE SINCE 1789 
A survey of the development of the Euro- 
pean-states system and the relations between 
the European states since the beginning of 
the French Revolution. Prerequisite: History 
111 or consent of instructor. A Iternale years. 

322 THE CRISIS OF LIBERALISM AND 
NATIONALISM, EUROPE 1848-1870 
An in-depth investigation of the crucial 



"Middle Years" of 19th century Europe from 
the revolutions of 1848 through the unifica- 
tion of Germany. The course centers on the 
struggles for power within the major states of 
Europe at this time, and how the vehicle of 
nationalism was used to bring about one type 
of solution. Alternate years. 

328 AGE OF JEFFERSON AND JACKSON 
The theme of the course is the emergence of 
the political and social characteristics that 
shaped modem America. The personalities 
of Thomas Jefferson, John Marshall, John 
Randolph, Aaron Burr, and Andrew Jackson 
receive special attention. Special considera- 
tion is given to the first and second party 
systems, the decline in community cohesive- 
ness, the westward movement, and the grow- 
ing importance of the family as a unit of 
social organization. Alternate years. 

332 CIVIL WAR AND RECONSTRUCTION 
The problems and events leading to war, the 
political and military history of the war, and 
the bitter aftermath to the Compromise of 
1877. 

340 20TH CENTURY 

UNITED STATES RELIGION 
The study of historical and cultural develop- 
ments in American society which relate to 
religion or what is commonly called religion. 
This involves consideration of the institu- 
tional and intellectual development of sever- 
al faith groups as well as discussion of certain 
problems, such as the persistence of religious 
bigotry and the changing modes of church- 
state relationships. Alternate years. 

416 HISTORY OF 

REFORMATION THOUGHT 

A study of the ideas and systems of ideas 
propounded prior to the Reformation, but 
which are historically related to its inception, 
and of the ideas and systems of ideas in- 
volved in the formulation of the major Re- 
formation Protestant traditions, and in the 
Catholic Reformation. Included are the ideas 
of the humanists of the Reformation Era. 
Alternate years. 

418 HISTORY OF 

RENAISSANCE THOUGHT 
A smdy of the classical, humanist, and scho- 
lastic elements involved in the development 
of the Renaissance outlook on views and 
values, both in Italy and in Northem Europe. 
The various combinations of social and poli- 
tical circumstances which constitute the his- 
torical context of these intellectual develop- 
ments will be noted. Alternate years. 

442 UNITED STATES SOCIAL AND 

INTELLECTUAL HISTORY TO 1877 
A study of the social and intellectual experi- 
ence of the United States from its colonial 



44 



antecedents through reconstruction. Among 
the topics considered are Puritanism, trans- 
cendentahsm. community life and organiza- 
tion, education, and social-reform move- 
ments. Prerequisites: m'o courses from His- 
tory 125. 126. 230. or consent of instructor. 

443 UNITED STATES SOCIAL AND 

INTELLECTUAL HISTORY SINCE 1877 
A study of the social and intellectual experi- 
ence of the United States from reconstruction 
to the present day. Among the topics consi- 
dered are social Darwinism, pragmatism, 
community life and organization, education 
and social reform movements. Prere- 
quisites: nm courses from History- 125. 126. 
230. or consent of instructor. 

449 HISTORICAL METHODS 

This course focuses on the nature and mean- 
ing of history. It will open to the student 
different historical approaches and will pro- 
vide the opportunity to explore these 
approaches in terms of particular topics and 
periods. Majors are required to enroll in this 
course in either their junior or senior year. 
The course is open to other students who 
have two courses in history or consent of 
instructor. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Typically, history interns work for local gov- 
ernment agencies engaged in historical pro- 
jects or for the Lycoming County Historical 
Museum. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Recent topics include studies of the immigra- 
tion of American blacks, political dissension 
in the Weimer Republic. Indian relations be- 
fore the American Revolution, and the his- 
tory of Lycoming County. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index) 



INTERNATIONAL STUDIES 

Professor: Larson 
(Coordinator) 

The major is designed to integrate an 
understanding of the changing social, 
political, and historical environment of 
Europe today with study of Europe in its 
relations to the rest of the world, particu- 
larly the United States. It stresses the 
international relations of the North 



Atlantic community and offers the stu- 
dent opportunity to emphasize either 
European studies or international rela- 
tions. The program provides multiple 
perspectives on the cultural traits that 
shape popular attitudes and institutions. 
Study of a single country is included as a 
data-base for comparisons, and study of 
its language, as a basis for direct com- 
munication with its people. 

The program is intended to prepare a 
student either for graduate study or for 
careers which have an international com- 
ponent. International obligations are in- 
creasingly assumed by government 
agencies and a wide range of business, 
social, religious, and educational orga- 
nizations. Opportunities are found in the 
fields of journalism, publishing, com- 
munications, trade, banking, advertis- 
ing, management, and tourism. The 
program also offers flexible career pre- 
paration in a variety of essential skills, 
such as research, data analysis, report 
writing, languge skills, and the aware- 
ness necessary for dealing with people 
and institutions of another culture. Pre- 
paration for related careers can be 
obtained through the guided selection of 
courses outside the major in the areas of 
business, economics, foreign languages 
and literatures, government, history, and 
international relations or through a 
second major. Students should design 
their programs in consultation with 
members of the Committee on Interna- 
tional Studies. 

By completing six to eight additional 
courses in the social sciences (which in- 
clude those courses needed to complete a 
major in economics, history, political 
science, or sociology/anthropology) and 
the required program in eduction, stu- 
dents can be certified for the teacher 
education program in social studies. By 
completing a major in the foreign lan- 
guage (five or more courses) and the 
education program, students can be certi- 
fied to teach that language. The Interna- 
tional Studies program also encourages 
participation in study-abroad programs, 
as well as the Washington and United 
Nations semesters. 

The major includes 1 1 courses 
selected as follows; 



International Relations Courses — 

Four or two courses (if two, then four 
must be taken from Area Courses). 
Courses within this group are designed to 
provide a basic understanding of the in- 
ternational system and of Europe's rela- 
tions with the rest of the world. Political 
Science 225 is required. 

Political Science 225: World Politics 
Economics 443: International Trade 
History 320: European Diplomatic History 
Political Science 439; American Foreign 
Policy 

Area Courses — Four or two courses (if 
two, then four must be taken from Inter- 
national Relations Courses). Courses 
within this group are designed to provide 
a basic understanding of the European 
political, social, and economic environ- 
ment. History 111 and Economics 221 
are required. 

History III: Europe 1815-Present 
Economics 221: Comparative Economic 

Systems 
Political Science 220: European Politics 
History 218: Europe in the Era of the 

World Wars 
History 219: Contemporary Europe 



National Courses 

Language — Two courses in one lan- 
guage. 

French 221. plus one course numbered 222 or 

above (except 228) 

German 221, plus one course numbered 222 or 

above 

Spanish 221. plus one course numbered 222 or 

above (except 311) 

Country — One course. The student 
must select, according to his or her lan- 
guage preparation, one European coun- 
try which will serve as a special interest 
area throughout the program. The coun- 
try selected will serve as the base for 
individual projects in the major courses 
wherever possible. 

France — French 228: Modem France 
Germany — History N80: Topics in German 

History 
Spain — Spanish 311: Hispanic Culture 



45 



Elective Course — One course which 
should involve further study of some 
aspect of the program. Appropriate 
courses are any area or international rela- 
tions courses not yet taken. History 1 10, 
316; Economics 226; Political Science 
326, 327, 438; related foreign-literature 
courses counting toward the fine-arts re- 
quirement and internships. 

Senior Seminar 

449 SENIOR SEMINAR 

A one-semester seminar, taken in the senior 
year, in which students and several faculty 
members will pursue an integrative topic in 
the field of international studies. Students 
will work to some extent independently. 
Guest speakers will be invited. The seminar 
will be open to qualified persons from out- 
side the major and the College. Prerequisite: 
consent of instructor. 



LITERATURE 

Associate Professor: Maples 
(Coordinator) 

This major recognizes literature as a 
distinct discipline beyond national 
boundaries and combines the study of 
any two literatures in the areas of En- 
glish, French, German, and Spanish. 
Students can thus explore two literatures 
widely and intensively at the upper levels 
of course offerings within each of the 
respective departments while developing 
and applying skills in foreign languages. 
The major prepares students for graduate 
study in either of the two literatures stu- 
died or in comparative literature. 

The major requires at least six litera- 
ture courses, equally divided between 
the two literatures concerned. The six 
must be at the advanced level as deter- 
mined in consultation with advisors (nor- 
mally courses numbered 2(X) and above 
in English and 400 and above in foreign 
languges). In general, two of the adv- 
anced courses in each literature should be 
period courses. The third course, taken 
either as a regular course or an indepen- 
dent study, may have as its subject 
another period, a particular author, 
genre, or literary theme, or some other 



unifying approach or idea. Beyond these 
six, the major must include at least two 
additional courses from among those 
counting toward a major in the depart- 
ments involved. Any prerequisite 
courses in the respective departments 
(for example: English 106, French 221- 
222 or 228, German 221-222, Spanish 
221-222) should be taken during the 
freshman year. Students should design 
their programs in consultation with a 
faculty member from each of the litera- 
tures concerned. Programs for the major 
must be approved by the departments 
involved. 



MASS COMMUNICATION 

Assistant Professor: Nason 

(Chairperson), Wild 
Part-time Instructor: Smith 

The interdisciplinary major in Mass 
Communication recognizes the need for 
a liberal arts foundation and requires 
selected courses from the Departments 
of Art, Business, Administration, 
Political Science, Psychology, and 
Sociology/Anthropology. The major 
combines a core of Mass Communi- 
cation courses with one of three pro- 
fessional tracks: Advertising/Public 
Relations, Broadcast Journalism, and 
Journalism. Emphasis is placed on 
developing an understanding of the 
cultural and historical roles of the mass 
media and on developing the communi- 
cative skills necessary for careers in the 
media. 

Students majoring in Mass Com- 
munication must complete the Core Cur- 
riculum and one professional track. Each 
track requires a combination of theory, 
production, and writing courses. 

A minor in Mass Communication 
consists of Mass Communication 110, 
211, 215, and three of the following 
courses: Mass Communication 224, 329, 
330, 331, 470. 

I. THE CORE CURRICULUM 

REQUIRED OF ALL STUDENTS 
Mass Comm 215 Introduction to 

Media Writing 



Mass Comm I 10 
Mass Comm 21 1 
Mass Comm TtiO 
Mass Comm 331 
Pol Sci 448 



Mass Comm 247. 248. 249 
(one credit each) 



Introduction to 

Mass Communication 

Fundamentals ol 

Oral Communication 

Theories and Issues 

in Mass Communication 

Mass Media Law 

and Regulation 

Public Opinion 

and Polling* 

Practicum in 



Mass Communication 



*Business445 (Marketing Research). Psychol- 
ogy 224 (Social Psychology) or Sociology 447 
(Research Methods in Sociology) may be sub- 
stituted. These courses require departmental 
prerequisites or consent of individual instruc- 
tors. 

Students must complete the require- 
ments of one of the following profession- 
al tracks: 

Track I — Advertising/Public Relations 

Business 228 Marketing Management I 

Business 332 Advertising 

Mass Comm 325 Writing for 

Business and 

Public Relations 

One of the following writing courses: 
Mass Comm 323 Writing for 

Special Audiences 
Mass Comm 327 Print Journalism 

Mass Comm 329 Broadcast Journalism 

Two of the following production courses: 
Art 115 Two-Dimensional Design 

Art 227 Introduction to Photography 

GCO 5 1 1 Layout and Design ( WACC) 
Mass Comm 218 Radio Programming 

and Production 
Mass Comm 224 Television Production 

Track II — Journalism 

Art 227 Introduction to Photography 

Mass Comm 327 Print Journalism 

GCO 5 1 1 Layout and Design (WACC) 
Pol Sci III State and Local Government 

One of the following additional writing 

courses: 

Mass Comm 329 Broadcast Journalism 

Pol Sci 434 Political Newswriting 

One of the following courses: 
History 126 United States History, 

1877-present 
Philosophy 1 1 5 Philosophy and 

Public Policy 
Sociology 227 Social Problems* 

Sociology 334 Racial and 

Cultural Minorities* 
*Requires prerequisite or consent of in- 
structor 



46 



Track III — Broadcast Journalism 

Mass Comm 218 Radio Programing 

and Production 
Mass Comm 224 Television Production 
Mass Comm 329 Broadcast Journalism 
Pol Sci 1 1 1 State and Local Government 
Pol Sci 434 Political Newswriting 

One of the following courses; 
History 126 United States History. 

1877-present 
Philosophy 115 Philosophy and 

Public Policy 
Sociology 227 Social Problems* 

Sociology 334 Racial and 

Cultural Minorities* 
*Requires a prerequisite or consent of in- 
structor 

1 10 INTRODUCTION TO 

MASS COMMUNICATION 
Theories of the process of mass communica- 
tion and introduction to the mass media; 
attention will be given to problems of cen- 
sorship and media ethics. Analysis of the 
mass media's impact on society; emphasis 
will be placed on the social, psychological, 
and political implications of the media's 
shaping influence on man and institutions. 

211 FUNDAMENTALS OF 

ORAL COMMUNICATION 
The dynamics of oral communication. The 
development of elementary principles of 
simple oral communication through lectures, 
prepared assignments in speaking, and infor- 
mal class exercises. Utilizes video-tape 
sequences for feedback to students. 

215 INTRODUCTION TO MEDIA 
WRITING 

Analysis of and practice in the basic forms of 
media writing: the elements of lead, style and 
structure. Frequent workshop sessions for 
detailed critiques and discussion of student 
writing. Prerequisites: A grade ofC or better 
in English 106 or consent of the instructor. 

218 RADIO PROGRAMMING 
AND PRODUCTION 
Contemporary broadcast programming tech- 
niques including station scheduling, prog- 
ram development and analysis, and imple- 
mentation in real and hypothetical situations. 
Emphasis on management functions. 

224 TELEVISION PRODUCTION 

Technical, aesthetic, organizational, and 
business aspects of video programs. Study 
and use of basic equipment to produce stan- 
dard formats on videotape 

226 LITERATURE, HLM AND TELEVISION 
The relationship between the conventions 
of literature, film and television with 
emphasis on examination of representative 
works. Media comparison to reveal the 



problems of adaptation. Prerequisite: 
English 106 or consent of instructor. 

247-249 PRACTICUM IN 

MASS COMMUNICATION 
Utilization of mass communication princi- 
ples, techniques and skills in an applied 
setting through work experience, primarily 
with campus media. Students will write, 
produce and report news for print (Mass 
Comm 247), radio (Mass Comm 248) and 
television (Mass Comm 249) outlets. One- 
hour credit. P/F grade. One may be 
repeated once for credit. Limit of one hour 
credit per semester. Prerequisite: Consent 
of the instructor. 

323 WRITING FOR SPECIAL AUDIENCES 

Intensive practice in writing with a purpose 
and in presenting information related to 
the student's interests to different kinds of 
audiences. Includes training in the use of 
graphics and in library research applicable 
to defined topics and audiences. Designed 
for Mass Communication students but 
open to others. Prerequisite: a grade ofC 
or better in Mass Communication 215 or 
consent of instructor. 

325 WRITING FOR BUSINESS AND 
PUBLIC RELATIONS 
Analyzing media and audiences for public 
relations and business purposes; planning, 
designing, and writing business reports and 
procedures; press relations and publicity 
methods; the news feature and publicity 
release. Includes training in library research 
related to business communications and 
public relations. Prerequisite: a grade of 
C or belter in Mass Communication 215 
or consent of instructor. 

327 PRINT JOURNALISM 

Techniques in reporting news and trends at 
the local, regional, and county levels; 
emphasis on writing the longer news and 
feature article, the editorial, and the investi- 
gative news story. Prcreijiiisiie: A finulc nt 
C or heller in Muss Commimicoiion 215 or 
cimscnl of the inslriulor. 

329 BROADCAST JOURNALISM 

Study of, and practical experience in, the 
newsgathering process for electronic media. 
Emphasis on covering the local story from 
the small-station perspective. Students in 
the course are responsible for writing, pro- 
ducing, editing and broadcasting newscasts 
for WRLC-FM. The course also looks at 
the special ethical problems of electronic 
news coverage. Prerequisites: Mass Com- 
munication 215 and Mass Communication 
218 or consent of instructor. 

3.30 THEORIES AND ISSUES IN 
MASS COMMUNICATION 

An analysis of current theories dealing with 



mass communication systems and the 
behavior and attitudes of, and effects on, 
their audiences. The course also examines 
contemporary mass media issues with an 
emphasis on developing critical thinking 
skills. Prerequisites: Mass Communication 
110. 

331 MASS MEDIA LAW 
AND REGULATION 

An examination of the legal structure and 
ihe system by which mass conimunication is 
controlled in this society. The torces which 
shape, inlluence. and make policy will be 
considered- Cro\.\-h\leil tt.\ Political Sil- 
ence 436. Prerequisite: iioiior or .senior 
sltiniliiii; or consent of inMriulor. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Interns usually work off campus in a field 
related to their comniumcation sequence 
Prerequisite: Four semesters ot Muss Coni- 
nuiniciilion Pnuliciim or consent ot the 
tiwlnu lor. 

N80-NX9 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
I See index) 
Studies involve research related to the com- 
munication sequence of the student. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index) 



Graphic Arts 

Through special arrangements, the 
following course offered at the Williams- 
port Area Community College is avail- 
able only to students in the Mass Com- 
munication major and in the Art Track III 
major in Commercial Design. The 
WACC course is taken as part of the 
student's schedule and is listed with 
Lycoming offerings during registration 
periods. 

511 LAYOUT AND DESIGN 

Analysis of materials, tools, and techniques 
used in preparation of copy for reproduction; 
paste-up and color separation overlays. 3 
credit hours. 



MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES 

Associate Professors: Haley, Sprechini 
Assistant Professors: Bucki, deSilva, 

Golshan, Weida, Yan 
Part-time Instructor: Davis 



47 



The Department of Mathematical Sci- 
ences offers major programs in computer 
science and mathematics. 

Computer Science 

A major in computer science consists 
of 11 courses: Mathematics 116, 128, 
and 129. and Computer Science 125, 
246, 247, 321, 344, 445, and two other 
computer science courses numbered 320 
or above. Recommended extradepart- 
mental courses: Physics 229. Philosophy 
225, and Psychology 337. In addition to 
the regular courses listed below, special 
courses are occasionally available. 

A minor in computer science consists 
of Computer Science 246, 247, and 
two other computer science courses 
numbered 220 or above. 

108 MATHEMATICAL PROBLEM SOLVING 
WITH MICROCOMPUTERS 

An introduction to the use of microcomputer- 
based, integrated software in solving prob- 
lems from mathematics and related areas. 
Included are uses of spreadsheet, data-base 
and graphics functions to analyze, solve, and 
display solutions to problems from the areas 
of number theory, algebra, geometry, statis- 
tics, and the mathematics of business and 
finance. Emphasis is given to the processes 
involved in mathematical modeling. Labora- 
tory experience is included using current 
software. Prerequisite: Credit for or exemp- 
tion from Mathematics 005. 

125 INTRODUCTION TO 
COMPUTER SCIENCE 

Introduction to programming. Topics 
include algorithms, program structure, 
and computer configuration. Laboratory 
e.xperience is included, most recently using 
Pascal and the Karel simulation package. 
Prerequisite: credit for or exemption from 
Mathematics 005. 

246 PRINCIPLES OF 
ADVANCED PROGRAMMING 
Principles of effective programming, in- 
cluding structured programming, stepwise 
refinement, assertion proving, style, debug- 
ging, control structure, decision tables, 
finite state machines, recursion, and en- 
coding. Utilities most recently used include 
SVS Pascal, the UNIX operating system 
C, and Shell programming. Prerequisite: 
A grade of C or better in Computer 
Science 125 or consent of instructor. 

247 DATA STRUCTURES 

Representation of data and algorithms 
associated with data structures. Topics in- 



clude representation of lists, trees, graphs 
and strings, algorithms for searching and 
sorting. Prerequisite: A grade of C or 
better in Computer Science 246 or consent 
of instructor. Corequisite: Mathematics 
116. 

321 INTRODUCTION TO 

NUMERICAL ANALYSIS 
Topics from the theory of interpolation; 
numerical approaches to approximating 
roots and functions, integration, systems of 
differential equations, linear systems, ma- 
trix inversion, and the eigenvalue prob- 
lem. Prerequisite: Computer Science 125 
and Mathematics 129: Mathematics 130 
strongly recommended. 

-M4 MACHINE LANGUAGE 

Principles of machine language program- 
ming; computer organization and representa- 
tion of numbers, strings, arrays, and list 
structures at the machine level; interrupt 
programming, relocatable code, linking 
loaders; interfacing with operating systems. 
Prerequisite: a grade ofC or better in Com- 
puter Science 246 or consent of instructor. 

345 INTRODUCTION TO 

COMPUTER GRAPHICS 

An introduction to graphics hardware and 
software with emphasis on the mathematics 
necessary to represent, transform, and dis- 
play images of two and three dimensional 
objects. Laboratory exercises will be de- 
signed to explore the capabilities of the 
graphics system and to test the students' 
understanding of the principles discussed in 
class. Prerequisite: Computer Science 246 
and either Computer Science 247 or permis- 
sion of the instructor: Mathematics 130 re- 
commended. Alternate years. 

.349 DATABASE SYSTEMS 

External storage structures, hashed files, in- 
dexed files; relational, network, and hierar- 
chical data models; relational algebra and the 
relational calculus; design theory for re- 
lational databases; query optimization; con- 
current operations; database protection. Pre- 
requisite: Computer Science 247. Alternate 



445 SYSTEMS PROGRAMMING 

The emphasis in this course is on the algor- 
ithms used in programming the various parts 
of a computer system. These parts include 
assemblers, loaders, editors, interrupt pro- 
cessors, inputoutput schedulers, processor 
and job schedulers, and memory managers. 
Prerequisite: Computer Science 247 and 
344. 

446 COMPILER CONSTRUCTION 

The emphasis in this course is on the con- 
struction of translators for programming lan- 



guages. Topics include lexical analysis, 
block structure, grammars, parsing, program 
representation, and run-time organization. 
Prerequisite: Computer Science 247. Alter- 
nate years. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index) 

Mathematics 

A major in mathematics consists of 10 
unit courses in the mathematical sciences 
and four semesters of non-credit col- 
loquia: Computer Science 125, Mathe- 
matics 128, 129, 130, 234, 238, 432, 
434, and two other mathematics courses 
numbered 220 or above, one of which 
may be replaced by Mathematics 112, 
116, or 214; four semesters of Mathe- 
matics 339 or 449 taken during the junior 
and senior years. 

Majors are required to attend the 
colloquia during their junior and senior 
years (339 and 449 respectively). See 
the course description of Mathematics 
339-449 for further information regard- 
ing the colloquium requirement. 

Students seeking secondary certifica- 
tion in mathematics are required to com- 
plete Mathematics 330 and 336 and are 
advised to enroll in Philosophy 117. 
Also, all majors are advised to elect Phi- 
losophy 225 and 333, Physics 225 and 
226. 

In addition to the regular courses listed 
below, special courses are occasionally 
available. 

A minor in Mathematics consists of 
Mathematics 128, 129, 234, 238, and two 
additional courses numbered 130 or 
above. 

005 INDIVIDUALIZED LABORATORY 
INSTRUCTION IN BASIC ALGEBRA 
A self-paced study of arithmetic and decimal 
numerals, fractions, the real number line, 
factoring, solutions to linear and quadratic 
equations, graphs of linear and quadratic 
functions, expressions with rational expo- 
nents, algebraic functions, exponential func- 
tions, and inequalities. THIS COURSE IS 
LIMITED TO STUDENTS PLACED 
THEREIN BY THE MATHEMATICS DE- 
PARTMENT. One-half unit of credit. 



48 



103 INTRODUCTION TO STATISTICS 

Empirical distributions of measurements, 
probability and random variables, discrete 
and continuous probability distributions, sta- 
tistical inference from small samples, linear 
regression and correlation, analysis of enum- 
erative data. Prerequisite: credit for or ex- 
emption from Mathematics 005. 

105 MATHEMATICS IN 

ELEMENTARY EDUCATION 
This course is intended for prospective 
elementary school teachers and is required of 
all those seeking elementary certification. 
Topics include systems of numbers and of 
numeration, computational algorithms, en- 
vironmental and transformation geometry 
measurement, and mathematical concept 
formation. Observation and participation in 
Greater Williamsport elementary schools. 
Corequisite: any education course numbered 
341 or above which is specifically required 
for elementary certification or consent of in- 
structor. 

107 PRECALCULUS MATHEMATICS 

The study of logarithmic, exponential, trigo- 
nometric, polynomial, and rational func- 
tions, their graphs, and elementary prop- 
erties. Prerequisite: credit for or exemption 
from Mathematics 005. 

109 INTRODUCTION TO CALCULUS 

An intuitive approach to the calculus con- 
cepts with applications to busmess. biology, 
and social-science problems. Not open to 
students who have completed Mathematics 
128. Prerequisite: credit for or exemption 
from Mathematics 005. 

112 FINITE MATHEMATICS 
FOR DECISION MAKING 
An introduction to some of the pnncipal 
mathematical models, not involving calcu- 
lus, which are used in business administra- 
tion, social sciences, and operations re- 
search. The course will include both determi- 
nistic models such as graphs, networks, 
linear programming and voting models, and 
probabilistic models such as Markov chains 
and games. Prerequisite: credit for or e.x- 
emption from Mathematics 005. 

1 16 DISCRETE MATHEMATICS 

An introduction to discrete structures. 
Topics include equivalence relations, parti- 
tions and quotient sets, mathematical induc- 
tion, recursive functions, elementary logic, 
discrete number systems, elementary com- 
binatorial theory, and general algebraic 
structures emphasizing semi-groups, 
groups, lattices. Boolean algebras, graphs 
and trees. Prerequisite: Computer Science 
125 or consent of instructor. 



128-129 



CALCULUS WITH ANALYTIC 
GEOMETRY I & II 



Differentiation and integration of alge- 
braic and trigonometric functions, conic 
sections and their applications, graphing 
plane curves, applications to related rate 
and external problems, areas of plane 
regions, volumes of solids of revolution, 
and other applications; differentiation and 
integration of transcendental functions, 
parametric equations, polar coordinates, 
infinite sequences and series, and series 
expansions of functions. Prerequisite for 
128: exemption from or a grade of C or 
better in Mathematics 107. Prerequisite for 
129: exemption from or a grade of C or 
better in Mathematics 128 or consent of 
instructor. 

130 INTRODUCTION TO 
MATRIX ALGEBRA 
Systems of linear equations and matrix 
anhimetic. Points and hyperplanes infinite 
dimensional geometries. Bases and linear 
independence. Matrix representations of 
linear mappings. The fixed point problem. 
Special classes of matrices. Prerequisite: 
Mathematics 107 or its equivalent. 

214 MULTIVARIATE STATISTICS 

The study of statistical techniques used in 
experimental designs where more than one 
random variable is involved. Techniques in- 
clude analysis of variance, analysis of covar- 
iance, multiple regression and correlation, 
factor anaylsis and canonical correlations, 
contingency tables, discriminative analysis. 
and non-parametric techniques. Further 
topics will be chosen from cluster analysis, 
time series analysis, and repeated measure 
analysis. Extensive use of a statistical pack- 
age is made (currently BMDPl. Prere- 
quisite: Mathematics 103 or its equivalent. 

231 DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 

A study of ordinary differential equations 
and linear systems. Solution techniques in- 
clude: reduction of order, undertermined 
coefficients, variation of parameters. La- 
place tiansforms, power series, and eigenva- 
lues and eigenvectors. A brief discussion of 
numerical methods may also be included. 
Prerequisite: a grade of C or better in 
Mathematics 129: Mathematics 130 recom- 
mended. 

233 COMPLEX VARIABLES 

Complex numbers, analylic functions, com- 
plex integration, Cauchy's theorems and 
their applications. Corequisite: Mathematics 
238. Alternate years. 

234 FOUNDATIONS OF MATHEMATICS 
Topics regularly included are the nature of 
mathematical systems, essentials of logical 



reasoning, and axiomatic foundations of set 
theory. Other topics frequently included are 
approaches to the concepts of infmity and 
continuity, and the construction of the real 
number system. The course serves as a 
bridge from elementary calculus to advanced 
courses in algebra and analysis. Prere- 
quisite: Mathematics 129 or consent of in- 
structor. 

238 MULTIVARL^BLE CALCULUS 

.Algebra, geometry, and calculus in multi- 
dimensional Euclidean space; n-tuples, mat- 
rices; lines, planes, curves, surfaces; vector 
functions of a single variable, acceleration, 
curvature; functions of several variables, 
gradient; line integrals, vector fields, multi- 
ple integrals, change of variable, areas, 
volumes; Green's theorem. Prerequisites: a 
grade of C or better in Mathematics 129. 
Mathematics 130 or conseiu of instructor. 

321 INTRODUCTION TO 

NUMERICAL ANALYSIS 
Topics from the theory of interpolation; 
numerical approaches to approximating 
roots and functions, integration, systems of 
differential equations, linear systems, matrix 
inversion, and the eigenvalue problem. Pre- 
requisite: Computer Science 125 and 
Mathematics 129: Mathematics 130 strongly 
recommended. 

330 TOPICS IN GEOMETRY 

An axiomatic treatment of Euclidean 
geometry, and an introduction to related 
geometries. Prerequisite: Mathematics 128. 
Alternate years. 

332-333 MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS MI 
A study of probability, discrete and con- 
tinuous random variables, expected values 
and moments, sampling, point estimation, 
sampling distributions, interval estimation, 
test of hypotheses, regression and linear 
hypotheses, experimental design models. 
Corequisite: Mathematics 238. Alternate 
years. 

336 CONCEPTS OF MATHEMATICS 
IN SECONDARY EDUCATION 
A course designed for mathematics majors 
who are planning to teach at the secondary 
level. Emphasis will be placed on the 
mathematics that form the foundation of 
secondary mathematics. Ideas will be pre- 
sented to familiarize the smdent with vanous 
curriculum proposals, to provide for innova- 
tion within the existing curriculum, and to 
expand the boundaries of the existing curri- 
culum. Open only to junior and senior 
mathematics majors enrolled in the secon- 
dary-education program. Alternate years. 

338 OPERATIONS RESEARCH 

Queuing theory, including simulation tech- 



49 



niques; optimization theory, including linear 
programming, integer programming, and 
dynamic programming; game theory, includ- 
ing two-person zero-sum games, cooperative 
games, and multiperson games. Prere- 
quisite: Mathematics 112 or Mathematics 
130. Alternate years. 

432 REAL ANALYSIS 

An introduction to the rigorous analysis of 
the concepts of real variable calculus in the 
setting of normed spaces. Topics from: 
topology of the Euclidean plane, complete- 
ness, compactness, the Heine-Borel 
theorem; functions on Euclidean space, con- 
tinuity, uniform continuity, differentiability; 
series and convergence; Riemann integral. 
Prerequisite: Mathematics 234 and 238. 

434 MODERN ALGEBRA 

An integrated approach to groups, rings, 
fields, and vector spaces and functions which 
preserve their structure. Prerequisite: 
Mathematics 130 and 234. 

438 SEMINAR 

Topics in modem mathematics of current 
interest to the instructor. A different topic is 
selected each semester. This semester is de- 
signed to provide junior and senior mathema- 
tics majors and other qualified students with 
more than the usual opportunity for concen- 
trated and cooperative inquiry. Prerequisite: 
consent of instructor. One-half unit of credit. 
This course may be repeated for credit. 

339 & 449 MATHEMATICS COLLOQUIA 
This non-credit but required course for 
junior and senior mathematics majors 
offers students a chance to hear presenta- 
tions on topics related to, but not directly 
covered in formal mathematics courses. 
Students are required to attend colloquia 
each semester of their junior (339) and 
senior (449) years. Mathematics majors 
must present two lectures, one during the 
junior year and one during the senior year. 
A letter grade will be given in semesters in 
which the student gives a presentation, 
otherwise the grade will be P/F. Seniors 
are strongly encouraged to give their 
presentations during the fall semester. 
Students applying for the professional 
semester in education are required to give 
the first presentation before the eighth 
week of the fall semester of their junior 
year, and the second presentation before 
the eighth week of the fall semester of their 
senior year. With Departmental approval, 
students will be required to take three 
semesters of 339 or 449; such approval is 
granted only in extraordinary circum- 
stances and will require the student to give 
one presentation in each of the three 
semesters. Noncredit course. One hour per 
week. 



470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 



MUSIC 

Associate Professors: Boerckel 
(Chairperson), Thayer 

Instructor: Janda 

Part-time Instructors: Bailey, Clark, 
Feist, Lakey Nacinovich, Russell, 
Shaffer, Steele, White, and Zdzienski 

The music major is required to take a 
balanced program of music theory, his- 
tory, applied and ensemble. A minimum 
of eight courses (exclusive of all ensem- 
ble, applied music and instrumental and 
vocal methods courses) is required and 
must include Music 110.111. 220, 22 1 . 
335 and 336. Each major must partici- 
pate in an ensemble (Music 167. 168 
and/or 169) and take one hour of applied 
music per week for a minimum of four 
semesters including the entire period in 
which the individual is registered as a 
music major (see Music 160-169). The 
major must include at least one-half hour 
of piano in the applied program unless a 
piano proficiency test is requested and 
passed. Anyone declaring music as a 
second major must do so by the begin- 
ning of the junior year. 

Music majors seeking certification in 
music education (K-12) must also take 
Psychology 1 10 and 338: Education 200 
and the Professional Semester; Music 
261-7. 331, 332, 446 and pass the piano 
proficiency examination. Students who 
wish to obtain certification in music 
education should consult with the depart- 
ment as soon as possible, preferably be- 
fore scheduling classes for the freshman 
year. 

The Music Department recommends 
that non-majors select courses from the 
following list to meet distribution re- 
quirements: Music 1 16, 1 17; Music 118, 
119; Music 113 or Music 224 in com- 



bination with 1 16, 1 17. 1 18 or 1 19. 

Student recitals offer opportunities to 
gain experience in public performance. 
Music majors and other students qual- 
ified in performance may present formal 
recitals. 

110-111 MUSIC THEORY I AND II 

A two-semester course open to all students. 
An examination of the fundamental compo- 
nents and theoretical concepts of music. The 
student will develop musicianship through 
application of applied skills. iMusic 1 10 is 
prerequisite to Music 111). 

113 MUSIC OF TODAY 

Non-technical survey of styles, techniques 
and contents of music produced since 1950. 
w ith emphasis on developments in electronic 
music. Leading figures of major contempor- 
ary movements in music, literamre and the 
visual arts and their works will be presented 
and discussed in relation to musical culture. 
The course will include some practical expo- 
sure to the electronic music studio and re- 
cording techniques. 

1 1 6 INTRODUCTION TO MUSIC 

A basic course in the materials and techni- 
ques of music. Examples drawn from various 
penods and styles are designed to enhance 
perception and appreciation through careful 
and informed listening. 

1 1 7 SURVEY OF WESTERN MUSIC 

A chronological survey of music in Western 
civilization from Middle Ages to the present. 
Composers and musical styles are considered 
in the context of the broader culture of each 
major era. 

118 AMERICAN MUSIC I 

For the major or non-major interested in 
studying all types of American music, from 
pre-Revolutionary days through World War 
I. Areas explored will include Indian. Afri- 
can, and European roots influencing the se- 
rious music for small and large ensembles, 
the development of show music from min- 
strels to Broadway musicals, the evolution of 
"Tin Pan Alley," and the beginnings of jazz. 
Alternate years. 

119 AMERICAN MUSIC II 

For the major or non-major interested in 
studying all types of American music. 
American Music II will cover post-World 
War I days to the present. Areas explored 
will include indigenous serious music for 
small and large ensembles, the mature 
Broadway musical, the evolution of jazz, 
the development of rock, and the fusion 
of musical styles in the I970's. Alternate 
vear. 



50 



220-221 MUSIC THEORY Ul AND IV 

A continuation of the integrated theory 
course moving toward newer uses of music 
materials. Prerequisite: Music III. 

224 ELECTRONIC MUSIC I 

A non-technical introduction to electronic 
music and MIDI (Musical Instrument 
Digital Interface) for the major and 
non-major aUke. The course traces the 
development of MIDI from its origin to 
present-day digital synthesizers in combi- 
nation with sequencing computers. 

225 ELECTRONIC MUSIC II 

Further consideration of recording techni- 
ques. Use of microphones, multi-track re- 
cording, mLxing, special effects devices and 
synchronization will be introduced. Students 
will take part in live recording of concerts 
and rehearsals of a variety of ensembles. 
Student projects will include complete re- 
cording sessions and the production of elec- 
tronic music compositions utilizing classical 
studio techniques and real-time networks. 
Prerequisite: Music 224 or consent of in- 
structor. Alternate years. 

330 COMPOSITION 1 

Creative writing in smaller vocal and in- 
strumental forms. Students identify and use 
the techniques employed by major compos- 
ers of the 20th century. Prerequisite: Music 
I II or consent of instructor. 

331 CONDUCTING 

A study of the fundamentals of conducting 
with frequent opportunity for practical e.x- 
perience. The College music organizations 
serve to make performance experience possi- 
ble. Prerequisite: Music 1 10-1 II or consent 
of instructor. Alternate years. 

332 TEACHING MUSIC IN THE SCHOOLS 
Methods and materials of teaching music in 
the schools with emphasis on curriculum de- 
velopment and procedures for choral and in- 
strumental ensembles at the elementary and 
secondary levels. Course work will include 
observation of music classes in elementary 
and secondary schools in the greater Wil- 
liamsport area. Alternate years. 

335 HISTORY OF WESTERN MUSIC I 

The development of musical styles and forms 
from Gregorian chant through Mozart, in- 
cluding composers from the medieval. Re- 
naissance, baroque and early classical eras. 

336 HISTORY OF WESTERN MUSIC II 

The development of musical styles and forms 
from Beethoven to the present, including 
composers from the late classical, romantic 
and modem eras. 



339 ORCHESTRATION 

A study of modem orchestral instruments 
and examination of their use by the great 
masters with practical problems in instru- 
mentation. The College music organizations 
serve to make performance experience possi- 
ble. Prerequisite: Music 1 10-11 1 or consent 
of instructor. Alternate years. 

440 COMPOSITION II 

Creative writing in larger vocal and in- 
stmmental forms. Smdents write more ex- 
tended works in order to develop an indi- 
vidual style of composition. Prerequisite: 
Music 330 or consent of instructor. 

442 PROJECTS IN ELECTRONIC MUSIC 

Digital techniques of Electronic Music pro- 
duction. Notation systems for electronic 
music. Aesthetics of electronic music. Stu- 
dents will use the full resources of the studio 
to complete original compositions and will 
study, prepare and present works by major 
composers of electronic music. Prerequisite: 
Music 225 or consent of instructor. 

445 SPECIAL TOPICS IN MUSIC 

The intensive study of a selected area of 
music literature, designed to develop re- 
search techniques in music. The topic is 
announced at the Spring pre-registration. 
Sample topics include; Beethoven. Impress- 
ionism, Vienna 1900-1914. Prerequisite: 
Music 116, 117 or 221 or consent of in- 
structor. 

446 RECITAL 

The preparation and presentation of a full- 
length public recital, normally during the 
student's senior year. Prerequisite- approval 
by the department. May be repeated for 
credit. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index) 

Applied Music and Ensemble 

The study of performance in piano, harpsi- 
chord, voice, organ, strings, guitar, brass, 
woodwinds, and percussion is designed to 
develop sound technique and a knowledge of the 
appropriate hterature for the instrument. Student 
recitals offer opportunities to gain experience in 
public performance. 

Credit for applied music courses (private 
lessons) and ensemble (choir, orchestra and 
band) is earned on a fractional basis. One half- 
hour lesson per week earns 'A hour credit; one 
hour lesson per week earns one hour credit. 
Ensemble credit totals one hour credit if a 
student enrolls for one or two ensembles (for 



more information, see course descriptions 
below). When scheduling please note that an 
applied course or ensemble should not be 
substituted for an academic course, but should 
be taken in addition to the normal four academic 
courses. 

Extra fees apply for private lessons (Music 
60-66) as follows: 

$145 per semester for a half-hour lesson per 
week. $290 per semester for an hour lesson per 
week. Private lessons are given for 13 weeks. 
160 Piano or Harpsichord, 161 Voice, 162 
Strings or Guitar, 163 Organ, 164 Brass, 165 
Woodwinds, 166 Percussion. 

167 ORCHESTRAL ENSEMBLE 

The Williamsport Symphony Orchestra 
allows students with significant instrumental 
experience to become members of this re- 
gional ensemble. Participation in the 
W.S.O. is contingent upon audition and the 
availability of openings. Students are 
allowed a maximum of one hour of Ensemble 
credit per semester. A student who is enrol- 
led in orchestra only should register for 
Music 167B (one hour credit), A student may 
belong to two ensembles, choosing either 
Choir or Wind Ensemble as the second 
group. Such a student will then register for 
Music 167A ('/2 hour credit) plus either 
Music I68A ( '/: hour credit) or Music I69A 
('/: hour credit). 

168 CHORAL ENSEMBLE (CHOIR) 
Participation in the College choir is designed 
to enable any student possessing at least 
average talent an opportunity to study choral 
technique. Emphasis is placed upon ac- 
quaintance with choral literature, tone pro- 
duction, diction, and phrasing. Students are 
allowed a maximum of one hour of Ensemble 
credit per semester. A student who is enrol- 
led in Choir only should register for Music 
168B (one hour credit). A student may be- 
long to two ensembles, choosing either 
Orchestra or Wind Ensemble as the second 
group. Such a student will then register for 
Music I68A (Vi hour credit) plus either 
Music 167A ( Vi hour credit) or Music 169A 
('/: hour credit). If a student has auditioned 
and been selected for the twenty voice Cham- 
ber Choir (no credit available) , he/she should 
register for Music 168C. 

169 WIND ENSEMBLE (BAND) 

The College Wind Ensemble allows students 
with some instrumental experience to be- 
come acquainted with good band literature 
and develop personal musicianship through 
participation in group instrumental activity. 
Students are allowed a maximum of one hour 
of Ensemble credit per semester. A student 
who is enrolled in Band only should register 
for Music 169B (one hour credit). A student 
may belong to two ensembles, choosing 
either Orchestra or Choir as the second 



51 



group. Such a student will then register for 
Music I69A ('/; hour credit) plus either 
Music 1 67 A ('/i hour credit) or Music 1 68 A 
('/: hour credit). 

INSTRUMENTAL AND VOCAL 
METHODS 

Instrumental and vocal methods classes are 
designed to provide students seeking 
certification in music education with a 
basic understanding of all standard band 
and orchestral instruments as well as a 
familiarity with fundamental techniques of 
singing. 

Music 261: Brass Methods 

(one hour credit) 

Music 262: Percussion Methods 

(one hour credit) 

Music 263, 264: String Methods I and II 
(one hour credit each) 

Music 265: Vocal Methods 

(one hour credit) 

Music 266, 267: Woodwind Methods I 
and II (one hour credit each) 



NEAR EAST CULTURE 
AND ARCHAEOLOGY 

Professor: Guerra (Coordinator) 

The Near East culture and archaeology 
interdisciplinary major is designed to ac- 
quaint students with the "cradle of West- 
em civilization."" both in its ancient and 
modem aspects. Majors will complete a 
minimum of eight to ten courses related 
to the Near East. 

Required courses are described in their 
departmental sections and include: 

1 . Four courses in language and culture 
from: 

History and Culture of the Ancient 
Near East (Religion 228) 
History of Art (Art 222) 
Ancient History (History 210) 
Old Testament Faith and History 
(Religion 113) 

Judaism and Islam (Religion 224) 
Two semesters of foreign language 
(Hebrew 101-102, or Greek 101-102) 

2. Two courses in archaeology from: 
Biblical Archaeology (Religion 226) 
Special Archaeology courses, such as 
independent studies or in May or 
summer terms in the Near East. 

3. Two courses in the cooperating de- 
partments (art, history, political science. 



religion and sociology-anthropology) or 
related departments. These two courses, 
usually taken in the junior or senior 
years, can be independent study. Topics 
should be related either to the ancient or 
the modern Near East and must be 
approved in advance by the committee 
supervising the interdisciplinary prog- 
ram. The study of modern Arabic or 
Hebrew is encouraged. 

Other courses may be suggested by the 
supervisory committee within the limits 
of a 10-course major. The number of 
courses taken within this program applic- 
able toward fulfilling the College dis- 
tribution requirements will vary accord- 
ing to the selection of courses. 



NURSING 

Associate Professor: Parrish 

(Chairperson) 
Assistant Professors: Kasputis, Pagana 
Instructors: Ficca, Maritin, Gray-Vickrey 

(on leave) 
Part-time Instructors: Bird, Gabriel, 

McKeegan 

Students wishing to major in nursing 
will be admitted to the College under the 
usual admission procedures. Freshmen 
should follow the nursing curriculum 
plan for the freshman year in the sequ- 
ence designated. To be considered for 
continuation in nursing, a miniinum 
G.P.A. of 2.5 is required at completion 
of the freshman year. A supplementary 
application should be submitted to the 
Department of Nursing by January 30 of 
the freshman year. 

Registered Nurses 

The Department of Nursing offers an 
alternative curriculum for registered 
nurses within the existing BSN program. 
The goals of this alternative curriculum 
are to provide registered nurses with the 
opportunity to earn an educationally 
sound BSN degree while completing the 
degree requirements in as short a time 
period as possible, and to meet the uni- 
que needs of registered nurses. Nursing 
300 and 310 are open only to registered 



nurses and are required as part of the 
alternative curriculum. Registered nurses 
may challenge for credit the following 
nursing courses: Nursing 220, the skills 
component of Nursing 221, the obste- 
trical component of Nursing 330, 331, 
332, 333, 334, and 440. For successful 
challenge of any clinical nursing course 
by registered nurses, a grade of C- or 
better is required; that is, 70% or 1.67 
is required in both the theoretical and 
clinical components of the course. 

In addition, registered nurses in this 
program may challenge for credit any 
required nonnursing course provided that 
they obtain the permission of both the 
Department of Nursing and the depart- 
ment in which that course is offered. 
These examinations may not be available 
for every required course. 

Additional information for registered 
nurses seeking the BSN is available from 
the Department of Nursing. Individual 
advisement is offered to all registered 
nurses. 

Clinical Learning Resources 

In addition to the College's new well- 
equipped Nursing Skills Lab, opportun- 
ity for self-leaming is provided in the 
adjacent Leaming Center which is equip- 
ped with electronic study carrels and au- 
dio-visual materials. 

A wide variety of health-care agencies 
in the surrounding area are utilized for 
clinical experiences. Cooperating hos- 
pitals and agencies include: Divine Pro- 
vidence Hospital, Williamsport Hospital 
and Medical Center. Evangelical Hospit- 
al, Geisinger Medical Center, Leader 
Nursing Home and Rehabilitation Cen- 
ter, Danville State Hospital, Pennsylva- 
nia Department of Health, Regional 
Home Health Services, and The Wil- 
liamsport Home. 

Expenses of the Nursing Program 

Students are responsible for their own 
transportation to assigned clinical areas. 
The student of nursing assumes all finan- 
cial obligations listed in the section on 
fees in this bulletin including a $40 lab 
fee for each of the clinical nursing 
courses (Nursing 221, 310, 330, 331, 
332, 333, 440 and 441). Additional ex- 



52 



penses include uniforms, name pin, 
watch with second hand, bandage scis- 
sors, stethoscope, blood pressure cuff, 
liability insurance, annual health ex- 
aminations, and standardized achieve- 
ment tests. 



Major in Nursing 

The major in nursing consists of: 
Nursing 220, 221, 330, 331, 332, 333, 
334, 336, 435, 440, 441, 442, and nurs- 
ing elective (420, 422, 430 or 443) or 
N80-N89. In addition, the following are 
prerequisites for specific nursing courses: 
Chemistry 108, 115; Biology 113-114, 
226; Psychology 110, 117; Mathematics 
103, and Computer Science elective 
CPTR 108, 125, or Math 214. The 
religion/philosophy distribution require- 
ment is met by the required courses: 
Philosophy 219 and Religion 120. The 
history/social science distribution 
requirement is met by the required 
courses: Psychology 110 and 117. In 
addition, the student is required to take 
our course from among Sociology/ 
Anthropology 110, 114, 220, 222, 224, 
227, 228, 229, 331, 334, and 335. The 
fine arts/foreign language distribution 
requirement can be met by two courses 
in one department from among art, 
literature, music, or theatre; or by two 
courses in foreign language on the 
intermediate or higher course level. 



School Nurse Certification 

The Department of Nursing, in col- 
laboration with the Department of 
Education, offers an additional curri- 
culum for the Registered Nurse with 
a Bachelors degree (or a Lycoming 
College nursing student) who wishes to 
be certified as a school nurse. The goal 
of this program is to provide the RN with 
a Bachelors degree an opportunity for 
career mobility. Courses required for 
completion of the certification program 
consist of: Education 200 and 239, 
Philosophy 217, Psychology 338, and 
Nursing 420, 422, 430, and 431. In 
addition, the following are prerequisites 
for specific courses: Psychology 1 10 and 
117, Sociology ****, and Nur 220. 



Additional information for registered 
nurses seeking School Nurse Certifica- 
tion is available from the Department of 
Nursing. Individualized advisement is 
offered to all prospective School Nurse 
candidates. 

Policies Specific to Nursing 

In addition to the Lycoming College 
continuance policies, the following poli- 
cies are specific to all declared majors in 
the Department of Nursing: 

1 . A grade of C — or better is required in 
all clinical nursing courses to continue in 
the nursing program. These courses are 
Nursmg 221. 310. 330. 331. 332. 333. 
440 and 441 . Students who earn a grade 
of less than 70 percent or 1 .67 in either 
the theoretical or clinical component of a 
nursing course will be required to repeat 
both components of the course before 
being permitted to continue in the nurs- 
ing sequence. 

2. Policies regarding absence from clas- 
ses or from the clinical portion of nursing 
courses are determined by the instruc- 
tor(s) responsible for the course. No abs- 
ence from the clinical portion of the 
course will be excused other than for 
illness or family emergency with one ex- 
ception. In individual cases, students 
may make arrangements with instructors 
to be excused for extracurricular activi- 
ties. Excessive absences for any reason 
will necessitate repeating the entire 
course. 



Typical Plan of Study for B.S.N. 

FRESHMAN YEAR 

Fall 

Chem. 108*(Inorganic 

Chemistry) 1 

Eng. 106 (Composition) 1 

Psych. 110* (Intro to Psych.) ... 1 

Fine Arts/Lang 1 

Physical Education 

4 

Spring 

Chem. 1 15*(Brief Organic 

Chemistry) 1 

Eng. Elective 1 



Psych. 1 17* (Developmental 

Psych.) 1 

Fine Arts/Lang 1 

Physical Education _0_ 



SOPHOMORE YEAR 

Fall 

Bio. 113 (Anatomy and 

Physiology) 

Computer Science Elective** 

Nur. 220 (Concepts of 
Nutrition in 
Family Health) .... 

Rel. 120 (Death and Dying) 

Spring 

Bio. 114 (Anatomy and 

Physiology) 

Math 103 (Intro, to 

Statistics) 

Bio. 226 (Microbiology for 

Health Sciences) .. 
Nur. 221 (Foundations of 

Professional 

Practice) 



Spring 

Nur. 331 (Nursing Care of the 

Developing 

Family II) 

Nur. 333 (Nursing Care of the 

Adult II) 



May Term 

Nur. 336 (The Nurse in the 
Social System) ... 



.75 



3.75 



1.25 
4.25 



JUNIOR YEAR 

Fall 

Nur. 330 (Nursing Care of the 

Developing 

Family I) 1.5 

Nur. 332 (Nursing Care of the 

Adult 1) 1.5 

Nur. 334 (Basic Concepts of 

Pharmacology and 

Therapeutics) _l 



1.5 
1.5 



53 



SENIOR YEAR 

Fall 

Nur. 435 (Nursing 

Research) 1 

Nur. 440 (Nursing Care of the 

Emotionally 

Troubled 

Individual & 

Family) 1.5 

Nursing Elective*** 5 

Guided Elective**** 1 

4 

Spring 

Nur. 441 (Comprehensive 

Nursing Care) 1.5 

Nur. 442 (Professional 

Issues) 5 

Phil. 219 (Ethical Issues in 

Biology and 

Medicine) 1 

Elective 1 



*Prerequisite to Sophomore year. 
**Student must select one course from 
CPTR 108, 125 or Math 214. 
***Student must select one course from 
NUR 420, 422, 430, 443, or N80-89. 
****Student must select one course from 
Soc. 1 10, 1 14, 220, 222, 224, 227, 228, 
229, 331, 334, or 335. Other courses 
may be approved on an individual basis. 
Requirement for Graduation: 32 Units 
(128 Credits). 

The student may take additional units for 
electives, independent study and/or 
honors. 



220 CONCEPTS OF NUTRITION 
IN FAMILY HEALTH 

Essentials of normal nutrition and their rela- 
tionship to the health of individuals and fami- 
lies. These concepts serve as a basis for the 
development of an understanding of ther- 
apeutic application of dietary principles and 
the health professional's role and responsi- 
bility in this facet of client care. Three hours 
of lecture. Vj unit. Prerequisites: Chemistry 
108, 115, or consent of instructor . Open to 
non-nursing majors. 

221 FOUNDATIONS OF 
PROFESSIONAL NURSING PRACTICE 
Introduction of major theoretical elements 
underlying professional nursing practice. 



Focus on the concept of health and common 
health problems recognizing the multi- 
directional influence of the individual, fami- 
ly, and environment. In this first clinical 
course the student will utilize the nursing 
process in assisting clients to attain a max- 
imum level of functioning. Three hours of 
lecture and five hours clinical laboratory. 
I'/i units. Prerequisites: Chemistry 108, 
115. Nursing 220. and Biology 113. Open to 
nursing majors only. 

300 THEORETICAL FOUNDATIONS 
OF PROFESSIONAL NURSING 
Theoretical concepts underlying profession- 
al practice. Additional focus on health arul 
common health problems, recognition of 
multi-directional influence of the individual, 
family, and environment. Two hour seminar. 
'/2 unit. Prerequisites: Successful completion 
of Nursing 221 challenge examination. 
Chem 108. 115; Psvch 110. 117: Bio 113. 
OPEN TO RNs ONLY. 

310 PROCESSES ESSENTIAL 
TO NURSING PRACTICE 
Clinical focus on the incorporation of nurs- 
ing, group, interpersonal, and change pro- 
cesses: therapeutic communication, family, 
health promotion and community concepts, 
physical assessment, collaboration, and 
teaching! learning principles in the commun- 
ity setting. -'/.< unit. Prerequisites: Successful 
completion of Nursing 330 and Nursing 332 
challenge e.xams. Bio 114. and Bio 226. 
OPEN TO RNs ONLY. 



330-331 



NURSING CARE OF THE 
DEVELOPING FAMILY 



Examination of health and nursing needs of 
beginning and developing families. Initial 
emphasis on nursing needs of mothers and 
infants within the family unit as well as the 
common health problems of children through 
adolescence. Subsequent emphasis on nurs- 
ing needs of children and mothers with health 
problems of actue and long term nature, the 
influence of illness on their development and 
the effect of illness on the family configura- 
tion. Three hours of lecture and 7'/j hours 
clinical laboratory. I'/: units. Prerequisite 
for Nursing 330: Nursing 22 1 . Biology 114. 
226. Prerequisite for Nursing 331: Nursing 
330 and 334. 

332-333 NURSING CARE OF THE ADULT 
Identification of adult health care needs and 
implementation of nursing activities based 
on an understanding of growth and develop- 
ment, pathophysiology, communication 
skills, interpersonal dynamics, and 
psychosocial interventions. Three hours of 
lecture and 7'/: hours clinical laboratory. 
V/i units. Prerequisite for Nursing 332: 
Nursing 221. Biology 114 and 226. Core- 
quisite: Nursing 334. Prerequisite for Nurs- 
ing 333: Nursing 332 and 334. 



334 BASIC CONCEPTS OF 
PHARMACOLOGY AND 
THERAPEUTICS 

Fundamentals of pharmacology and ther- 
apeutics are presented for the various classes 
of drugs. Relationships of pharmacological 
mechanisms to the affected biochemical and 
physiological processes. Interactions and 
toxicological aspects of drug therapy are re- 
viewed. Four hours of lecture . 1 unit. Core- 
quisite: Nursing 330. 332. or consent of in- 
structor. Open to non-nursing majors. 

336 THE NURSE IN 

THE SOCIAL SYSTEM 
Seminar discussions and clinical laboratory 
using the hospital as a prototype. Theories of 
social systems. Examination of induction 
into the hospital system. Evaluation of stan- 
dards of care. Focus on utilization of change 
theory. Twelve hours of lecture and 96 hours 
of clinical laboratory . 1 unit. Prerequisites: 
Nursing 331. 333. 334. Required for the 
nursing major and offered only in May term. 

420 HEALTH ASSESSMENT 

Identification and examination of methods 
for collecting and categorizing accurate data 
necessary for professional care. Emphasis is 
placed on the individual throughout the life 
span with identification of clinical and be- 
havioral findings appropriate to each age 
group. Two hours of lecture for '/: unit. Two 
hours of lecture and a 5 hour clinical labora- 
tory for 1 unit. Prerequisites: Senior stand- 
ing or consent of instructor. 

422 HEALTH EDUCATION 

Examination of learning theories appropriate 
to all age groups. Discussion of the concepts 
and techniques necessary for assessment, 
planning, implementation and evaluation of 
the teaching/learning process. Emphasis will 
be placed on self-care. Two-hour lecture for 
'/' unit. Two-hour lecture and a 5 hour clinic- 
al laboratory for I unit. School Nurse candi- 
dates should take the one-unit course. Prere- 
quisites: Senior standing or consent of in- 
structor. 

430 COMMUNITY HEALTH NURSING 

Overview of the role of the community 
health nurse in a variety of settings, e.g., 
industries, state health clinics. MHMR, 
school systems. Discussion of wellness 
promotion, availability of communiy re- 
sourcs, environmental health, prevention 
and treatment of communicable diseases, 
and group process with emphasis on com- 
munication skills. Two hour lecture for '/: 
unit. Two hour lecture and a 5 hour clinical 
laboratory for 1 unit. School Nurse candi- 
dates must take the equivalent of one unit 
course. Prerequisites: Senior standing or 
consent of the instructor. 



54 



431 SCHOOL NURSE PRACTICUM 

Essentials of school health, school nursing 
and health promotion. These concepts sei^e 
as a basis for the development of an under- 
standing of the role of the school nurse This 
course provides the student with the oppor- 
tunity to function in the role of the school 
nurse. It is a course built on the culmination 
of knowledge obtained in previous nursing 
courses and nursing experiences. 210 hours 
clinical and seminar. 1 '/2 unit. Prerequisites: 
OPEN TO SCHOOL NURSE CANDIDATES 
who have met all other requirements for cer- 
tification and have obtained departmental 
approval. 

435 RESEARCH IN NURSING 

Expansion of theoretical basis of research 
methodology with emphasis on analyzing, 
criticizing, and interpreting nursing re- 
search. Development of a research pro- 
posal focusing on a nursing problem. Four 
hours of lecture. I unit. Prerequisite: 
Mathematics 103, Computer Science 
elective, and Nursing 330 and 332 or 
consent of instructor. Open to non-nursing 
majors. 

440 NURSING CARE OF THE 
EMOTIONALLY TROUBLED 
INDIVIDUAL AND FAMILY 
Examination of disturbed human rela- 
tionships with focus on intrapsychic, inter- 
personal, and physiologic etiology. Emph- 
asis on advanced therapeutic nurse-patieni 
relationships within context of family, com- 
munity, and health care systems. Three 
hours of lecture and Th hours clinical 
laboratory. I'h units. Prerequisites: Nurs- 
ing 331. 333, 336. 

441 COMPREHENSIVE NURSING CARE 
Culminating nursing course with focus on 
leadership and management skills in a choice 
of clinical settings. Seminars provide oppor- 
tunities for students to share commonalities 
and unique aspects of professional practice. 
Three hours of lecture and 7'/: hours of cli- 
nical laboratory. 1'/: units. Prerequisites: 
Nursing 336. 440. 

442 PROFESSIONAL ISSUES 

An analysis of nursing issues in the context 
of the historical background of the profes- 
sion, the social forces which influence nurs- 
ing, and nursing's impact upon society. Two- 
hour seminar, '/j unit. Prerequisite: Senior 
standing or consent of instructor. 

443 TOPICS IN NURSING 

Selected topic courses in nursing designed to 
permit students to pursue subjects which, 
because of their specialized nature, may not 
be offered on a regular basis. '/; unit. Prere- 
quisite: Senior standing or consent of in- 
structor. 



N80-N89 



INDEPENDENT STUDY 
IN NURSING 



An opportunity to develop and implement an 
individual plan of study under faculty gui- 
dance, '/zunit. Prerequisite : Senior standing 
or consent of chairperson. 



PHILOSOPHY 

Associate Professor; Griffith, 

Whelan 
Assistant Professor: Herring 

(Chairperson) 

The study of philosophy develops a 
critical understanding of the basic con- 
cepts and presuppositions around which 
we organize our thought in science, 
religion, education, morality, the arts, 
and other human enterprises. 

A major in philosophy, together with 
appropriate other courses, can provide 
an excellent preparation for policy- 
making positions of many kinds, for 
graduate study in several fields, and 
for careers in education, law, and the 
ministry. The major in philosophy 
consists of eight courses numbered 1 10 
or above, including 438, 439, 449 and at 
least three other courses numbered 225 
or above. 

A minor in Philosophy consists of any 
four philosophy courses numbered 220 
or above; or any five philosophy courses 
number 110 or above, three of which 
must be numbered 300 or above. Three 
more specialized minors are also avail- 
able; a minor in Philosophy and Law 
consists of four courses from Philosophy 
224, 225, 334, 335, 449 or Independent 
Studies or five courses including any 
three courses from the preceding list and 
any two courses from Philosophy 115, 
216, 218, 219; a minor in Philosophy 
«nrf5c/e«ce consists of four courses from 
Philosophy 223, 225, 331, 333, 449 or 
Independent Studies; a minor in the His- 
tory of Philosophy consists of four 
courses from Philosophy 223, 224, 438. 
439, 449 or Independent Studies. Since 
topics in Philosophy 449 and indepen- 
dent studies projects vary, these courses 
may be used to count toward a special- 
ized minor only if they are approved in 
advance by the department. 



105 PRACTICAL REASONING 

A general introduction to topics in logic and 
their application to practical reasoning, with 
primary emphasis on detecting fallacies, 
evaluating inductive reasoning, and under- 
standing the rudiments of scientific method. 

110 INTRODUCTION TO 

PHILOSOPHICAL PROBLEMS 

An mtroductory course designed to show 
the nature of philosophy by examination of 
several examples of problems which have 
received extended attention in philosophical 
literature. These topics often include the 
relation of the mind to the body, the possi- 
bility of human freedom, arguments about 
the existence of God. the conditions of 
knowledge, and the relation of language to 
thought. Some attention is also given to the 
principles of acceptable reasoning. 

1 14 PHILOSOPHY AND 
PERSONAL CHOICE 

An introductory philosophical examination 
of a number of contemporary moral issues 
which call for personal decision. Topics 
often investigated include: the "good" life, 
obligation to others, sexual ethics, abortion, 
suicide and death, violence and pacifism, 
obedience to the law\ the relevance of per- 
sonal beliefs to morality. Discussion centers 
on some of the suggestions philosophers 
have made about how to make such deci- 
sions. 

115 PHILOSOPHY AND PUBLIC POLICY 
An introductory philosophical examination 
of the moral and conceptual dimension of 
various contemporary public issues, such as 
the relation of ethics to politics and the law. 
the enforcement of morals, the problems of 
fair distribution of goods and opportunities, 
the legitimacy of restricting the use of natur- 
al resources, and the application of ethics to 
business practice. Discussion centers on 
some of the suggestions philosophers have 
made about how to deal with these issues 

216 ETHICAL ISSUES IN BUSINESS 

An introductory philosophical examination 
of a variety of moral problems that arise 
concerning the Amencan business system. 
Included are a systematic consideration of 
typical moral problems faced by individuals 
and an examination of common moral criti- 
cisms of the business system itself. 

217 PHILOSOPHICAL ISSUES 
IN EDUCATION 

An examination of the basic concepts 
involved in thought about education, and a 
consideration of the various methods for 
justifying educational proposals. Typical of 
the issues discussed are: .Are education and 
indoctrination different' What is a liberal 
education? Are education and schooling 
compatible' What do we need to learn.' 
Alternate \ears. 



55 



218 PHILOSOPHICAL ISSUES 
IN CRIMINAL JUSTICE 

An introductory examination of various 
philosophical issues and concepts which are 
of special importance in legal contexts. Dis- 
cussion includes both general topics, such 
as the justification of punishment, and more 
specific topics, such as the insanity defense 
and the rights of the accused. Readings are 
arranged topically and include both classical 
and contemporary sources. 

219 ETHICAL ISSUES IN 
BIOLOGY AND MEDICINE 

A philosophical investigation of some of the 
ethical issues which arise as a result of con- 
temporary medical and biological technolo- 
gy. Typical of these issues are euthanasia, 
behavior control, patient rights, experimen- 
tation on humans, fetal research, abortion, 
genetic engineering, population control, and 
distribution of health resources. 

223 HISTORY OF SCIENCE 
AND METAPHYSICS 

An historical survey of the attempt to 
understand the physical universe. Particu- 
lar attention is paid to common origins of 
philosophy and science in the works of the 
ancient Greek philosophers, to the ques- 
tion of how scientific and philosophical 
thinking differs from mythological and 
technological thinking, to the rationalism 
empiricism dispute in science and meta- 
physics, and to the interaction between 
philosophy and science in the formulating 
fundamental questions about the physical 
universe and in developing and criticizing 
concepts designed to answer them. Alter- 
nate years. 

224 HISTORY OF SOCIAL AND 
POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY 

An historical survey of the most imponant 
social and political philsophers from 
Socrates to Marx. Special attention is paid 
to the relationship between ethics and 
politics as seen by Plato and Aristotle and 
to the social contract theories of Hobbes, 
Locke, and Rousseau. Alternate years. 

225 SYMBOLIC LOGIC 

A study of modem symbolic logic and its 
application to the analysis of arguments. In- 
cluded are truth-functional relations, the 
logic of propositional functions, and deduc- 
tive systems. Attention is also given to va- 
rious topics in the philosophy of logic. 

331 PHILOSOPHY AND HUMAN NATURE 
An examination of a variety of classical and 
contemporary philosophical questions about 
human nature. Among the questions typical- 
ly considered are these: Is there such a thing 
as human nature? Are human beings diffe- 
rent, in any fundamental way, from other 



animals? Are human beings free? Is human 
consciousness just a brain process? Are hu- 
man beings inherently predisposed to evil? 
Are human beings biologically determined to 
be selfish or aggressive? Are the differences 
in achievement between men and women 
biologically based? Prerequisite: Students 
without previous study in philosophy must 
have instructor' s permission. 

332 PHILOSOPHY OF RELIGION 

A philosophical examination of religion. In- 
cluded are such topics as the nature of reli- 
gious discourse, arguments for and against 
the existence of God. and the relation be- 
tween religion and science. Readings from 
classical and contemporary sources. Prere- 
quisite: students without previous study in 
philosophy must have instructor's permis- 
sion. Alternate years. 

333 PHILOSOPHY OF NATURAL SCIENCE 
A consideration of philosophically important 
conceptual problems arising from reflection 
about natural science, including such topics 
as the nature of scientific laws and theories, 
the character of explanation, the import of 
prediction, the existence of "non- 
observable" theoretical entities such as elec- 
trons and genes, the problem of justifying 
induction, and various puzzles associated 
with probability. Prerequisite: students 
without previous study in philosophy must 
have instructor's permission. Alternate 
years. 

334 CONTEMPORARY 
POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY 

A systematic philosophical investigation of 
the relation between human nature and the 
proper social and political order. Topics stu- 
died include the purpose of government, the 
nature of legitimate authority , the foundation 
of human rights, and the limits of human 
freedom. Emphasis is placed on the logic of 
social and political thought and on the analy- 
sis of basic principles and concepts. Prere- 
quisite: students without previous philoso- 
phy must have instructor's permission. 

335 ETHICAL THEORY 

An inquiry concerning the grounds which 
distinguish morally right from morally 
wrong actions. Central to the course is critic- 
al consideration of the proposals and the 
rationale of relativists, egoists, utilitarians, 
and other ethical theorists. Various topics in 
metaethics are also included. Prerequisite: 
students without previous study in philoso- 
phy must have instructor' s permission. 

438 ANCIENT GREEK PHILOSOPHY 

A critical examination of the ancient Greek 
philosophers, with particular emphasis on 
Plato and Aristotle. Prerequisite: two 



courses in philosophy or consent of instruc- 
tor. Alternate years. 

439 EARLY MODERN PHILOSOPHY 

A critical examination of the Continental 
Rationalists (Descartes, Spinoza, Leibniz), 
the British Empiricists (Locke, Berkeley, 
Hume) and Kant. Prerequisite: nvo courses 
in philosophy or consent of instructor. Alter- 
nate years. 

449 DEPARTMENTAL SEMINAR 

An investigation carried on by discussions 
and papers, into one philosophical problem, 
text, philosopher, or movement. A different 
topic is selected each semester. Recent topics 
include artifical intelligence, the ethics of 
research of human subjects, life after death, 
personal identity, and human rights. This 
seminar is designed to provide junior and 
senior philosophy majors and other qualified 
students with more than the usual opportun- 
ity for concentrated and cooperative inquiry. 
Prerequisite: consent of instructor. This 
seminar may be repeated for credit. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Recent independent studies in philosophy in- 
clude Nietzsche, moral education, Rawls' 
theory of justice, existentialism, euthanasia, 
Plato's ethics, and philosophical aesthetics. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 



PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

Associate Professor: Burch 
Assistant Professor: Whitehill 
Instructor: Holmes (Ciiairperson) 

Athletic Training Internship 

Lycoming College established an 
apprenticeship program in 1979 after 
recognizing two conditions: the impor- 
tance of the care and prevention of 
athletic injuries by trained professionals, 
and the career's promising growth 
potential. 

To complete the internship students 
are required to take the five courses listed 
below as well as Biology 113 & 114 and 
Nursing 220. Students also are required 
to undergo practical work under the 
supervision of Lycoming's certified 
athletic trainer. Students are officially 



56 



accepted into the Internship program 
after successful completion of the first 
year of practical work and Athletic 
Training 110. 

Students who finish the Internship 
program become eligible to participate 
in the National Athletic Trainers 
Association (N.A.T.A.) Certification 
examination to earn the status of an 
N.A.T.A. certified trainer. This 
Internship program also allows the 
passing students to qualify for the State 
examination to become Class B athletic 
trainers under Pennsylvania Act 63 
P.S.S1310.1. 

Athletic training classes do not count 
toward fulfilling graduation require- 
ments except as the Physical education 
requirements of two courses. 

110 BASIC ATHLETIC TRAINING 

Covers the basics in prevention, evalu- 
ation, treatment, and rehabilitation of 
athletic injuries. Two lectures, one lab 
per week. Three credit hours. Prerequisite: 
CPR certification and Basic First Aid 
certification. 

210 KINESIOLOGY 

The study of the principle types of muscular 
movements. Three lectures per week. 
Three credit hours. Prerequisite: Biology 
113 & 114. 

220 BIOMECHANICS 

The study of the mechanical and physio- 
logical aspects of human movement. Three 
lectures per week. Three credit hours. 
Prerequisite: A.T. 210. 

310 ADVANCED ATHLETIC TRAINING 
A more in depth course in injury evalu- 
ation, rehabilitation, and therapeutic 
modalities. Three lectures per week. Three 
credit hours. Prerequisite: A.T. 110. 

410 EXERCISE PHYSIOLOGY 

The study of the effects of exercise on the 
human body. Two lectures and one lab 
per week. Three credit hours. Prerequisite: 
Instructor approval. A Iternate years. 

Physical Education 

101 PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

Coeducational physical education classes. 
Basic instructions in fundamentals, knowl- 
edge, and appreciation of sports that 
include swimming, tennis, volleyball, 
archery, soccer, golf, badminton, physical 
fitness, and other activities. Backpacking, 
cross-country and alpine skiing, jogging. 



modern dance, and cycling are offered on 
a contract basis. Beginning swimming is 
required for all non-swimmers. Students 
may select any activity offered. A reason- 
able degree of proficiency is required in 
the activities. Emphasis is on the potential 
use of activities as recreational and leisure- 
time interests. Two semesters of physical 
education (two hours per week) are 
required. All physical education classes are 
open to men and women. 



POLITICAL SCIENCE 



Professor: Giglio, Roskin 

(Chairperson) 
Part-time Instructor: Wolf 

The major is designed to provide a 
systematic understanding of government 
and politics at the international, national, 
state, and local levels. Majors are en- 
couraged to develop their faculties to 
make independent, objective analyses 
which can be applied to the broad spec- 
trum of the social sciences. 

Although the political science major is 
not designed as a vocational major, stu- 
dents with such training may go directly 
into government service, journalism, 
teaching, or private administrative agen- 
cies. A political science major can pro- 
vide the base for the study of law, or for 
graduate studies leading to administra- 
tive work in federal, state, or local gov- 
ernments, international organizations, or 
college teaching. Students seeking certi- 
fication to teach secondary school social 
studies may major in political science but 
should consult their advisors and the 
education department. 

A major consists of eight political sci- 
ence courses, including Political Science 
116. Prospective majors are encouraged 
to register for this course during their 
freshman year. An exemption will be 
granted only if it strengthens the stu- 
dent's program. In addition to 116, stu- 
dents must take at least one course in 
each of five areas ( A to E). Students are 
encouraged, also, to select a minor in 
another department in accordance with 
their academic and career interests and in 
consultation with their departmental 
advisor. 



For non-majors, the department offers 
three minors: a minor in Political Science 
consists of any four courses numbered 
200 or above from areas A to E; a minor 
in Foreign Affairs consists of four 
courses selected from Political Science 
220, 225, 326, 327, 438 and 439; and a 
minor in Legal Studies consists of Poli- 
tical Science 331. 335 , 436 and one other 
course numbered 200 or above. Students 
are encouraged to consult with depart- 
ment members on the selection of a 



1 16 INTRODUCTION TO POLITICS 
An introductory course in political science that asks 
how and why people form political communities, 
what holds them together, and how political sys- 
tems may either improve or damage themselves. 
Includes comparison of the U.S. with other coun- 
tries and discussion of current political and public- 
policy issues. 

A. American Politics 

1 10 GOVERNMENT AND POLITICS 
IN THE UNITED STATES 

An introduction to American national gov- 
ernment which emphasizes both structural- 
functional analysis and policy-making pro- 
cesses. In addition to the legislative, execu- 
tive, and judicial branches of government, 
attention will be given to political parties and 
interest groups, elections and voting be- 
havior, and constitutional rights. Recom- 
mended to all social science-education ma- 
jors and to those smdents who have had in- 
adequate or insufficient preparation in Amer- 
ican government. 

1 1 1 STATE AND LOCAL GOVERNMENT 
An examination of the general principles, 
major problems, and political processes of 
the states and their subdivisions, together 
with their role in a federal type of govern- 
ment. 

223 AMERICAN PRESIDENCY 

A smdy of the office and powers of the presi- 
dent with analysis of his major roles as chief 
administrator, legislator, political leader, 
foreign policy maker, and commander-in- 
chief. Special attention is given to those pres- 
idents who led the nation boldly. Subject to 
student demand, but offered at least once 
during a four-year cycle. 

B. Legal Studies 

331 CIVIL RIGHTS AND LIBERTIES 

What are our rights and liberties as Amer- 
icans'? What should they be? A frank discus- 



57 



sion of the nature and scope of the constitu- 
tional guarantees. First Amendment rights, 
(he nghts of criminal suspects and defen- 
dants, racial and sexual equality, and equal 
protection of the laws. Students will read and 
brief the more important Supreme Court de- 
cisions. Prerequisite: junior or senior stand- 
ing or consent of instructor. 

335 LAW AND SOCIETY 

An examination of the nature, sources, func- 
tions, and limits of law as an instrument of 
political and social control. Included for dis- 
cussion are legal problems pertaining to the 
family, crime, deviant behavior, poverty, 
and minority groups. Prerequisite, junior or 
senior standing or consent of instructor. 

436 MASS MEDIA LAW AND REGULATION 
An examination of the legal structure and the 
system by which mass communication is 
controlled in this society. The forces which 
shape, influence, and make policy will be 
considered. Cross-listed as Mass Com- 
munication 331 . Prerequisite: junior or 
senior standing or consent of instructor. 

C. Applied Politics 

333 BUREAUCRACY AND 

PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION 
What is bureaucracy? Why and how do 
bureaucracies arise? What has been the poli- 
tical impact of growth of bureaucracy in gov- 
ernment? These questions, among others, 
will be considered in this examination of 
public bureaucracies. This course is highly 
recommended to students planning to take an 
internship in city or county government 
through the political science department. 
Subject to student demand, but offered at 
least once during a four-year cycle. 

347 WOMEN AND POLITICS 

The historical, philosophical, and practical 
context and conduct of women in a variety of 
political roles. This course considers both 
elective and nonelective activities, and in- 
cludes analyses of women's issues currently 
on legislative and court agendas. Alternate 
years. 

434 POLITICAL NEWSWRITING 

A workshop course in the reporting and 
rewriting of public affairs at the local, 
national, and international levels. There 
will be neither te.\ts nor examinations, but 
short written assignments will be due every 
class meeting. Prerequisite: Mass Com- 
munication 329 or consent of instructor. 
Alternate years. 

448 PUBLIC OPINION AND POLLING 

A course dealing with the general topic and 
methodology of polling. Content includes 



exploration of the processes by which peo- 
ple's political opinions are formed, the man- 
ipulation of public opinion through the uses 
of propaganda, and the American response to 
politics and political issues. 

D. Comparative Politics 



220 EUROPEAN POLITICS 

A study of the political systems of Europe 
with emphasis on comparison and patterns of 
government. The course will review politics 
in Britain, France, West Germany, the 
Soviet Union, and other countries and 
attempt to find underlying similarities and 
differences. 

326 POLITICAL CULTURES 

An exploration of the "people" aspects of 
political life in several countries. The way 
people interact with each other and with gov- 
ernment, what they expect from the system, 
how they acquire their political attitudes and 
styles, and how these contribute to the type 
of government. Alternate years. 

438 POLITICS OF DEVELOPING AREAS 
The causes and possible cures for socio- 
political backwardness in Asia, Africa, and 
Latin America. Alternate years. 

E. International Relations 

225 WORLD POLITICS 

Why is there war? An introduction to interna- 
tional relations with emphasis on the 
varieties of conflicts which may grow into 
war. 

327 CRISIS AREAS IN WORLD POLITICS 

The study of several current areas of interna- 
tional tension and conflict, including rela- 
tions among the United States, Soviet Union, 
and China, plus the Middle East and whatev- 
er new danger spots arise over time. Alter- 
nate years. 

439 AMERICAN FOREIGN POLICY 

The U.S. role in the world in geographic, 
strategic, historical, and ideological perspec- 
tives, plus an examination of the domestic 
forces shaping U.S. policy. Alternate years. 

F. Special Programs 

470-479 INTERNSHIPS (See index) 

Students may receive academic credit for 
serving as interns in structured learning 
situations with a wide variety of public and 
private agencies and organizations. Students 
have served as interns with the Public Defen- 
der's Office, the Lycoming County Court 
Adminstrator, and the Williamsport City 
government. 



N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Current studies relate to elections — local, 
state, and federal — while past studies have 
included Soviet and world politics. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 



PSYCHOLOGY 



Professor: Hancock 
Associate Professor; Berthold 

(Chairperson) 
Assistant Professor: Balleweg, 

Ryan 

The major provides training in both 
theoretical and applied psychology. It is 
designed to meet the needs of students 
seeking careers in psychology or other 
natural or social sciences. It also meets 
the needs of students seeking a better 
understanding of human behavior as a 
means of furthering individual and career 
goals in other areas. Psychology majors 
and others are urged to discuss course 
selections in psychology with members 
of the department to help insure 
appropriate course selection. 

A major consists of Psychology 1 10, 
336, 431, 432 and four other psychology 
courses. Statistics also is required. 

A minor in Psychology consists of 
Psychology 1 10 and four other psycholo- 
gy courses (three of which must be num- 
bered 200 or above) which must be 
approved by the department. 

110 INTRODUCTORY PSYCHOLOGY 

An introduction to the empirical study of 
human and other animal behavior. Areas 
considered may include; learning, personal- 
ity, social, physiological, sensory, cogni- 
tion, and developmental. 

1 12 GROUP PROCESSES AND 

INTERPERSONAL COMMUNICATION 
The introduction to the research and theory 
from social psychology related to small- 
group dynamics and interpersonal com- 
munication. Topics covered will include 
communication processes, interpretation of 
motivation, conceptualization of individual 
personalities, problem solving and lead- 
ership. The first stage of the course will focus 
on research and theory; the second half will 



58 



emphasize the development of skills and 
techniques where students become members 
of a self-analytic — practicing the skills and 
making a case study of the processes in- 
volved. May term only. 

116 ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY 

An introduction to the patterns of deviant 
behavior with emphasis on cause, function, 
and treatment. The various models for the 
conceptualization of abnormal behavior are 
critically examained. Prerequisite: Psychol- 
ogy 110. 

1 1 7 DEVELOPMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY 

A study of the basic principles of human 
growth and development throughout the life 
span. Prerequisite: Psychology 110. 

1 1 8 ADOLESCENT PSYCHOLOGY 

The study areas will include theories of 
adolescence; current issues raised by as well 
as about the "generation of youth": research 
findings bearing on theories and issues of 
growth beyond childhood, and self- 
exploration. Prerequisite: Psychology 110. 

224 SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY 

The scientific exploration of interpersonal 
communication and behavior. Topics in- 
clude attitudes and attitude change, attrac- 
tion and communication, social perception 
and social influence, prosocial and antisocial 
behavior and group processes. Prerequisite: 
Psychology 110. 

225 INDUSTRIAL AND 
ORGANIZATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 
The application of the principles and 
methods of psychology to selected industrial 
and organizational situations. Prerequisite: 
Psychology 110 or consent of instructor. 

239 BEHAVIOR MODIHCATION 

A detailed examination of the applied analy- 
sis of behavior. Focus will be on the applica- 
tion of experimental method to the individual 
clinical case. The course will cover target- 
ing, behavior, base-rating, intervention 
strategies, and outcome evaluation. Learn- 
ing-based modification techniques such as 
contingency management, counter- 
conditioning, extinction, discrimination 
training, aversive conditioning, and negative 
practice will be examined. Prerequisite: 
Psychology 110 or consent of instructor . 

333 PHYSIOLOGICAL PSYCHOLOGY 

An introduction to the physiological psycho- 
logist's method of approach to the under- 
standing of behavior as well as the set of 
principles that relate the function and orga- 
nization of the nervous system to the phe- 
nomena of behavior. Prerequisite: Psychol- 
ogy 110 or consent of instructor. 



334 PRINCIPLES OF MEASUREMENT 
Psychometric methods and theory, including 
scale transformation, norms, standardiza- 
tion, validation procedures, and estimation 
of reliability. Prerequisites: Psychology 1 10 
and statistics. 

335 HISTORY AND 
SYSTEMS OF PSYCHOLOGY 

The growth of scientific psychology and the 
theories and systems that have accompanied 
its development. Prerequisite: four courses 
in psychology. 

336 PERSONALITY THEORY 

A review of the major theories of personality 
development and personality functioning. In 
addition to covering the details of each 
theory, the implications and applications of 
each theory will be considered. Prerequisite: 
Psychology HO. 

337 COGNITION 

An investigation of human mental processes 
along the two major dimensions directed and 
undirected thought. Topic areas include rec- 
ognition, attention, conceptualization, prob- 
lem-solving, fantasy, language, dreaming, 
and creativity. Prerequisite: Psychology 
110. 

338 EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 

An introduction to the empirical study of the 
teaching-learning process. Areas considered 
may include educational objectives, pupil 
and teacher characteristics, concept learn- 
ing, problem solving and creativity, attitudes 
and values, motivation, retention and trans- 
fer, evaluation and measurement. Prere- 
quisite: Psychology 110 or consent of in- 
structor. 

341 PSYCHOLOGY OF WOMEN 

A review of contemporary theory and re- 
search on the psychology of gender differ- 
ences. The major theories and basic research 
on gender differences will be covered. Spe- 
cial topics include sex differences in achieve- 
ment, power, and communication; sex-role 
stereotypes; beliefs about masculinity and 
femininity; and gender influences on mental 
health. Prerequisite: Psychology 110. 

431 LEARNING 
EXPERIMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY 
Learning processes. The examination of the 
basic methods and principles of animal and 
human learning. Prerequisites: Psychology 
110 and statistics. 

432 SENSORY 
EXPERIMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY 

The examination of psychophysical metho- 
dology and basic neurophysiological 
methods as they are applied to the under- 



standing of sensor processes. Prerequisites: 
Psychology 110 and statistics. 

448-449 PRACTICUM IN PSYCHOLOGY 

An off-campus experience in a community 
setting offering psychological services, sup- 
plemented with classroom instruction and 
discussion. Psychology 448 covers the basic 
counseling skills, while Psychology 449 
covers the major theoretical approaches to 
counseling. Prerequisite: consent of in- 
structor. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Internships give students an opportunity to 
relate on-campus academic experiences to 
society in general and to their post- 
baccalaureate objectives in particular. Stu- 
dents have, for example, worked in prisons, 
public and private school, county govern- 
ment, and for the American Red Cross. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Independent study is an opportunity for stu- 
dents to pursue special interests in areas for 
which courses are not offered. In addition, 
students have an opportunity to study a topic 
in more depth than is possible in the regular 
classroom situation. Studies in the past have 
included child abuse, counseling of hospital 
patients, and research in the psychology of 
natural disasters. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 
Honors in psychology requires original con- 
tributions to the literature of psychology 
through independent study. The most recent 
honors project was a study of the relationship 
between socio-economic status and visual 
versus auditory learning. 



RELIGION 

Professor: Guerra (Chairperson) 
Associate Professor: Hughes 
Assistant Professor: Van Voorst 

A major consists of 10 courses, in- 
cluding Religion 113. 114, and 120. At 
least seven courses must be taken in the 
department. The following courses may 
be counted toward fulfilling the major 
requirements: Greek 221 and 222, Heb- 
rew 221 and 222, History 340 and 416, 
Philosophy 332, and Sociology 333. 

A minor in Religion consists of one 
course from Religion 110, 113, 114 and 
four religion courses numbered 200 or 
above. 



59 



An interdisciplinary minor in Biblical 
Languages requires ttie completion of 
Greek 221, 222 and Hebrew 221 and 

222. 

110 INTRODUCTION TO RELIGION 

Designed for the beginning student, this 
course examines what it means to be reli- 
gious. Some of the issues are the definition of 
religion, the meaning of symbolism, con- 
cepts of God, ecstatic phenomena. Specific 
attention will be devoted to the current prob- 
lem of cults and religious liberty. 

113 OLD TESTAMENT 
FAITH AND HISTORY 

A critical examination of the literature within 
its historical setting and in the light of 
archaeological findings to show the faith and 
religious life of the Hebrew-Jewish com- 
munity in the Biblical period, and an intro- 
duction to the history of interpretation with 
an emphasis on contemporary Old Testament 
criticism and theology. 

114 NEW TESTAMENT 
FAITH AND HISTORY 

A critical examination of the literature within 
its historical setting to show the faith and 
religious life of the Christian community in 
the Biblical period, and an introduction to the 
history of interpretation with an emphasis on 
contemporary New Testament criticism and 
theology. 

117 INTRODUCTION TO 

SUPERNATURAL PHENOMENA 

An examination of claims for supernatural or 
paranormal phenomena with an emphasis on 
critical methodology and the evaluation of 
evidence. The course is designed to teach 
students the difference between the scientific 
and religious methodologies, the proper role 
of each, and the hazards of mixing the two. 
Subjects covered include ESP, Spiritualism, 
the Bermuda Triangle, witchcraft, faith heal- 
ing, Noah's Ark, ghosts, monsters, and 
others . Offered May and summer terms only. 

120 DEATH AND DYING 

A study of death from personal, social, and 
universal standpoints with emphasis upon 
what the dying may teach the living. Princip- 
al issues are the stages of dying, bereave- 
ment, suicide, funeral conduct, and the reli- 
gious doctrines of death and immortality. 
Course includes, as optional, practical pro- 
jects with terminal patients under profession- 
al supervision. Only one course from the 
combination 120-121 may be used for dis- 
tribution. 

121 AFTER DEATH AND DYING 

An examination of the question of life after 
death in terms of contemporary clinical stu- 



dies, the New Testament resurrection narra- 
tives, the Asian doctrine of reincarnation, 
and the classical theological beliefs of provi- 
dence and predestination. Religion 120 is 
recommended but not required. Only one 
course from the combination 120-121 may be 
used for distribution. 

222 PROTESTANTISM IN 
THE MODERN WORLD 

An examination of Protestant thought and 
life from Luther to the present agamst the 
backdrop of a culture rapidly changing from 
the 17th century scientific revolution to 
Marxism. Darwinism, and depth psycholo- 
gy. Special attention will be paid to the con- 
stant interaction between Protestantism and 
the world in which it finds itself. 

223 CHRISTIAN ORIGINS 

A study of the historical, cultural, and reli- 
gious background of the formation of Christ- 
ianity and the antecedents of Christian belief 
and practice in post-exilic Judaism and in 
Hellenism. 

224 JUDAISM AND ISLAM 

An exammation of the rise, growth, and ex- 
pansion of Judaism and Islam with special 
attention given to the theological contents of 
the literatures of these religions as far as they 
are normative in matters of faith, practice, 
and organization. Also, a review of their 
contributions to the spiritual heritage of man- 
kind. 

225 ORIENTAL RELIGION 

A phenomenological study of the basic con- 
tent of Hinduism, Buddhism, and Chinese 
Taoism with special attention to social and 
political relations, mythical and aesthetic 
forms, and the East-West dialogue. 

226 BIBLICAL ARCHAEOLOGY 

A study of the role of archaeology in recon- 
structing the worid in which the Biblical 
literature originated with special attention 
given to archaeological results that throw 
light on the clarification of the Biblical text. 
Also, an introduction to basic archaeological 
method and a study in depth of several repre- 
sentative excavations along with the artifacts 
and material culture recovered from different 
historical periods. 

228 HISTORY AND CULTURE OF 
THE ANCIENT NEAR EAST 
A study of the history and culture of Mesopo- 
tamia, Anatolia, Syria-Palestine, and Egypt 
from the rise of the Sumerian culture to Alex- 
ander the Great. Careful attention will be 
given to the religious views prevalent in the 
ancient Near East as far as these views in- 
teracted with the culture and faith of Biblical 



230 PSYCHOLOGY OF RELIGION 

A study into the broad insights of psychology 
in relation to the phenomena of religion and 
religious behavior. The course concentrates 
on religious experience or manifestations 
rather than concepts. Tentative solutions will 
be sought to questions such as: What does it 
feel like to be religious or to have a religious 
experience? What is the religious function in 
human development? How does one think 
psychologically about theological problems? 

331 CHRISTIAN SOCIAL ETHICS 

A study of Christian ethics as a normative 
perspective for contemporary moral prob- 
lems with emphasis upon the interaction of 
law and religion, decision making in the field 
of biomedical practice, and the reconstruc- 
tion of society in a planetary civilization. 

332 CONTEMPORARY PROBLEMS IN 
CHRISTIAN SOCIAL ETHICS 

An examination of the approach of religion 
and other disciplines to an issue of current 
concern; current topics include the theologic- 
al significance of law . the ethics of love . and 
the Holocaust. The course may be repeated 
for credit if the topic is different from one 
previously studied. 

337 BIBLICAL TOPICS 

An in-depth study of Biblical topics related 
to the Old and New Testaments. Topics in- 
clude prophecy, wisdom literature, the Dead 
Sea Scrolls, the teachings of Jesus, Pauline 
theology, Judaism and Christian origins, 
redaction criticism — the way the Synoptic 
Gospels and John give final form to their 
message. Course will vary from year to year 
and may be taken for credit a second time 
if the topic is different from one previously 
studied. 

341 CONTEMPORARY RELIGIOUS ISSUES 
A study of the theological significance of 
some contemporary intellectual develop- 
ments in Western culture . The content of this 
course will vary from year to year. Subjects 
studied in recent years include the theologic- 
al significance of Freud, Marx, and Nietz- 
sche; Christianity and existentialism; theolo- 
gy and depth psychology; the religious 
dimension of contemporary literature. 

342 THE NATURE AND MISSION 
OF THE CHURCH 

A study of the nature of the Church as "The 
People of God" with reference to the Biblic- 
al, Protestant, Orthodox, and Roman Catho- 
lic traditions. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Interns in religion usually work in local chur- 
ches under the supervision of the pastor and a 
member of the faculty. 



60 



N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Current study areas are in the Biblical lan- 
guages. New Testament theology, compara- 
tive religions, and the ethics of technology. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 
A recent project was on the theology of hope 
with reference to the thought of Ernst Bloch 
and Alfred North Whitehead. 



SOCIOLOGY-ANTHROPOLOGY 

Professor: Wilk 
Associate Professor: Jo 

(Chairperson) 
Assistant Professors: Lawrence, 

Strauser 

The Sociology/ Anthropology Depart- 
ment offers two tracks in the major. Both 
tracks introduce the students to the fun- 
damental concepts of the discipline, and 
both tracks prepare the student for 
graduate school. 

Track I emphasizes the theoretical 
aspects of sociology and anthropology. 
Track II emphasizes the application of 
sociology and anthropology to human 
services. 

Track I — Sociology-Anthropology re- 
quires the core course sequence 1 10, 
114, 229, 444. and 447 and three other 
courses within the department with the 
exception of 115. 222, 223. 225. 440. 
and 443. Religion 226 may also be 
counted toward the major. 

Track 11 — Human Ser\ices in a Socio- 
Cultural Perspective requires: Sociolo- 
gy-Anthropology 110, 222, 229, 443. 
444, and 447. In addition, students must 
select two courses from among the fol- 
lowing: Sociology-Anthropology 220. 
221, 227, 228. 300. 334. and 335. Stu- 
dents are also required to choose two 
units from the following courses: 
Psychology 110. Psychology 224, Eco- 
nomics 224, and Political Science 333. 
Recommended courses: Accounting 
110, Accounting 226, Spanish 111, 
Spanish 112, History 126, and Philoso- 
phy 334. 



Majors in both tracks are encouraged 
to participate in the internship program. 

A minor in Sociology and Anthropolo- 
gy consists of Sociology-Anthropology 
110 and four other sociology- 
anthropology courses (three of which 
must be numbered 220 or above) which 
must be approved by the department. 
Sociology-Anthropology courses 115, 
223, 225, 339. and 440 cannot be 
counted toward this minor. 

1 10 INTRODUCTION TO SOCIOLOGY 

An introduction to the problems, concepts, 
and methods in sociology today, including 
analysis of stratification, organization of 
groups and institutions, social movements, 
and deviants in social structure. 

1 1 4 INTRODUCnON TO ANTHROPOLOGY 

An introduction to the subfields of anthropo- 
logy; its subject matter, methodology, and 
goals. Examination of biological and cultural 
evolution, the fossil evidence for human 
evolution, and questions raised in relation to 
human evolution. Other topics include race, 
human nature, primate behavior, and prehis- 
toric cultural development. 

1 15 INTRODUCTION TO AMERICAN 
CRIMINAL JUSTICE SYSTEM 

An introduction to the role of law enforce- 
ment, courts, and corrections in the adminis- 
tration of justice; the historical development 
of police, courts, and corrections; jurisdic- 
tion and procedures of courts; an introduc- 
tion to the studies, literature, and research in 
criminal justice; careers in criminal justice. 

220 MARRIAGE AND THE FAMILY 

The history, structure, and functions of mod- 
em American family life, emphasizing dat- 
ing, courtship, factors in marital adjustment, 
and the changing status of family members. 
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 110 
or consent of instructor. 

221 JUVENILE DELINQUENCY 

A multidisciplinary approach to the study of 
the constellation of factors that relate to juve- 
nile delinquency causation, handling the 
juvenile delinquent in the criminal justice 
system, treatment strategies, prevention, and 
community responsibility. Prerequisite: 
Sociology-Anthropology 110 or consent of 
instructor. 

222 INTRODUCTION TO 
HUMAN SERVICES 

The course is designed for students interested 
in learning about, or entering, the human 
services profession. It will review the his- 
tory, the range, and the goals of human ser- 



vices together with a survey of various 
strategies and approaches to human prob- 
lems. It will include practical discussions of 
social behavioral differences as they relate to 
stress and conflict in people's lives. Prere- 
quisite: Sociology-Anthropology 1 10 andlor 
Psychology 110 or consent of instructor. 

223 INTRODUCTION TO 
LAW ENFORCEMENT 

Principles, theories, and doctrines of the law 
of crimes, elements in crime, analysis of 
criminal investigation, important case law. 
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 115 
or consent of instructor. 

224 RURAL AND URBAN COMMUNITIES 
The concept of community is treated as it 
operates and affects individual and group 
behavior in rural, suburban, and urban set- 
tings. Emphasis is placed upon characteristic 
institutions and problems of modem city life . 
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 110 
or consent of instructor. 

225 INTRODUCTION TO 
CRIMINAL INVESTIGATION 

This course is designed for advanced crimin- 
al justice majors. Emphasis is placed on an 
in-depth study of detection and investigation 
of major crimes. Particular attention is 
placed on the use of criminalistics, legal pa- 
rameters of evidence and intertogation, and 
prosecutory procedures. Prerequisite: 
Sociology-Anthropology 223 or consent of 
instructor. Will not be counted toward the 
sociology/anthropology major. 

226 SOCIAL MOVEMENTS 

An analysis of the dynamics, stracture. and 
reactions to social movements with focus on 
contemporary social movements. Prere- 
quisite: Sociology-Anthropology 1 War con- 
sent of instructor. 

227 SOCIAL PROBLEMS 

The course examines the causes, characteris- 
tics, and consequences of social problems in 
America from diverse socio-cultural pers- 
pectives. Topics discussed typically include 
crime, urban crises, family disorganization, 
poverty, race problems, dmg abuse, and 
other related issues. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 110 or consent of instructor . 

228 AGING AND SOCIETY 

Analysis of cross-cultural characteristics of 
the aged as individuals and as members of 
groups. Emphasis is placed upon variables: 
health, housing, socio-economic status, per- 
sonal adjustment, retirement, and social par- 
ticipation. Sociological, social psychologic- 
al, and anthropological frames of reference 
utilized in analysis and description of aging 
and its relationship to society, culture, and 
personality. 



61 



229 CULTURAL ANTHROPOLOGY 

An examination of cultural and social anthro- 
pology designed to familiarize the student 
with the analytical approaches to the diverse 
cultures of the world. The relevancy of cultu- 
ral anthropology for an understanding of the 
human condition will be stressed. Topics to 
be covered include the nature of primitive 
societies in contrast to civilizations, the con- 
cept of culture and cultural relativism, the 
individual and culture, the social patterning 
of behavior and social control, an anthropo- 
logical perspective on the culture of the Un- 
ited States. 

300 CRIMINOLOGY 

Analysis of the sociology of law; conditions 
under which criminal laws develop; etiology 
of crime; epidemiology of crime, including 
explanation of statistical distribution of cri- 
minal behavior in terms of time, space, and 
social location. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 110 or consent of instructor. 

331 SOCIOLOGY OF WOMEN 

A sociological examination of the role of 
women in American society through an 
analysis of the social institutions which 
affect their development. Role-analysis 
theory will be applied to the past, present, 
and future experience of women as it relates 
to the role options of society as a whole. 
Students will do an original research project 
on the role of women. Prerequisite: Sociolo- 
gy-Anthropology 1 10. Alternate years. 

332 INSTITUTIONS 

Introduces the student to the sociological 
concept of social institution, the types of 
social institutions to be found in all societies, 
and the interrelationships between the social 
institutions within a society. The course is 
divided into two basic parts; 1 . That aspect 
which deals with the systematic organization 
of society in general, and 2. The concentra- 
tion on a particular social institution; econo- 
mic, political, educational, or social welfare. 
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 110 
or consent of instructor. 

333 SOCIOLOGY OF RELIGION 

An examination of the major theories of the 
relationship of religion to society and a sur- 
vey of sociological studies of religious be- 
havior. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 110 or consent of instructor. 

334 RACIAL AND 
CULTURAL MINORITIES 

Study of racial, cultural, and national groups 
within the framework of American cultural 
values. An analysis will include historical, 
cultural, and social factors underlying ethnic 
and racial conflict. Field trips and individual 
reports are part of the requirements for the 



course. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 110 or consent of instructor. 

335 CULTURE AND PERSONALITY 
Introduction to psychological anthropology, 
its theories and methodologies. Emphasis 
will be placed on the relationship between 
individual and culture, national character, 
cognition and culture, culture and mental 
disorders, and cross-cultural considerations 
of the concept of self. Prerequisite: Sociolo- 
gy-Anthropology 229 or consent of instruc- 
tor. Offered at least once e\ery three years. 

336 THE ANTHROPOLOGY OF 
PRIMITIVE RELIGIONS 

The course will familiarize the student with 
the wealth of anthropological data on the 
religions and world views developed by 
primitive peoples . The functions of primitive 
religion in regard to the individual, society, 
and various cultural institutions will be ex- 
amined. Subjects to be surveyed include 
myth, witchcraft, vision quests, spirit pos- 
session, the cultural use of dreams, and re- 
vitalization movements. Particular emphasis 
will be given to shamanism, tran,scultural 
religious experience, and the creation of 
cultural realities through religions. Both a 
social scientific and existentialist perspective 
will be employed. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 229 or consent of instructor. 
Alternate years. 

337 THE ANTHROPOLOGY 
OF AMERICAN INDIANS 

An ethnographic survey of native North 
American Indian and Eskimo cultures, such 
as the Iroquois, Plains Indians, Pueblos, 
Kwakiull. and Netsilik. Changes in native 
lifeways due to European contacts and Un- 
ited States expansion will be considered. Re- 
cent cultural developments among American 
Indians will be placed in an anthropological 
perspective . Offered at least once every three 
years. 

338 LEGAL AND POLITICAL 
ANTHROPOLOGY 

The course is designed to familiarize the stu- 
dent with the techniques of conflict resolu- 
tion and the utilization of public power in 
primitive society as well as the various 
theories of primitive law and government. 
The rise of the state and an anthropological 
perspective on modem law and government 
will be included. The concepts of self- 
regulation and social control, legitimacy, 
coercion, and exploitation will be the orga- 
nizing focus. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 229 or consent of instructor, 

339 THE AMERICAN PRISON SYSTEM 
Nature and history of punishment, evolution 
of the prison and prison methods with emph- 
asis on prison community, prison 



architecture, institutional programs, inmate 
rights, and sentences. Review of punishment 
versus treatment, detention facilities, jails, 
reformatories, prison organization and admi- 
nistration, custody, and discipline. Prere- 
quisite: Sociology-Anthropology 115. 

440 PROBATION AND PAROLE 

A course designed for the advanced criminal 
justice major. While the course concerns the 
study of probation and parole as parts of the 
criminal justice system and their impact on 
the system as a whole, the primary emphasis 
is the impact on the offender. Particular 
attention is given to diagnostic report writing 
on offenders, pre-sentence investigation, 
offender classification, and parole planning. 
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 115 
and 339. Alternate years. 

441 SOCIAL STRATIFICATION 

An analysis of stratification systems with 
specific reference to American society. The 
course will include an analysis of poverty, 
wealth, and power in the United States. Par- 
ticular attention will be given to factors 
which generate and maintain inequality, 
along with the impact of inequality on the 
lives of Americans. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 110 or consent of instructor. 

443 HUMAN SERVICES 

IN HELPING INSTITUTIONS 
The course examines the organizational and 
conceptual context within which human ser- 
vices are delivered in contemporary society. 
Subjects to be covered include ethnographic 
study of nursing homes, prisons, therapeutic 
communities, mental hospitals, and other 
human service institutions. The methodolo- 
gy of fieldwork will be explored so as to 
sensitize the student to the socio-cultural 
dimensions of helping environments and re- 
lationships. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 110 or Sociology- 
Anthropology 229 or consent of instructor. 
Alternate years. 

444 SOCIAL THEORY 

The history of the development of sociolo- 
gical thought from its earliest philosophical 
beginnings is treated through discussions and 
reports. Emphasis is placed upon sociologic- 
al thought since the time of Comte. Prere- 
quisite: Sociology-Anthropology 1 10 or con- 
sent of instructor. 

445 ANTHROPOLOGICAL THEORY 

The history of the development of anthropo- 
logical thought from the 18th century to the 
present. Emphasis is placed upon anthropo- 
logical thought since 1850. Topics include 
evolutionism, historical -particularism, 
cultural idealism, cultural materialism, func- 
tionalism. structuralism, and ethnoscience. 
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 229 



62 



or consent of Instructor. Offered at least 
once every three years. 

446 PEOPLE AND CULTURES OF 
THE AMERICAN SOUTHWEST 

Field experience in the analysis of tricultural 
communities of Northern New Mexico, 
Southern Colorado, and Northeastern Arizo- 
na, including the eastern Pueblos of New 
Mexico; Zuni, Navajo, and Apache reserva- 
tions; isolated Spanish-American mountain 
villages of Northern New Mexico; religious 
ashrams and communes; and cities of the 
Southwest and Juarez. Mexico. Emphasis 
upon Taos, Rio Arriba. Sante Fe, and Los 
Alamos counties of New Mexico. Prere- 
quisite: Sociology 110 or consent of Instruc- 
tor. May or summer only. 

447 RESEARCH METHODS IN 
SOCIOLOGY-ANTHROPOLOGY 

Study of the research process in sociology- 
anthropology. Attention is given to the pro- 
cess of designing and administering research 
and the application of research. Different 
methodological skills are considered, includ- 
ing field work, questionnaire construction, 
and other methods of data gathering and the 
analysis of data. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 110 and Mathematical 103 or 
consent of instructor. 

448-449 PRACTICUM IN SOCIOLOGY 

Introduces the student to a practical work 
experience involving community agencies in 
order to effect a synthesis of the student's 
academic course work and its practical ap- 
plications in a community agency. Specifics 
of the course to be worked out in conjunction 
with department, student, and agency. Pre- 
requisite: Sociology-Anthropology 110 or 
consent of instructor. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Interns in sociology-anthropology typically 
work off campus with social service agencies 
under the supervision of administrators. 
However, other internship experiences, such 
as with the Lycoming County Historical 
Museum, are available. Interns in criminal 
justice work off campus in criminal justice 
agencies, such as penal institutions and prob- 
ation and parole departments, under the su- 
pervision of administrative personnel. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
An opportunity to pursue specific interests 
and topics not usually covered in regular 
courses. Through a program of readings and 
tutorials, the student will have the opportun- 
ity to pursue these interests and topics in 
greater depth than is usually possible in a 
regular course. 



490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 



THEATRE 



Professor: Falk (Chairperson) 
Associate Professor: Allen 
Part-Time Instructor; Clark 

The major consists of eight courses: 
Theatre 100 and seven others; a concen- 
tration in acting, directing, or design is 
possible. In addition to the course re- 
quirements, majors are expected to par- 
ticipate actively in Arena Theatre pro- 
ductions. Majors are urged to include 
courses in art, music, psychology, and 
English, or other areas of special in- 
terest. 

Three minors are available in the 
Theatre department. A minor in Theatre 
Histor\- and Literature consists of Thea- 
tre 100, 332, 333, 335, and 400. The 
following courses are required to com- 
plete a minor in Performance: Theatre 
100, 140, 226. 334, 336, and either 332 
or 333. To obtain a minor in Technical 
Theatre, a student must complete 
Theatre 100, 148, 228, 338, and 420 or 
430. 

The fine arts distribution requirement 
may be satisfied by selecting any two of 
the following recommended courses: 
Theatre 100, 110, 140, 148, 332, 333 or 
other courses with the consent of the in- 
structor. 

100 INTRODUCTION TO THEATRE 

Designed as a comprehensive introduction to 
the aesthetics of theatre . From the spectator' s 
point of view, the nature of theatre will be 
explored, including dramatic literature and 
the integral functioning of acting, directing. 
and all production aspects. 

1 10 INTRODUCTION TO HLM 

A basic course in understanding the film 
medium. The class will investigate film tech- 
nique through lectures and by viewing regu- 
lar weekly films chosen from classic, con- 
temporary, and experimental short films. 

140 INTRODUCTION TO ACTING 

An introductory study of the actor's prepara- 
tion with emphasis on developing the actor's 



creative imagination through improvisations 

and scene study. 

148 INTRODUCTION TO 
PLAY PRODUCTION 

Stagecraft and the various other aspects of 
play production are introduced. Through 
material presented in the course and labora- 
tory work on the Arena Theatre stage, the 
student will acquire experience to produce 
theatrical scenery. 

226 INTRODUCTION TO DIRECTING 

An introductory swdy of the function of the 
director in preparation, rehearsal, and per- 
formance. Emphasis is placed on developing 
the student's ability to analyze scripts, and 
on the development of the student's imagina- 
tion. Prerequisite: Theatre 140. 

228 INTRODUCTION TO SCENE 
DESIGN AND STAGECRAFT 
An introduction to the theatre with an emph- 
asis on stagecraft. Productions each semester 
serve as the laboratory to provide the practic- 
al experience necessary to understand the 
material presented in the classroom. Prere- 
quisite: Theatre 148 or consent of Instructor. 

231 ADVANCED TECHNIQUES 
OF PLAY PRODUCTION 

A detailed consideration of the interrelated 
problems and techniques of play analysis, 
production styles, and design. Offered sum- 
mer only. 

232 FUNDAMENTALS OF MAKEUP 
Essentials of stage makeup; straight, charac- 
ter, special types. Effects of light on makeup 
are included. Prerequisite: Theatre 148. 
One-half unit. Alternate years. 

233 ADVANCED MAKEUP 

Advanced techniques in makeup design. 
Three dimensional and prosthetic makeups 
are included, with emphasis on nonrealistic 
and nonhuman forms. Prerequisite: Theatre 
232. One-half unit. Alternate years. 

332 HISTORY OF THEATRE I 

A detailed study of the development of 
theatre from the Greeks to the Restoration. 
Alternate years. 

333 HISTORY OF THEATRE II 

The history of the theatre from 1660. Alter- 
nate years. 

334 INTERMEDIATE STUDIO; ACTING 
Instruction and practice in character analysis 
and projection with emphasis on vocal and 
body techniques. Prerequisite: Theatre 140. 



63 



335 THEORIES OF THE 
MODERN THEATRE 

An advanced course exploring the philo- 
sophical roots of the modem theatre from the 
birth of realism to the present and the influ- 
ences on modem theatre practice. Selected 
readings from Nietzsche, Marx. Jung, 
Freud, Whitehead, Kierkegaard, Sartre, 
Camus, Antoine, Copeau, Stanislavski, 
Shaw. Meyerhold, Artaud, Brecht, Brook, 
Grotowski. Alternate years. 

336 INTERMEDIATE STUDIO: DIRECTING 

Emphasis is placed on the student's ability to 
function in preparation and rehearsal. Prac- 
tical experience involves the directing of two 
one-act plays from the contemporary theatre. 
Prerequisite: Theatre 226. 

337 PLAYWRITING AND 
DRAMATIC CRITICISM 

An investigation of the techniques of play- 
writing with an emphasis on creative writing, 
culminating in a written one-act play, plus an 
historical survey of dramatic criticism from 
Aristotle to the present with emphasis upon 
developing the student's ability to write re- 
views and criticism of theatrical productions 
and films. Alternate years. 

338 INTERMEDIATE STUDIO: 
LIGHTING DESIGN 

The theory of stage and lighting design with 
emphasis on their practical application to the 
theatre. Prerequisite: Theatre 148orconsent 
of instructor. 

400 MASTERS OF WORLD DRAMA 

An intensive and detailed analysis of the 
plays and related works, including criticism 
of great authors, that have shaped world 
theatre. Authors to be selected on the basis of 
interest of students and faculty. At limes, 
more than one author will be treated in a 
term. Ibsen, Brecht, Moliere, Williams, 
Albee. Alternate years. May be accepted to- 
ward English major with consent of English 
Department. 

420 ADVANCED STUDIO: 
COSTUME DESIGN 

The theory of costuming for the stage, ele- 
ments of design, planning, production, and 
constmction of costumes for the theatre Stu- 
dents will participate in the design of a pro- 
duction. Prerequisite: Theatre 148 or con- 
sent of instructor. 

430 ADVANCED STUDIO: 
PROPERTIES DESIGN 
The theory of properties design for the stage , 
including the production of specific prop- 
erties for staging use. Elements of design, 
fabrication, and the constmction of prop- 
erties employing a variety of materials and 



the application of new theatrical technology. 
Prerequisite: Theatre 148 or consent of in- 
structor. 

440 ADVANCED STUDIO: ACTING 

Preparation of monologues and two- 
character scenes, contemporary and classic- 
al. The student will appear in major campus 
productions. Prerequisite: Theatre 334. 

446 ADVANCED STUDIO: DIRECTING 

Emphasis will be placed on the student's 
ability to produce a major three-act play from 
the script to the stage for public performance. 
Prerequisite: Theatre 336. 

448 ADVANCED STUDIO: DESIGN 

Independent work in conceptual and practic- 
al design. The student will design one full 
production as his major project. Prere- 
quisites: Theatre 228 or 338 and consent of 
instructor. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Interns in theatre work off campus in theatres 
such as the Guthrie Theatre, Minneapolis, 
and at the New Jersey Shakespeare Festival. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Some recent independent studies have been 
the roles of women as characters in drama, 
scene design, and lighting design for an Are- 
na production. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 

A typical study could be the writing and 

production of an original play. 

THEATRE PRACTICUM 

Students may receive academic credit for 
supervised participation in the various 
aspects of technical production, rehearsal, 
and performance of the Theatre Depart- 
ment's major presentations in the Arena 
Theatre. Credit for Theatre Practicum is 
earned on a fractional basis. Students may 
register for one-half semester hour course 
credit for active participation in a major pro- 
duction in the designated areas of technology 
and performance, limited to one semester 
hour credit per semester and eight semester 
hours over four years. Theatre Practicum 
credit may not be used to satisfy distribution 
requirements in Fine Arts. Students may not 
register for Theatre Practicum while taking 
Theatre 100 (Introduction to Theatre) or 
Theatre 148 (Play Production) without per- 
mission of the instructor. When scheduling, 
students should register for Theatre Practi- 
cum in addition to the normal four academic 
courses. Because students may not be cast or 
assigned duties in time to meet the drop/add 



deadline, late registration for Theatre 160 
and 161 (Technical Theatre), (Rehearsal and 
Performance) will be permitted without 
penalty . 

160 TECHNICAL THEATRE PRACTICUM 

Participation in a major production of the 
Arena Theatre in one or more of the follow- 
ing technical areas: scene construction, 
scene painting, lighting, sound, properties, 
costume, make-up. A minimum of 50 hours 
is required. May be repeated for credit. One- 
half credit hour. Prerequisite: Consent oj 
instructor. 

161 REHEARSAL AND PERFORMANCE 
PRACTICUM 

Participation in a major production of the 
Arena Theatre in one or more of the follow- 
ing rehearsal and performance areas: acting 
in a major or minor role, stage manager, 
director, assistant director, choreographer. 
A minimum of 50 hours is required. May be 
repeated for credit. One-half hour credit. 
Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 



WOMEN'S STUDIES 

Professor: Jensen 
(Coordinator) 

Although a major is not available in 
Women's Studies, a minor is possible. 
Courses required for the minor follow: 

History 310 — Women in History 
English 334 — Women in Literature 
Psychology 341 — Psychology of 

Women 
Art 339 — Women in Art 

With the approval of the coordinator, 
one of the four courses may be satisfied 
with Political Science 347: Women in 
Politics, or with an appropriate special 
course, or with an independent studies 
project. To receive credit for a minor in 
Women's Studies, a student must main- 
tain at least a 2.0 average in courses 
taken for that minor. 



64 




1987 Sobel Peace Prize recipient Elie Wiesel delivered the IVH? commencement address at 
Lycoming. Dr. Wiesel received an honorary doctor of humane letters degree. 



65 



Student Services 



ADMINISTRATION 

The program of student services at 
Lycoming is administered by the Office 
of Student Services. It is designed to 
respond to a diversity of student needs. 
Professional staff members are assigned 
the specific responsibilities of: 

— career counseling and place- 
ment; 

— residence life; 

— student activities; 

— religious life; 

— health services; 

— study skills; 

— student orientation; 

— judiciary-student conduct 

All members of the staff are available 
to counsel and advise individual stu- 
dents. 



PERSONAL COUNSELING 

Members of the staff of the Office 
of Student Services are qualified and 
available to provide non-therapeutic 
assistance to students with adjustment 
problems. A full time counseling psy- 
chologist provides short term therapy for 
students needing assistance in the areas 
of emotional /mental health and substance 
abuse. Continuing therapy is available 
through referrals to public agencies and 
private clinicians in the Williamsport 
community. Financial arrangements for 
these referral services are made directly 
by the student with the agency and/or 
individual clinician involved. 



CAREER DEVELOPMENT 
SERVICES 

The Career Development Center pro- 
vides services which are designed to help 
students identify their abilities and in- 
terests, set realistic career goals, and 
plan academic programs to meet these 
goals. Counseling for Lycoming stu- 
dents begins in the freshman year. 

In addition to individual guidance, the 
center maintains a library on specific 



careers, employment outlooks, and 
career trends. Services offered by the 
center include: 

— individual counseling; 

— DISCOVER a computer assisted 
career guidance system provides in- 
formation to students about themselves 
and the world of work; 

— SHARE (Students Having a Real 
Experience), a program in which stu- 
dents observe and work with a profes- 
sional in the field; 

— placement services to aid seniors in 
implementing their career plans; 

— assistance to students in securing 
internships, summer employment, and 
part-time employment; 

— speaker's program which brings 
professionals from a variety of careers to 
campus seminars; 

— video-cassette programs relating to 
job skills and career information; 

— microfiche copies of graduate- and 
professional-school catalogs for the Un- 
ited States and abroad. 



RESIDENCE AND 
RESIDENCE HALLS 

Single students under 23 years of age 
who do not live at the home of their 
parents are required to live in residence 
halls and eat in the dining room. All new 
resident students are forwarded a room- 
agreement form to sign after confirma- 
tion of their admission to Lycoming. 
This agreement is renewed each spring. 
Residence students assume responsi- 
bility for their rooms and furnishings. 
The College reserves the right to enter 
and inspect any room for reasons of dam- 
age, health, or safety, and to search any 
room when there is reason to believe a 
violation of College rules or the law is 
occurring or has occurred. Charges are 
assessed for damage to rooms, doors, 
furniture and common areas. Wherever 
possible, damage to dormitory property 
will be charged to the person or persons 
directly responsible. Damage and break- 
age occurring in a room will be the re- 
sponsibility of students occupying the 
room. Hall and bathroom damage will be 



the responsibility of the section where 
damage occurs. 

Residence halls are not available for 
occupancy during the vacation periods. 
Quiet hours for study purposes, which 
are established by residence hall councils 
or the Office of Student Services, are 
published in the student handbook and 
posted on bulletin boards. 

Room visitation by members of the 
opposite sex is permitted in the halls 
under conditions established by the Col- 
lege in cooperation with the various resi- 
dence hall councils, which share respon- 
sibility for developing and monitoring 
regulations, and which are organized 
each fall semester before visitation sche- 
dules are established. 

STUDENT ACTIVITIES 

Student Activities offers assistance 
and advice for all campus programs and 
student organizations. Through the 
efforts of the Campus Activities Board 
(C.A.B.) programming is provided for 
all facets of the student population. The 
Wertz Advisory Board oversees the 
functional aspects of the Wertz Student 
Center and works to create an atmos- 
phere which best serves the social and 
recreational needs of the students. Stu- 
dent Activities is also responsible for 
Leadership Training and the Student 
Orientation Staff; in addition, it provides 
support and direction for student govern- 
ment, the Interfratemity and Panhellenic 
Councils and the retention program. 

RELIGIOUS LIFE 

The United Campus Ministry, staffed 
by a Protestant Minister and a Roman 
Catholic Priest, provides a wide range of 
activities in support of the religious lives 
of students. Ecumenical and inclusive in 
nature, campus ministry at Lycoming 
provides worship services, service pro- 
jects, social occasions, retreats, study 
opportunities and personal counseling. 
The chaplains live on campus and are 
available to students for a variety of 
situations in which they might need sup- 
port, counsel or direction. 



66 



HEALTH SERVICES 

Normal medical treatment by the 
health service staff at the College is 
provided without cost to the student. 
During the fall and spring semesters, the 
College maintains an outpatient service 
in Rich Hall. It is staffed with a reg- 
istered nurse five days a week from 8:00 
a.m. to 4:30 p.m. The College physician 
is available from 11 a.m. to 12 noon, 
Monday through Friday. At other times, 
emergency care is available at the emer- 
gency rooms of Williamsport and Divine 
Providence Hospitals, located a short 
distance from the campus. 

Medical service charges paid by the 
student are: emergency room and emer- 
gency room physician's charges, special 
medications. X-rays, surgery, care for 
major accidents, immunizations, exami- 
nations for glasses, physician's visits 
other than in the health service, referrals 
for treatment by specialists, special 
nursing services and special services. 

Entering students must provide basic 
health information to the College between 
the time of admission and the beginning 
of classes of the term to which they are 
admitted. Information provided by the 
student and his/her physician is con- 
fidential and is available only to health 
service staff and the dean of student 
services. 

All students are required to carry 
accident-sickness medical insurance. Pre- 
paid medical insurance is a requirement 
for participation in intercollegiate 
athletics. Lycoming College does offer 
a student plan that is voluntary and at 
the students' expense. 



STUDENT ORIENTATION 

New students at Lycoming are re- 
quired to attend one of three summer 
orientation sessions with at least one 
parent before they enroll in the fall. The 
purpose of the program is to acquaint 
new students and their parents with the 
College more fully so that new students 
begin their Lycoming experience under 
the most favorable circumstances. In 
addition, all new students are required 



to attend a two day orientation program 
which is held immediately prior to the 
beginning of the fall semester. Infor- 
mation on orientation is mailed to 
new students after they confirm their 
admission. 



STANDARDS OF CONDUCT 

Lycoming students are expected to 
accept responsibilities required of adults . 
The rights of every member of the Col- 
lege community are protected by estab- 
lished regulations. Although the accept- 
ance of the College's standards of be- 
havior is an individual responsibility, it 
also calls for group responsibility. Stu- 
dents should influence their peers to con- 



duct themselves responsibly for the col- 
lective good. 

Students who are unable to demons- 
trate that they have accepted these re- 
sponsibilities or who fail to abide by 
established policies may be dismissed at 
any time or denied readmission for a sub- 
sequent term or semester. Further, after 
the conclusion of any term or semester, 
the College may deny a student the pri- 
vilege of attending any subsequent term 
or semester when the administration 
deems this to be in the best interest of the 
College. 

Students are given a handbook which 
contains the College's official policies, 
rules and regulations. These policies, 
rules and regulations are part of the con- 
tractual agreement students enter into 
when they register at Lycoming. 




67 



Admission to Lycoming 



Lycoming College welcomes appli- 
cations from prospective students 
regardless of age, sex, race, religion, 
financial resources, color, national or 
ethnic background. 

HIGH SCHOOL SENIORS 

High school senior applicants for 
admission must complete the following 
steps: 

1) Submit the completed Lycoming 
College Admission Application; 

2) Submit the non-refundable $25.00 
Admission Application Fee; 

3) Provide official transcripts of all 
high school, and postsecondary 
school studies (whether or not 
completed); 

4) Submit official Scholastic Apti- 
tude Test (SAT), or American 
College Test (ACT) or Prueba de 
Aptitud Academica (PAA) results; 

5) Submit one (1) written evaluation 
form (the form is included as part 
of the admission application); 

6) Submit one short (100-150 word) 
essay. The essay should address 
the applicant's educational objec- 
tives and career goals, and the 
manner in which an education at 
Lycoming College will assist in 
achieving these objectives and 
goals. 



TRANSFER APPLICANTS 

Lycoming College considers applica- 
tions from students who have attended 
other post-secondary educational insti- 
tutions. These applicants must be in 
good academic standing and have 
earned a cumulative grade point average 
of at least 2.0 (on a 4 point scale) in 
transferable courses at the post- 
secondary institution(s) attended. 

Transfer applicants must complete 
each of the following steps: 

1) Complete the admission process 
outlined earlier for high school 
seniors; 

2) Provide official transcripts of all 
high school, and postsecondary 
school studies (whether or not 
completed); 



3) Arrange for the Admission with 
Advanced Standing (AWAS) form 
to be completed by the Student 
Affairs Office at the last post- 
secondary school attended. 
Transfer applicants who have com- 
pleted a minimum of one full year (24 
semester or 36 quarter hours) of 
coursework which is transferable to the 
College are not required to submit SAT, 
PAA or ACT results. 

Applicants may transfer up to 64 
semester credits of lower division 
coursework, and up to 32 semester 
credits of upper division coursework for 
a total of 96 credits. Students must com- 
plete the final 32 credits of their degree 
program at Lycoming College. 

Additional information regarding the 
transfer of college credit appears on 
page 12. 

ADMISSION OF OLDER- 
THAN-AVERAGE STUDENTS 

Lycoming College recognizes the 
unique contributions of older-than- 
average students to the college classroom 
setting. The College also recognizes that 
older-than-average candidates for admis- 
sion may possess non-traditional edu- 
cational backgrounds, and that the 
traditional criteria utilized during the 
admission evaluation process may not 
always be appropriate. To that end, the 
submission of SAT or ACT results are 
not required for applicants who are at 
least 25 years of age. 

Older-than-average applicants must 
demonstrate through the admission 
process that their combined work 
experience and formal education pre- 
dicts a reasonable opportunity for 
success at Lycoming College. Older- 
than-average applicants must satisfy the 
following application requirements to 
qualify for admission consideration: 

1) Submit a completed Admission 
Application (with fee); 

2) Provide official transcripts of 
all secondary and post-secondary 
studies (whether or not completed); 

3) Submit official proof of secondary 
school graduation, or completion 
of the GED; 



4) Submit a total of iwo recommen- 
dations from employers and/or 
former secondary or post-secondary 
Instructors; 

5) Applicants who have attended a 
post-secondary institution are 
required to submit a completed 
Admission with Advanced Stand- 
ing (AWAS) form; 

6) Participate in an Admission Inter- 
view. 

INTERNATIONAL APPLICANTS 

Prospective students who are neither 
citizens nor permanent residents of the 
United States are welcome to apply for 
admission. 

International applicants must com- 
plete each of the following steps: 

1) Submit the completed Lycoming 
College Admission Application; 

2) Submit the completed Lycoming 
College Supplemental Applica- 
tion for International Students; 

3) Submit the non-refundable $25.00 
Admission Application Fee; 

4) Provide certified true copies of 
all secondary (and when applic- 
able, post-secondary) transcripts, 
mark sheets, diplomas and certifi- 
cates in the original languages, 
as well as in English (when the 
originals are not in English). 
Translations of non-English mate- 
rials must be certified as true and 
correct; 

5) Submit one (1) written evaluation 
(the form is included as part of the 
admission application); 

6) Submit one short (100-150 word) 
essay. The essay should address 
the applicant's educational ob- 
jectives and career goals, and the 
manner in which an education at 
Lycoming College will assist in 
achieving these objectives and 
goals; 

7) Arrange for the Admission with 
Advanced Standing form (AWAS) 
to be completed by the Student 
Affairs Office at the last post- 
secondary school attended (if 
transferring from a post-secondary 
school within the United States); 



68 



I 



8) Please note that the minimum 
amount required for each aca- 
demic year of study (September 
through April) at Lycoming Col- 
lege is U.S. $14,000. Summer 
living expenses (May through 
August) average an additional 
U.S. $2,000, and are not included 
in $14,000 amount; 

9) Provide proof of the ability to 
read, write and speak English at 
the college level as evidenced by 
at TOEFL score of at least 550, 
or comparable evidence of Eng- 
lish language fluency; 

10) International students who are 
currently studying in the United 
States must be "in-status" with 
the United States Department of 
Justice, Immigration and Natur- 
alization Service. They must also 
be eligible to transfer to Lycoming 
College. 

STUDENTS WITH LEARNING 
DIFFERENCES (Sometimes Referred 
To As Learning Disabilities 

Each year, Lycoming College 
receives a number of applications from 
prospective students who have volun- 
tarily identified themselves as individu- 
als with learning differences. 

These prospective applicants com- 
plete the appropriate admission applica- 
tion procedure outlined earlier (for high 
school seniors, college transfers, or 
international students), except that 
alternate format SAT or ACT results 
may be substituted for timed test results. 

Additional materials in support of 
the admission application are required. 
These supplemental materials should 
include: 

1) Recent Wechsler Intelligence Scale 
for Children-Revised (WISC-R) 
results, or Recent Wechsler Adult 
Intelligence Scale-Revised (WAIS-R) 
results; 

2) Current educational evaluation 
reports and Individualized Educa- 
tion Plans (lEPs) when applicable. 

3) Letters of recommendation from 
special education instructors and/ 
or counselors which address the 



compensatory strategies required 
to help insure the applicant's suc- 
cess in college. 
Finally, applicants are encouraged to 
meet with the college counselor to dis- 
cuss services available for students with 
learning differences at the College. 

ADMISSION APPLICATION 
FILING PERIOD 

Applications for the Fall Semester 
will be accepted from June 1st of the 
preceding year through March 30th of 
the year in which studies are to begin. 
Applications for the Spring Semester are 
accepted from the preceding May 1st 
through October 31st. A limited number 
of applications may be considered on a 
space-available basis up to one month 
prior to the beginning of the semester. 

Applications, when complete, are 
reviewed and evaluated on a rolling 
basis. Generally, applicants are noti- 
fied, in writing, regarding the outcome 
of their applications within three weeks 
following the receipt of all required 
materials. 



ADMISSION DECISION 
CRITERIA 

Admission to Lycoming College is 
competitive. Applicants are evaluated 
on the basis of their academic prepara- 
tion, talents, and interests, as well as the 
College's capacity to help them achieve 
their educational objectives and career 
goals. 

Successful candidates for admission 
have typically completed a college pre- 
paratory program in high school which 
includes four years of English, three 
years of math, two years of foreign lan- 
guage, two years of natural or physical 
science, three years of social science, 
and two years of academic electives. 

In addition, successful admission 
candidates generally place in the top two- 
fifths of their high school graduating 
class, and have better than average SAT, 
ACT, or PAA scores, as well as a better 
than average high school grade point 
average. 



From time to time, supplemental 
materials, as well as a personal inter- 
view may be required prior to the deter- 
mination of admissibility. 

CONFIRMATION OF INTENT 
TO ENROLL AT LYCOMING 

Admitted applicants must confirm 
their intent to enroll for the Fall Semes- 
ter no later than the preceding May 1st, 
or by November 1st for the following 
Spring Semester by submitting the 
appropriate deposit. Non-resident, com- 
muting students are required to submit 
a SlOO Tuition Deposit. Resident 
students are required to submit the SlOO 
Tuition Deposit, as well as a SlOO Room 
Reservation Fee. Admitted international 
applicants are required to submit all 
applicable deposits prior to the issuance 
of the 1-20 form. 

Deposits are non-refundable, after 
May 1st for the following Fall Semester, 
and November 1st for the following 
Spring Semester. 

WITHDRAWAL OF ADMISSION 
OFFERS 

Lycoming College reserves the right to 
withdraw offers of admission when: 

1) information requested as part of 
the admission application process 
is not provided by applicants, or 
misrepresentation of fact to the 
College by applicants occur dur- 
ing the application process; 

2) the conduct of applicants is not 
in keeping with the ethical or 
moral standards as set forth in 
the Lycoming College Catalog or 
the Lycoming College Student 
Handbook. 



69 



ADMISSIONS OFFICE 
LOCATION AND HOURS 

Prospective students and their fami- 
lies are encouraged to visit the campus 
for a student-conducted tour and an 
interview with an admissions counselor, 
who will provide additional information 
about the College and answer questions. 

The Admissions Office is located on 
Washington Blvd. and College Lane. 
For an appointment, telephone 1-800- 
345-3920 or (717) 321-4026, or write 
Office of Admissions, Lycoming Col- 
lege, Williamsport, PA 17701. Office 
hours are: 

Weekdays — September through April 
8 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. 

— May through August 

8 a.m. to 4 p.m. 
Saturdays — September through April 

9 a.m. to 12 noon 

— May through August 
No Saturday hours 




Rich Hall, women 's residence dormilory 



70 



Financial Matters 



EXPENSES FOR ENTRY FEES AND DEPOSITS 
THE ACADEMIC YEAR 1989-90 

Application Fee — All students for 

The following expenses are effective admission must submit a $25 application 

for the regular fall and spring semesters. fee. This charge defrays the cost of pro- 

The College reserves the right to adjust cessing the application and is nonrefund- 

fees at any time. The fees for each semes- able. 

ter are payable not later than the second Admission Deposit — After students 

day of classes for the semester. have been notified of their admission to 

Lycoming, they are required to make a 

$100 admissions deposit to confirm their 

^" ^'^ intention to matriculate. Students seek- 

„*** , c^T/in"^! ffion ine residence must submit an additional 

Comprehensive $4,640 $9,280 "^ . 

Board and Room Rent 1,700 3,400 $100 room-reservation deposit. All de- 
Total $6,340 $12,680 posits are applied to the general charges 

for the first semester of attendance. After 

One-Time Student Fees May 1. deposits are nonrefundable. 

Applicanon Fee $ 25 Contingency Deposit - A contmg- 

Admissions Deposit 100 ency deposit of $100 is required of all 

Contingency Deposit 100 full-time Students as a guarantee for pay- 
Room Reservation Deposit 100 nient of damage to or loss of College 

property, for library and parking fines, or 

similar penalties imposed by the Col- 

Part-Time Student Fees 1^^^ j^^ ^^p^^^j j^ ^^,1^^^^ ^ 3,^„g ^^j, 

Application Fee $25 other charges for the initial semester. 

Each Unit Course $1,160 j^^ hsAmcc of this deposit is refunded 

after all debts to the College have been 

Additional Charges paid, either upon graduation or upon 

Applied Music Fee (half-hour per week written request submitted to the Registrar 

per semester $150 j^q weeks prior to voluntary permanent 

Cap and Gown Rental prevailing cost . ■ .■ c n . » i 

Laboratory Fee per Unit Course... 5 to 50 termination of enrollment at Lycoming 

Reregistration Fee 25 College. 

Parking Permit (lor the academic year) . 10 to 15 

Parking Permit with Reserved Space PARTIAL PAYMENTS 

(lor the academic year) 15 to 35 

Practice Teaching Fee (Payable in r- i ir.i_i.rj 

Junior Year) $290 '' convenience or those who tind 

R.O.T C Uniform Deposit it impossible to follow the regular sche- 

(Payable at Bucknell University) 75 dule of payments, arrangements may be 

Transcript Fee 3 n^gje with the College Treasurer for the 

Health Services Fee $100 .u . r/^ ii c .u ..„u 

monthy payment of College fees through 
various educational plans. Additional in- 

The comprehensive fee covers the reg- formation concerning partial payments 

ular course load of three to four courses may be obtained from the Treasurer or 

each semester. Resident students must Director of Admissions, 
board at the College unless, for extraor- 
dinary reasons, authorization is extended 
for other eating arrangements. If a dou- 
ble room is used as a single room, there is 
an additional charge of $320 per semes- 
ter. The estimated cost for books and 
supplies is up to $300 per year, depend- 
ing on the course of study. Special ses- 
sion (May term and summer term) 
charges for tuition, room, and board are 
established during the fall semester. 



REFUNDS FOR STUDENTS 
WHO WITHDRAW 

Refunds of tuition and board are made 
to students who voluntarily and officially 
withdraw from the College while in good 
standing according to the following sche- 
dule for the fall and spring semesters and 
the comparable period for the May and 
summer terms: 



Refund Charge 
Period of Withdrawal % % 

During the first week 

of the semester 80 20 

During the second and 

third week 60 40 

During the fourth and 

fifth week 40 60 

During the sixth and 

seventh week 20 80 

After seven weeks 100 

No refunds are given to students who 
are suspended for disciplinary reasons. 

NON-PAYMENT OF 
FEES PENALTY 

Students will not be registered for 
courses in a new semester if their 
accounts for previous attendance have 
not been settled. Diplomas, transcripts, 
and certifications of withdrawals in good 
standing are issued only when a satisfac- 
tory settlement of all financial obliga- 
tions has been made in the Business 
Office. Final grades may also be held in 
some cases. 



FINANCIAL AID 

POLICY AND PROCEDURES 

The dominant factor in determining 
the amount of financial aid awarded to 
individual students is the establishment 
of need. Scholarships may be awarded 
on the basis of financial need and aca- 
demic ability, while grants are provided 
on the basis of financial need. Long- 
term, low-cost educational loans are 
available from federal and state sources 
to most students who can demonstrate 
need. Part-time employment is available 
to students. 

To apply for financial assistance, obtain 
Lycoming's Financial Aid/Scholarship 
Application (FASA) from the Financial 
Aid Office, the CSS Financial Aid Form 
(FAF), and if appropriate, your State 
Grant Application from the secondary 
school Guidance Office or Lycoming's 
Financial Aid Office. Submit the FASA 
to Lycoming and the other completed 
applications to the appropriate proces- 
sors as early as possible after January 1 . 



71 



Renewal applications are required an- 
nually. For additional information, 
including deadlines, see the Financial 
Aid Brochure. 

SCHOLARSHIPS AND GRANTS 

Admissions Recognition Scholarship. 

Contact an Admissions Counselor for 
information. 

Founders Scholarships of $5,000 are 
awarded to full-time Lycoming under- 
graduate students who rank in the top 
fifth of their high school graduating class 
and have combined SAT scores of at 
least 1200. Founders Scholarships are 
renewable for up to three additional 
years of continuous enrollment provided 
the student maintains a cumulative grade 
point average of 3.25. 

Trustees Scholarship is a full tuition 
scholarship. Recipients must be a high 
school graduate with a minimum high 
school GPA of 3.5, rank in the top 20% 
of their class and have SATs of at least 
1350. Renewal requires a minimum 3.35 
GPA and satisfactory academic progress. 

Valedictorian /Saluatorian Scholarship 
is a $3,600 award honoring graduates 
of private and public secondary schools 
who rank either first or second in their 
graduating class as certified by their 
guidance counselor. These awards are 
based upon academic achievement and 
are not contingent upon demonstrated 
financial need. Renewal cum is 3.25. 

Recognition Scholarships for $1,000 
to $3,000 per year are awarded to Fresh- 
men who have superior academic qualifi- 
cations and who have filed the FAF but 
did not demonstrate financial need as 
determined by the College Scholarship 
Service and were not eligible for another 
Lycoming Scholarship program. This 
scholarship is renewable if the recipient 
maintains a 3.00 cumulative average. 

Directors' Scholarships of $400 to full 
tuition, depending upon financial need, 
are awarded to students in the top fifth 
of their secondary school class with 
CEEB scores of 11 00 or more. Renewal 
cum is 3.00. 

Lycoming Grant-in-Aid awards of 
$400 to full tuition, depending upon 
financial need, are made to full-time 



students who do not qualify for scholar- 
ships and who have demonstrated financial 
need and the prospect of contributing 
positively to the College community. 
Renewal requires continued financial 
need and satisfactory citizenship stand- 
ards. 

Ministerial Grants are awarded to 
dependent children of United Methodist 
ministers and ordained ministers of other 
denominations. The grant amounts to 
one-third of tuition for children of 
United Methodist Ministers in the 
Central Pennsylvania Annual Confer- 
ence and one-fourth of tuition for all 
others. If a student completes the FAF, 
this grant will be part of the total aid 
award. 

Minority Scholarship is a tuition 
award of up to $3,000 which is available 
to ethnic minority high school graduates 
with a minimum high school GPA of 
3.25, rank in the top 30% of their 
class and have SATs of 900 or better. 
Recipients must Uve on campus and 
participate in 40 hours of supervised 
service to the college during each award 
year. Renewal requires a minimum 3.0 
GPA and making satisfactory academic 
progress. 

Pre-Ministerial Student Grants of one- 
fourth of tuition are awarded to students 
preparing for the Christian ministry who 
are enrolled full time and demonstrate 
financial need. Students must complete 
the pre-ministerial application available 
through the Financial Aid Office. 

Presidential Fellowships in Music are 
awarded each year to candidates nomi- 
nated by the Department of Music. 
Auditions and interviews are conducted 
annually by the Department. A tuition 
stipend of $250 is awarded for each 
semester the student serves as a Fellow. 
The recipients are expected to fulfill 
responsibilities assigned each semester by 
the Department with the primary respon- 
sibility being musical performance. To 
apply, contact the Chairman, Depart- 
ment of Music, Lycoming College. 

Two-in-Family Grants are awarded 
to each member of a family attending 
Lycoming College on a full-time basis at 
the same time. The amount is 10% of 
tuition, room, and/or board paid. Each 



member must be enrolled full time and 
not eligible for any other financial aid 
program of the College. If a student is 
eligible for other Lycoming aid, the 
student would receive whichever is 
greater. 

Applied Music Grant was established 
anonymously to be used to offset music 
fees for selected students taking advanced 
study in piano. Selection of recipients 
will be based upon talent and potential 
in piano. 

Art and Music Scholarship of $1 ,500 
is available to each new, selected student. 
It is awarded on the basis of juried 
competition on the 1st and 2nd Satur- 
days in April and is open to high school 
juniors and seniors and to freshman and 
sophomore college transfer students. 
Recipient must have SATs of at least 850 
and rank in the top 40% of their senior 
class. Renewal requires 2.0 cum GPA 
plus continued recommendation of 
Lycoming departmental faculty. 

Sculpture Scholarship of $1,500, but 
not to exceed need, is available for 
students seeking a BFA in Sculpture 
and who successfully complete a port- 
folio review. Students must also demon- 
strate financial need. Contact the Art 
Department. 

Two- Year Transfer Scholarships of 
$2,400 are awarded to the student trans- 
ferring from each two year institution 
with the best academic record. Must have 
completed a two-year program or 64 
credits and have at least a 3.25 cum 
GPA. On campus interview required. 
Renewable for one year if student main- 
tains 3.0 cum GPA. 

United Methodist Scholarships are 
awarded to full-time degree applicants 
who have a grade average of B or better, 
are active in Christian activities, are an 
active, full member of the Methodist 
Church, and have demonstrated financial 
need. The awards are normally $500 per 
year and the funds are provided by 
the United Methodist Church. Annual 
application is required. The student 
must complete and file the FAF and the 
scholarship forms which are available in 
the Financial Aid Office. 

Wyoming Conference Scholarship is 
granted by Lycoming for $500 to a 



72 



student chosen by the Scholarship Com- 
mittee of the Wyoming Conference. 
These are renewable for three additional 
years. Good academic performance and 
service to the church are the criteria for 
this award. 

Eph and Bess Baker Scholarship for 
$6,000 is available at $1,500 per year for 
four years awarded annually to a full- 
time student who exhibits academic 
promise and has a permanent residence 
in Lycoming County. Preference will be 
given, but not limited, to students who 
demonstrate need for financial assistance 
to attend Lycoming College. Renewal 
will be contingent upon maintaining 
a cum of at least 3.0 on a 4.0 scale. 
Recipient is chosen by the Director of 
Financial Aid. 

Ronald Beemer Memorial Scholarship 
of $350 is periodically awarded. 

Mary Strong dentins Scholarship of 
$250 for a student preparing for Christian 
ministry or for deaconess work or its 
equivalent in the United Methodist 
Church. 

Mabel L. Collins Scholarship of $250 
is available for a student from Hepburn 
Township; otherwise, to any other worthy 
student. 

C. Luther Culler Memorial Scholar- 
ship of $450 for a student is awarded 
based on Scholarship. 

Dewitt-Bodine Scholarship is awarded 
to the highest ranked student in the 
graduating class each year from Hughes- 
ville High School who attends Lycoming 
College. The recipient is designated by 
the Hughesville Guidance Counselor. 
The scholarship amount is $2,200 and is 
credited at $550 per year over four 
years of attendance at Lycoming. If the 
student is in a three-year program (such 
as Med-Tech), the award will be divided 
equally over the three-years' attendance 
at Lycoming. 

Clara Kramer Eaton Scholarship is 
awarded to the highest ranked student in 
the graduating class each year from Line 
Mountain High school who attends 
Lycoming College. The recipient is 
designated by the high school's guidance 
office. The scholarship is $400 per year 
for up to four years' attendance at 
Lycoming. 



Beryl Kline Glenn Scholarship of $300 
is periodically awarded to a deserving 
student majoring in music. 

David Grove and Wife Scholarship of 
$200 is periodically awarded to a needy 
student studying faith and ministry. 

Robert I. Hamilton Grant of $600 is 
available. Mr. Hamilton was a resident 
of South Williamsport. 

Esther M. Heefner Scholarship of 
$1,650 is available to help needy and 
deserving students. 

Edward P. Heether Scholarship is 
available to help needy and deserving 
students, who are in good academic 
standing. 

James A. Heether Scholarship for 
$500 is available based on financial need. 
Priority will be given to a chemistry 
major. 

George W. Huntley, Jr. Scholarship 
for $900 is available to help defray the 
tuition and expenses for the first year 
only of any graduate of Cameron County 
High School (formerly Emporium High 
School). The selection is made by the 
Superintendent of Schools, Cameron, 
PA. 

Amos Johnson Scholarship of $ 100 is 
available for the education of a min- 
isterial student of Hmited means. 

John T. and Mary Louise Keliher 
Scholarship of $200 is available for a 
deserving student "from the area". 

Morgan V. Knapp Endowed Music 
Scholarship is awarded in the ratio of 
75% of the fund to financially needy 
students, in satisfactory academic stand- 
ing, who are majoring in music or who 
are pursuing courses in vocal music, 
piano, or strings, in that priority order. 
Twenty-five percent of the fund is 
awarded as needed, on the recommen- 
dation of the Music Department Faculty, 
to students, who in their opinion should 
be encouraged to study privately in the 
areas of voice, piano, or strings, in that 
priority order. 

LAMCO Scholarship (formerly the 
Grit) of up to $2,250 is available for 
scholarship with the following selection 
priorities: 

1. children and grandchildren of 
employees of The Grit; 

2. graduates of high schools of the 



city of Williamsport; and 

3. graduates of high schools of 
Lycoming County. 

Doris Lennon Scholarship of $1,800 
is available to help dedicated young 
students preparing for church work in 
need of financial assistance. 

The Lycoming County Scholarship is 
an endowed scholarship which provides 
interest annually to be awarded to stu- 
dents whose permanent residence is in 
Lycoming County. Preference will be 
given to entering freshmen who demon- 
strate financial need. Recipients will be 
selected by the Director of Financial Aid. 

Eva Rupert McKelvy Memorial Schol- 
arship of $100 is available to help a 
worthy Christian girl. 

Mary Housenick Miller Scholarship is 
given to a Lycoming student majoring in 
History (preferably American History) 
with a preference to an individual who 
has attained at least sophomore status. 
The scholarship will continue until 
graduation subject to concurrence from 
the History Department. Selection pref- 
erence will be given but not limited to 
deserving students who demonstrate 
financial need. 

Earl Nearhoof Memorial Scholarship 
of $800 is available to assist young 
students entering Christian work with 
preference given to students from the 
Warriors Mark and Tyrone, PA areas. 

Ada Remely Memorial Scholarship 
is an award available to a currently 
enrolled female member of the Junior 
Class having completed 80 credit hours 
with at least a 3.0 cumulative average 
and who demonstrates financial need of 
at least the regular tuition rate. Appli- 
cations are available in the Financial Aid 
Office in February and are due in March. 
The award is normally $500 based on 
current earnings of the scholarship 
endowment. 

Mort Rauff Memorial Scholarship 
Fund provides annual interest which is 
awarded to a deserving full-time student 
who is in good academic standing. 
Preference is given to but not limited to 
an individual who demonstrates financial 
need and is an active member of the 
Lycoming College swimming team. 

Jennie M. Rich Memorial Scholarship 



73 



of $450 is available for worthy and needy 
students preparing for the Christian 
ministry of deaconess or missionary 
work. 

Margaret Rich and Elmer B. Staats 
Endowed Scholarship of up to $1 ,000 is 
available to an academically talented 
student who intends to pursue a career 
in public service. Preference given, but 
not limited, to individuals who have 
demonstrated need. 

Rich Scholarship is awarded periodi- 
cally to an academically outstanding 
student from Central Pennsylvania. 
The award varies from $200 to $650. 
Preference is given to a resident of 
the Woolrich area and children of the 
employees of the Woolrich Company. 

Leonard H. Rothermel Fund provides 
31,400 in grant to financially needy 
student(s) who are in satisfactory aca- 
demic standing with primary preference 
given to Trevorton residents and second- 
ary preference given to Line Mountain 
School District area students. 

Mary Landon Russell Applied Music 
Fund was established in recognition of 
her outstanding service to Lycoming 
College by alumni and friends during a 
special Homecoming celebration in 1985. 
This endowed fund provides financial 
assistance to qualified, talented students 
who seek advanced training in music. 

J. Milton Skeath Memorial Scholar- 
ship of $250 is available for a psychology 
major. 

Samuel iVillard Memorial Scholar- 
ships are awarded to a junior or senior 
student at Lycoming who is in need of 
financial assistance to complete his/her 
degree. Preference is given to a Religion 
Major. The award varies between $400 
and $700 depending upon available 
scholarship endowment income. 

H. Merrill Winner Memorial Scholar- 
ship of $400 is available periodically. 

Hiram and Elizabeth Wise Scholarship 
of $100 is available for a ministerial 
or missionary student who, because of 
present circumstances and promise of 
future usefulness shall, in the judgment 
of the President, be deemed worthy of 
the same. 

Dr. Paul E. Witmeyer Memorial 
Scholarship of $250 is available for a 



student interested in education. 

Donald C. Wolfe Memorial Scholar- 
ship of $400 is available for a worthy 
ministerial student to be selected by the 
Trustees. 

Raymond A. and L. Marie Zimmer- 
man Scholarship of $100 is available for 
the benefit of students preparing for the 
Christian ministry. 

FEDERAL AID 

Paul Douglas Teacher Scholarship is 

available to residents of Pennsylvania 
who rank in teh top 10 percent of their 
high school class and plan to enter the 
elementary or secondary teaching field. 
Scholarships are for up to $5,000 and the 
student must sign an agreement to teach. 
More information is available from 
your high school guidance counselor or 
Lycoming's Financial Aid Office. 

PELL Grants are awarded by the 
Federal government to eligible under- 
graduate students as determined by a 
standard Federal formula. The grants 
will range up to $2,300 for an academic 
year and are based on financial need as 
determined by the Federal Government 
formula. Application can be made when 
submitting the Financial Aid Form 
(FAF), the PHEAA State Grant Appli- 
cation, or by separate federal application 
on forms which are available in second- 
ary school guidance offices or the 
Financial Aid Office at Lycoming. For 
students who received their first Pell 
Grant award in the 1987-88 award year 
or thereafter, the duration of eligibility 
for a Pell Grant is limited to the full-time 
equivalent of 5 academic years of study 
if the student is enrolled in an under- 
graduate degree or certificate program of 
4 years or less. 

Supplemental Education Opportunity 
Grants are awarded to a limited number 
of undergraduate students who have 
exceptional need. Priority must be given 
to Pell Grant recipients. The award range 
is $100 to $4,000 per year. You need 
to file the FAF or the PHEAA Grant 
application to be considered for this 
award. 

STATE AID 

Pennsylvania Higher Education Assis- 



tance Agency (PHEAA) Grants are 

available for Pennsylvania residents 
meeting the residency requirements and 
financial requirements of the program. 
Awards range from $100 to $2,000 per 
year for up to four years. Direct appli- 
cation to Harrisburg on the PHEAA 
Grant application is required. The 
deadline for filing to receive consideration 
is normally May 1st. 

Scholars in Education A wards (SEA) 
are offered by PHEAA to PA residents 
who plan to teach math or science in a 
Pennsylvania secondary school. Must 
rank in the top fifth of your high school 
class, achieve at least a 3.0 (B) average 
on a 4.0 scale in math or science courses 
in high school and college, and score at 
least 1000 on the SATs (math must be 
at least 550) or on ACT have at least 22 
in English and 27 in math. Award is 50% 
of annual tuition. You must agree to 
teach math or science in a Pennsylvania 
secondary school. If you fail to keep the 
commitment the grant becomes a loan 
with interest. High school seniors should 
contact your guidance counselor. College 
students should contact Lycoming's 
Financial Aid Office. 

Other State Aid may be available to 
assist you at Lycoming College. Massa- 
chusetts, Ohio, Delaware, Rhode Island, 
and Connecticut have programs which 
allow their residents to use state grants 
at Lycoming. Contact your secondary 
school guidance office for specific 
information and application forms. 

LOAN PROGRAMS 

Perkins Loan (National Direct Student 
Loan Program) permits a total of $9,000 
to be borrowed by the undergraduate 
student at a rate not to exceed $4,500 the 
first two years. Preference must be given 
to those who have exceptional need. 
Applicants must complete the FAF 
through the College Scholarship Service. 
The repayment period and the interest 
does not begin until six months after the 
student is graduated or ceases at least 
half-time enrollment. Loans bear interest 
at the rate of 5% simple interest. Repay- 
ment of the principal may extend over 
a ten year period with the exception that 



74 



the Program requires repayment of not 
less than $30 per month. 

Stafford (formerly Guaranteed Stu- 
dent) Loan Program allows students to 
borrow up to $2,625 as a freshman or 
sophomore or up to $4,000 as a junior 
or senior per academic level not to exceed 
$17,250. 

Currently, the Federal Government 
pays the interest while the student is 
enrolled at least half-time. The simple 
interest rate ranges from 7-10 percent 
depending upon the date you first ob- 
tained a loan. Repayment usually extends 
over a period of up to ten years and 
begins six months after leaving school. 
Applications and information are avail- 
able from your bank or other leading 
institutions. 

PHEAA Alternative Loan of up to 
$10,000 is available to students attending 
a Pennsylvania school through PHEAA. 
Eligibility is based on your credit quali- 
fications and those of your cosigner. For 
more information request the PHEAA 
Help Loan Brochure or contact PHEAA, 
660 Boas Street, Harrisburg, PA 17102. 

PHEAA Nonsubsidized Stafford 
(GSL) Loan may be available to students 
attending a Pennsylvania school. The 
interest rates are the same as on the 
Subsidized Stafford; however, the 
interest on the Nonsubsidized Stafford 
must be paid on a quarterly basis while 
the student is enrolled in school and 
during the six-month grace period fol- 
lowing the in-school period. Students 
must not be eligible for a maximum 
subsidized Stafford and must not be 
packaged with SEOG, CWS, or Perkins 
Loan. The maximum loan amount is up 
to $2,625 minus Stafford subsidized 
eligibility for freshman and sophomore 
standing and $4,000 minus Stafford 
subsidized eligibility for junior and 
senior standing. Minimum loan amount 
is $500. 

PLUS/SLS Loans are meant to 
provide additional funds for educational 
expenses. The interest rate varies annually 
but will not exceed 12%. Parents of 
dependent undergraduate students or 
independent undergraduates may borrow 
up to $4,000 per year to a total of 
$20,000. Applications and information 



are available from your bank or other 
lending institution. 

United Methodist Student Loans are 
available on a very limited basis to 
students who are members of the United 
Methodist Church. The maximum amount 
which may be borrowed for an academic 
year is $1,000 subject to availability of 
funds. Information and applications 
are available through the Financial Aid 
Office. 

EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITIES 

Federal College Work-Study Program 
(CWSP) awards provide work oppor- 
tunities on campus. The program is 
funded by Federal funds supplemented 
by Lycoming funds. Students generally 
earn $500 to $1,500 per academic year 
and are normally limited to five to 
twenty hours per week during periods of 
regular enrollment. The purpose of the 
program is to provide employment to 
students who are in need of assistance to 
attend college. Applicants must complete 
the FAF or PHEAA Grant Application 
and Lycoming's Financial Aid/Scholar- 
ship Application (FASA). 

Lycoming Campus Employment 
Program opportunities are provided on 
campus to students enrolled full time 
who are not packaged with Federal 
Work-Study jobs. The earnings range up 
to $1 ,500 per year. Applicants must have 
a work supervisor complete a job request 
form from the Financial Aid Office. 

Other Job Opportunities are fre- 
quently available with local business 
firms or persons. Contact the Career 
Development Office of the College for 
information on these opportunities. 

OTHER AID SOURCES 

Williamsport Hospital Scholarship 

provides assistance to sophomore, junior, 
or senior nursing students who have at 
least a 2.5 cum average. Students selected 
must agree to provide the Williamsport 
Hospital with a minimum of six months 
of service as an employee in the Nursing 
Department for each $2,000 per year of 
award received. Awards of greater than 
$2,000 per year require one year of 
service for each year of award received. 
If the student does not work for the 



hospital, the award reverts to a loan. 

Non-College Aid Opportunities often 
are available through family employers 
or labor unions, business firms, fraternal 
and religious organizations, and second- 
ary schools. Contact your secondary 
school guidance office for information. 
Your parents should contact their em- 
ployer and organizations of which they 
are members for information on any 
financial aid sources. 

Veterans and Dependents Benefits are 
available for qualified veterans and 
children of deceased or disabled veterans. 
Application should be made to your 
nearest Veterans' Administration Office. 

Reserve Officers Training Corps 
(ROTC) Scholarships. Students who 
participate in Army ROTC are eligible 
for three, two, or one-year ROTC 
Scholarships to finance tuition, books, 
laboratory fees, and other charges with 
the exception of room and board. ROTC 
students may also receive $100 per 
month stipend during the academic year. 

Reserve Officers Training Corps 
(ROTC) Stipends. Students who partici- 
pate in the Army ROTC program receive 
$100 per academic month of their junior 
and senior years. They also receive half 
of a second lieutenant's pay plus travel 
expenses for a six-week advanced sum- 
mer camp between junior and senior 
years. 

Pennsylvania National Guard. Stu- 
dents participating in this program may 
be eligible for scholarship, credit pro- 
grams, educational bonus, or loan 
repayment. Contact a Guard unit in your 
area for more information. 

Tuition Exchange Grants. Lycoming 
College is a member of both the Tuition 
Exchange Program and the CICU Tui- 
tion Exchange Program. These programs 
are for dependent students of employees 
at participating institutions of higher 
education. You should contact the 
Tuition Exchange Officer at your spon- 
sor institution for information regarding 
sponsorship. 

Education Financing Plans. The 
Business Office at Lycoming provides 
information about plans which enable 
parents to pay college expenses on a 
monthly basis through selected companies. 



75 



The Campus 



Nineteen buildings sit on Lycoming's 
20-acre main campus. Most buildings 
have been constructed since 1950, even 
though Lycoming — one of America's 
50 oldest colleges and universities — 
dates back to 1812. All buildings are 
easy to reach from anywhere on cam- 
pus. A 12-acre athletic field and football 
stadium lie a few blocks north of the 
main campus. 

Modem buildings include the eight 
residence halls, which contain clean and 
comfortable single and double rooms; 
the student union; and the physical 
education/recreation center. Up-to-date 
facilities include the library theatre, the 
planetarium, the computer center, an 
electronic-music studio, a photography 
laboratory, and an art gallery. The com- 
puter center opened in 1969; the art gal- 
lery and physical education center 
opened in 1980. An arts center was 
renovated and opened in 1983. 

RESIDENTIAL 

Asbury Hall (1962) — Named in honor 
of Bishop Francis Asbury, the father of 
The United Methodist Church in Ameri- 
ca, who made the circuit through the 
upper Susquehanna District in 1812, the 
year Lycoming (then the Williamsport 
Academy) opened its doors. 
Crever Hall (1962) — Honors Lycom- 
ing's founder and first financial agent, 
the Rev. Benjamin H. Crever, who 
helped persuade the Baltimore Confer- 
ence to purchase the school from the 
Williamsport Town Council in 1848. 
East Hall (1962) — Houses most of the 
chapters of Lycoming's national frater- 
nities and other students. The self- 
contained fraternity units each contain 
rooms, a lounge, and a chapter room. 
All students share a large social area. 
Forrest Hall (1968) — Honors Dr. and 
Mrs. Fletcher Bliss Forrest and Anna 
Forrest Burfiendt '30, the parents and 
sister of Katherine Forrest Mathers '28, 
whose generosity established the memo- 
rial. 

Rich Hall (1948) — Honors the Rich 
family of Woolrich, Pennsylvania. 
Houses the health service, campus 
security, mail room, and the Sara J. 



Walter Lounge for commuting students. 
The Academic Resource Center opened 
in January, 1986, and is located in the 
North Lounge on the First Roor. It is 
manned by peer tutors and professional 
staff during specified hours on Sunday 
through Friday. 

Skeath Hall (1965) — The largest resi- 
dence hall. Honors the late J. Milton 
Skeath, professor of psychology and 
four-time Dean of the College from 
1921 to 1967. 

Wesley Hall (1956) — Honors John 
Wesley, the founder of Methodism. 
Williams Hall (1965) — Honors Mary 
Ellen Whitehead Williams, mother of 
Joseph A. Williams, of St. Marys, 
Pennsylvania, whose bequest estab- 
lished the memorial. 

ACADEMIC 

Academic Center (1968) — Probably 
the most architecturally impressive 
building on campus, the Center actually 
is composed of four buildings: the 
library, Wendle Hall, the Arena Theatre 
and laboratories, and the faculty office 
building. 

Library (1968): An active instruction 
program acquaints students with 
academic library strategies and supports 
their specific research in each discipline 
studied. Students become familiar with 
traditional methods of research as well as 
new information technologies utilizing 
computerized CD-ROM and online sear- 
ching. The collection includes more than 
155,000 volumes, approximately 1000 
periodical titles, and a strong reference 
section suitable to an undergraduate 
education. The library also serves as a 
partial depository for U.S. government 
publications. 

Other facilities in this wing: 

Art Gallery (1980): Located in the 
northwest comer of the first floor 
of the library, the gallery contains 
exhibits year-round, including 
shows of student work. 
College Computer Center (1969): 
Located in the lower level of the 



library, the center houses a 
PRIME 9755 which replaced the 
DEC PDPll/70 in December 
1987. The PRIME 9755 has three 
315 and one 1475 megabyte disk 
drives and 15 megabytes of main 
memory. 

Computer Graphics Center 
(1986): The computer graphics 
center provides the IBC Ensign 
Computer for students majoring in 
computer science and for those 
taking graphics courses. It has 32 
ports for terminals and printers, 2 
megabytes of memory, and two 
85 megabyte disk drives. 
Nursing Skills Laboratory 
(1983): Located in the lower level 
of the library, it is a replica of a 
modem hospital ward, complete 
with 10 simulated work stations, a 
nurses' station, and all the medi- 
cal equipment used by nurses. 
Wendle Hall (1968): Contains 21 class- 
rooms, the psychology laboratories, a 
computer terminal laboratory with 20 
terminals available for use at present 
with an expansion capability of 20 
more, and spacious Pennington Lounge, 
an informal meeting place for students 
and faculty. 

Arena Theatre and Laboratories 
(1968): The 204-seat thrust-stage theat- 
re is one of the finest in the region. It 
includes projection facilities, scene and 
costume shops, a make-up room, and a 
multiple-use area known as the Down 
Stage, where one-act experimental plays 
are performed. The language, business, 
mathematics, and physics laboratories 
are situated on the upper floors. The 
Detwiler Planetarium is located on the 
ground floor. 

Faculty Office Building: Contains 

faculty offices, seminar rooms, and a 

735-seat lecture hall. 

Fine Arts Center (1923, renovated 

1983): Contains studios, sculpture 

foundry, woodshop, printmaking shop, 

classrooms, lecture hall, offices. In 

addition, the Career Development 

Office is located in this building. 

Photographic Laboratory (1984): 

Located in the lower level of the Fine 

Arts Center, it contains all the mate- 



76 



rials and equipment of any commer- 
cial laboratory. 
Mass Communication Center (1987): 
The focal point of the facility is a fully 
equipped, broadcast quality television 
studio and control room. The building 
also houses two editing rooms, a clas- 
sroom, faculty offices and the student 
newspaper office. The center is located 
on the southeast comer of campus. 
Science Building (1989): Scheduled to 
open in the spring of 1990, the $8.3 
million science facility will be one of the 
finest undergraduate science facilities in 
the East. The building will be three 
levels, totalling more than 63,000 square 
feet. It will contain new biology and 
chemistry laboratories, lecture and 
seminar rooms, a small science library 
and a greenhouse, as well as classrooms 
and faculty offices. 
Clarke Building (1939): — Includes 
recital hall, music classrooms, practice 
studios, an electronic-music studio, 
faculty offices, two chapels, and the 
United Campus Ministry Center. 

ADMINISTRATION 

Drum House: Built in 1857 as a rental 
property, the Admissions House is the 
oldest and smallest building on the cam- 
pus. It was first occupied by a Presby- 
terian parson. Founded in 1812, the 
Williamsport Academy, predecessor to 
Lycoming College, was likewise Pres- 
byterian until 1848 when the institution 
was purchased by the Methodists to 
become the Williamsport Dickinson 
Seminary. 

The Admissions House was bought 
by the College in 1931, along with 
twenty-eight other dwellings and in 
1940 became the President's home. 
John W. Long occupied it for the 
remainder of his tenure and D. Freder- 
ick Wertz lived in the house from 1955 
until 1965 when the President's home 
was moved to 325 Grampian Boulevard. 
The building was then converted for use 
by the Fine Arts Department. In 1983, 
when a new Fine Arts facility was com- 
pleted, the department was relocated 
and the house was vacant until 1987 
when it was restored by college crafts- 



men to its original Federalist design 
under the supervision of Carol Baker 
'60, kindly volunterred her services 
during the year-long reconstruction. The 
Admissions House is a gift of the W.F. 
Rich Family. 

John W. Long Hall (1951) — Opened 
originally as the library, it now houses 
the administrative offices, including 
those for the president, dean, treasurer, 
registrar, admissions, alumni affairs, 
public relations, institutional advance- 
ment, career development, publications, 
and financial aid. It includes a reception 
area, central communications, and the 
printing and bulk mail office. 

RECREATION 

Physical Education and Recreation 
Center (1980) — Includes the George 
R. Lamade Gymnasium, which contains 



basketball and other courts; a six-lane 
swimming pool; all-purpose room; sau- 
na and steam room; weight room; 
offices; classrooms, and Alumni 
Lounge. 

Wertz Student Center (1959) — Con- 
tains the main and private dining rooms, 
Burchfield Lounge, a recreation area, 
game rooms, music room, theatre, cafe 
with stage, bookstore, post office, stu- 
dent organization offices, and FM radio 
station. Honors Bishop D. Frederick 
Wertz, president of Lycoming from 
1955 to 1968. 

RELIGIOUS 

Clarke Building (1939) — Lycoming's 
landmark, the building contains Clarke 
Chapel, St. John Neumann Chapel, the 
United Campus Ministry Center, and 
music department studios and offices. 




77 



Academic Calendar: 1989-90 



Fall Semester 

Bills are due August 21 

Orientation of new faculty August 24 

Residence halls open 8:00 a.m. for freshmen 

Residence halls open August 27 

Faculty available for advising August 28 

Classes begin first period August 30 

Processing of drop/add begins August 30 

Re-registration fee of $25 applies after this date September 5 

Last day for drop/add September 5 

Last day to elect audit and satisfactory/unsatisfactory grades September 5 

Last day for submission of final grades for courses for which Incomplete grades 

were recorded in Spring, May, and summer terms October 10 

Last day for submission of final grades for courses for which Incomplete grades 

were recorded in fall semester 

Mid-semester deficiency reports for freshmen due in Registrar's Office at noon .... October 17 

Residence halls close at 9 p.m. for spring recess 

Residence halls open at noon after spring recess 

Classes resume first period after spring recess 

Preregistration for students who have completed at least one semester Novmber 8-9-10 

Preregistration for sophomores and juniors 

Preregistration for freshmen November 16-17-18 

Last day to withdraw from courses November 21 

Residence halls close at 10 a.m. for Thanksgiving recess November 22 

Residence halls open at noon after Thanksgiving November 27 

Classes resume first period after Thanksgiving November 28 

Final exammations begin December 1 1 

Semester ends at 5 p.m December 15 

Residence halls close at 9 p.m December 15 

May term 

Residence halls open May 6 

Classes begin May 7 

Last day for drop/add May 8 

Last day to elect audit and satisfactory/unsatisfactory grades May 8 

Last day to withdraw from courses May 25 

Term ends June 1 

Residence halls close at 4 p.m June 1 

Special dates to remember: 

Freshman convocation August 29 

All College Picnic September 2 

Labor Day (classes in session) September 4 

Homecommg Weekend October 6-7-8 

Long weekend (classes suspended) October 13-14-15 

Admissions Open House October 9 

Parents Weekend October 27-28-29 

Admissions Open House November 1 1 

Thanksgiving recess November 21-26 

Spring recess February 23-March 4 

Honors Day April 10 

Good Friday (afternoon classes suspended) April 13 

Baccalaureate May 6 

Commencement May 6 

Memorial Day (no classes) May 28 

Independence Day (no classes) July 4 



Spring semester 

January 2 



January 7 

January 8 
January 8 
January 12 
January 12 
January 12 



February 16 
February 23 
February 23 
March 4 
March 5 

March 29, 30 

April 4-5 
April 6 



April 23 
April 27 
April 27 

Summer term 

June 3 
June 4 
June 6 
June 6 
June 29 
July 13 
July 13 



78 



Directory 



BOARD OF TRUSTEES 

Officers 

Harold H. Shreckengast. Jr Chairman 

Nathan W. Stuart. J.D Vice Chairman 

John C. Lundy Secretary 

William L. Baker Treasurer 

W. Gibbs McKenney. LL.D.. L.H.D Chairman Emeritus 

Fred A. Pennington, LL.D Chairman Emeritus 

Emeriti Trustees 

Samuel Evert, LL.D Bloomsburg 

Paul Gilmore, Litt.D Williamsport 

Kenneth Himes Wiliamsport 

Ralph E. Kelchner Jersey Shore 

Arnold A. Phipps. II Williamsport 

George L. Steams. II Williamsport 

The Rev. Wallace F. Stettier, H.H.D Kingston 

Trustees 
Elected Term expires 1989 
1986 Harold D. Chapman Williamsport 

1986 Richard H. Confair Williamsport 

1980 Richard W. DeWald Montoursville 

1974 Daniel G. Fuitz Pittstord. NY 

1970 John E. Person. Jr Williamsport 

1983 Mary R. Schweikle. M.D. (Alumni Representative) Montoursville 

1972 Donald E. Shearer. M.D Montoursville 

1983 Hon. Clinton W. Smith Williamsport 

1961 Nathan W, Stuart, J.D Williamsport 

1971 Willis W. Willard. III. M.D Carlisle 

Elected Term expires 1990 

1987 Leo Calistri '59 (Alumni Representative) Fayetteville, NY 

1987 Robert E. Hancox Malvern 

1987 K. Alan Himes Williamsport 

1987 Richard D. Mase Blossburg 

1978 Harold D. Hershberger, Jr Williamsport 

1978 John C. Lundy Williamsport 

1984 D. Stephen Martz Duncansville 

1981 William Pickelner Williamsport 

1985 Robert L. Shangraw Williamsport 

1972 Harold H. Shreckengast, Jr Jenkintown 

Elected Term expires 1991 

1979 David Y. Brouse Montoursville 

1988 Gerald Hawk "66 (Alumni Representative) Franklin, MA 

1982 Margaret D. L'heureux Williamsport 

1973 Robert G. Little, M.D Hamsburg 

1988 David B. Lee '61 State College 

1964 W. Gibbs McKenney, LL.D., L.H.D Baltimore. MD 

1958 Fred A. Pennington, LL.D Mechanicsburg 

1988 Ann S. Pepperman Williamsport 

1988 Theodore Reich : Wiliiamsport 

1982 Marguerite G. Rich Woolrich 

1988 JohnC, Schultz Williamsport 

1988 Richard Stamm '76 Philadelphia 

1 988 Jeanne Twigg "74 Montoursville 

1988 John M. Young Williamsport 



79 



ADMINISTRATIVE STAFF 


LETTY GRAY (1988) 
Financial Aid Associate 




B.S., Pennsylvania State University 




M. Ed.— Bloomsburg University 


JAMES E. DOUTHAT (1989) 


DANIEL J. HARSTOCK (1986) 


President 


Director of Academic Resource Center and 


B.A., The College of William and Mary 


Coordinator of Advising 


M.Div., Duke University 


B.A., The Pennsylvania State University; 


Ed.D., Duke University 


M.A., Indiana University of Pennsylvania 


SHIRLEY A. VAN MARTER (1979) 


ALICE HEAPS (1986) 


Dean of the College 


Senior School Relations Associate 


B.A., Mundelein College; 


B.S., Shippensburg University 


M.A., Northwestern University; 


THOMAS J. HENNINGER (1966) 


M.A., Ph.D., University of Chicago 


Director of Computer Services 


WILLIAM L. BAKER (1965) 


B.S., Wake Forest College; 


Treasurer 


M.A., University of Kansas 


B.S., Lycoming College 


MARY HERRING (1978) 


J. BARTON MEYER (1984) 


Senior Admissions Associate 


Executive Director for College Advancement 


B.A.. Albright College; 


B.A., Ohio Northern University; 


M.A., Bloomsburg University 


M.S., University of Dayton 


J. MARCO HUNSBERGER (1989) 


BRUCE ANDERSON (1988) 


Chaplain 


College Counselor 


B.A., Mercer University 


B.A., Lehigh University; 


M.Div., United Theological Seminary 


M.A., West Georgia College 


BRUCE M. HURLBERT (1982) 


DALE V. BOWER (1968) 


Director of Library Services 


Director of Planned Giving 


B.A., The Citadel; 


B.S., Lycoming College; 


M.S.L.S., Florida State University 


B.D., United Theological Seminary 


HAROLD H. HUTSON (1969) 


JACK C. BUCKLE (1957) 


President Emeritus 


Dean Emeritus 


B.S., LL.D., Wofford College; 


A.B., Juniata College; 


B.D., Duke University; 


M.S., Syracuse University 


Ph.D., University of Chicago; 


WILLIAM E. BYHAM (1987) 


L.H.D., Ohio Wesley an University 


Sports Information Director 


JOHN G. LAMADE (1983) 


B.S., Bloomsburg University 


Senior Admissions Associate 


ROBERT CHECCA (1986) 


B.A., Susquehanna University 


Registrar 


JOHN C. LAMBERT (1988) 


B.A., M.S. SUNYat Plattsburgh 


Roman Catholic Chaplain 


JANE A. CUNNION (1988) 


FRANCESCA M. LEINWALL (1989) 


Assistant Director of Public Relations 


Director of Student Activities 


B.A., Shippensburg University 


B.A., Western Maryland College 


ROBERT L. CURRY (1969) 


M.Ed., Pennsylvania State University 


Associate Director of Athletics 


MARK N. LEVINE (1985) 


A.B., Lycoming College 


Director of Public and Media Relations 


RITA C. DETWILER (1984) 


B.A., The Amerian University; 


Director of Admissions 


M.S. J., Northwestern University 


A.B., Lycoming College 


CHRISTINA E. MacGILL (1985) 


WENDY FREEMAN (1989) 


Director of Career Development 


School Relations Associate/Minority Recruiter 


A.B., Lycoming College 


B.S., Portland State University 


M.S., Bucknell University 


FRANK L. GIRARDl (1984) 




Director of Athletics 




B.S., West Chester State College 





80 



SAMUEL McKELVEY (1986) 


FACULTY 


Director of Safety and Security 


B.S., Central Missouri State 




RALPH F. MILLER (1985) 


EMERITI 


Director of Administrative Services 




WALTER D. NYMAN (1987) 


LEROY F. DERR 


Director of Grounds and Buildings 


Professor Emeritus of Education 


A.D., Williamsport Area Community College 


A.B.. Ursinus College: MA.. Bucknell University: 


R. MICHAEL O'BRIEN (1987) 


Ed.D.. University of Pittsburgh 


Dean of Student Services 


ROBERT H. EWING 


A.B., University of Chattanooga 


Professor Emeritus of History 


B.D., Southern Methodist University 


A.B.. College of Wooster: M. A.. University 


S. T.M., Southern Methodist University 


of Michigan: HH.D., Lycoming College 


Ed.D., University of Tennessee 


JOHN P. GRAHAM 


JULIANN T. PAWLAK (1979) 


Professor Emeritus of English 


Senior Associate for Financial Aid 


Ph.B.. Dickinson College: 


A.B., Lycoming College; 


M.Ed.. The Pennsylvania State University' 


M.A., Bucknell University 


HAROLD W. HAYDEN 


JEFFREY L. RICHARDS (1982) 


Librarian Emeritus and Professor Emeritus 


Controller and Assistant Treasurer 


of Library Services 


A.B., Lycoming College 


A.B.. Nebraska State Teachers College: B.S., University 


PHYLLIS J. SIEBER (1989) 


of Illinois: M.A. in L.S.. University of Michigan 


Director of Residence Life 


JOHN G. HOLLENBACK 


B.S., University of Delaware 


Professor Emeritus of Business 


M.A., Trenton State College 


Administration 


SANDRA WALKER (1988) 


B.S., M.B.A.. Universin.' of Pennsylvania 


College Nurse 


GEORGE W. HOWE 


B.S.N., College Misericordia 


Professor Emeritus of Geology 


M.S., Pennsylvania State University 


A.B.. M.S.. Syracuse University: 


DEBORAH E. WEAVER (1978) 


Ph.D.. Cornell University 


Manager, Residence Halls Operations 


JAMES K. HUMMER 


CATHLEEN WILD (1977) 


Professor Emeritus of Chemistry 


Assistant Instructional Services Librarian 


B.N.S.. Tufts University: 


B.A., The College of Wooster; 


M.S.. Middlebury College: 


M.S., Columbia University 


Ph.D., University of North Carolina 


LOU ANN B. ZEIGLER (1986) 


M. RAYMOND JAMISON 


Senior Admissions Associate 


Assistant Professor Emeritus of Physics 


B.A., Set on Hill College 


B.S., Ursinus College: M.S.. Bucknell University 


RALPH E. ZEIGLER, JR. (1980) 


WALTER G. McIVER 


Director of Development for Annual Support 


Professor Emeritus of Music 


A.B., Lycoming College; 


Mus.B.. Westminster Choir College: A. B., Bucknell 


M.A., The Pennsylvania State University 


University: M.A.. New York University 


GAIL M. ZIMMERMAN (1984) 


ROBERT W. RABOLD 


Director of Prospect Research 


Professor Emeritus of Economics 


B.S., SUNY at Cortland 


B.A.. The Pennsylvania State University: 




M.A.. Ph.D.. University of Pittsburgh 




JOHN A. RADSPINNER 




Professor Emeritus of Chemistry 




B.S.. University of Richmond: 




M.S., Virginia Polytechnic Institute: 




D.S., Carnegie Mellon Institute 



81 



LOGAN A. RICHMOND 


EMILY R. JENSEN (1969) 


Professor Emeritus of Accounting 


English 


B.S.. Lycoming College; 


B.A.. Jamestown College; 


MB. A.. New York University; 


M.A.. University of Denver; 


C.P.A. (Pennsvlvania) 


Ph.D.. The Pennsvlvania State Universir\' 


MARY LANDON RUSSELL 


ROBERT H. LARSON (1969) 


Associate Professor Emeritus of Music 


History 


Mus. 8. . Susquehanna University Conservatory of 


B.A.. The Citadel; 


Music; M.A.. The Pennsylvania State University 


M.A.. Ph.D.. University of Virginia 


LOUISE R. SCHAEFFER 


ROGER W. OPDAHL(1963) 


Associate Professor Emeritus of Education 


Economics 


A.B., Lycoming College; M.A.. Bucknell University; 


A.B.. Hofstra University; 


D.Ed.. The Pennsylvania State University' 


M.A.. Columbia Universit}'; 


JAMES W. SHEAFFER 


D.Ed.. The Pennsylvania State University 


Associate Professor Emeritus of Music 


JOHN F. PIPER, JR. (1969) 


B.S.. Indiana University of Pennsylvania; 


History 


M.S.. Universitv of Pennsvlvania 


A.B.. Lafayette College; 


FRANCES K. SKEATH 


B.D.. Yale University; 


Professor Emeritus of Mathematics 


Ph.D.. Duke University' 


A.B., M.A., Bucknell University; 


MICHAEL G. ROSKIN (1972) 


D.Ed.. The Pennsylvania State University 


Political Science 


JOHN A. STUART 


A.B., University of California at Berkeley; 


Professor Emeritus of English 


M.A., University of California at Los Angeles; 


B.A.. William Jewell College; 


Ph.D., The American University 


M.A.. Ph.D.. Northwestern University 


ROGER D. SHIPLEY (1967) 


HELEN B. WEIDMAN 


Art 


Professor Emeritus of Political Science 


B.A., Otterbein College; 


A.B.. M.A.. Bucknell University; 


M.F.A., Cranbrook Academy of Art 


Ph.D.. Syracuse University 


SHIRLEY A. VAN MARTER (1979) 




English 


PROFESSORS 


Dean of the College 




B.A.. Mundelein College; 


ROBERT B. ANGSTADT (1967) 


M.A.. Northwestern University; 


Biology 


M.A.. Ph.D.. University of Chicago 


B.S.. Ursinus College; 


STANLEY T. W1LK(I973) 


M.S.. Ph.D.. Cornell University 


Anthropology 


ROBERT F. FALK( 1970) 


6.^4., Hunter College; 


Theatre 


Ph.D.. University of Pittsburgh 


Marshal of the College 




B.A.. B.D.. Drew University; 


*On Sabbatical Fall Semester 1989 


M.A., Ph.D.. Wavne State University 


**On Sabbatical Spring Semester 1990 


ERNESTO. GIGLIO (1972) 


***On Sabbatical Spring & Fall 1990 


Political Science 


****On Leave 


B.A., Queens College; 




M.A.. SUNY at Albany; 




Ph.D.. Syracuse University 


ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS 


EDUARDO GUERRA (1960) 




Religion 


JERRY D. ALLEN (1984) 


B.D.. Southern Methodist University; S.T.M., 


Theatre 


Ph.D., Union Theological Seminary 


B.F.A.. M.F.A.. Utah State University 


JOHN G. HANCOCK (1967) 


SUSAN K. BEIDLER(1975) 


Psychology 


Collection Management Services Librarian 


B.S.. M.S.. Bucknell University; 


B.A., University of Delaware; 


Ph.D.. The Pennsylvania Slate University 


M.L.S.. University of Pittsburgh 



82 



HOWARD C. BERTHOLD. JR. (1976) 


BRUCE M. HURLBERT (1982) 


Psychology 


Director of Library Services 


B.A.. Franklin and Marshall College; 


B.A.. The Citadel: 


M.A.. University of Iowa: 


M.S.L.S.. Florida State University 


Ph.D.. The University of Massachusetts 


MOON H. JO (1975) 


GARY M. BOERCKEL (1979) 


Sociology 


Music 


B.A., Valparaiso University; 


B.A.. B.M.. Oberlin College: 


M.A.. Howard University: 


M.M.. Ohio University: 


Ph.D.. New York University' 


D.M.A., Universit\' of Iowa 


ELDON F. KUHNS, II (1979) 


JONR. BOGLE (1976) 


Accounting 


Art 


A.B.. Lycoming College: M. Accounting. 


B.F.A.. B.S.. M.F.A.. T\ler School of Art : 


University of Oklahoma: C.P.A. (Pennsylvania) 


Temple University 


PAUL A. MacKENZIE (1970) 


CLARENCE W. BURCH (1962) 


German 


Physical Education 


A.B.. A.M.. Ph.D.. Boston University 


B.S.. M.Ed.. University of Pittsburgh 


ROBERT J . B . MAPLES ( 1 969) 


JACK D. DIEHL. JR. (1971) 


French 


Biology 


A.B.. University of Rochester: 


B.S.. M.A.. Sam Houston State University: 


Ph.D.. Yale University 


M.S., Ph.D., University of Connecticut 


RICHARD J. MORRIS (1976) 


RICHARD R. ERICKSON (1973) 


History 


Astronomy and Physics 


B.A.. Boston State College; 


B.A., University of Minnesota: 


M.A.. Ohio University: 


M.S.. Ph.D.. University of Chicago 


Ph.D.. New York University 


BERNARD P. FLAM (1963)**** 


DORIS P. PARRISH (1983) 


Spanish 


Nursing 


A.B., New York University; 


B.S.. SUNY at Plattsburgh; 


M.A., Harvard University; 


M.S., Russell Sage College; 


Ph.D., University of Wisconsin 


Ph.D., University of Texas at Austin 


DAVID A. FRANZ (1970) 


DAVID J. RIFE (1970) 


Chemistry 


English 


Marshall of the College 


B.A.. University of Florida: 


A.B.. Princeton University: 


M.A.. Ph.D.. Southern Illinois University 


M.A.T.. The Johns Hopkins University: 


MICHAEL G. ROSKIN (1972) 


Ph.D., University of Virginia 


Political Science 


EDWARD G, GABRIEL (1977) 


A.B.. University of California at Berkeley; 


Biology 


M.A.. University of California at Los Angeles: 


B.A.. M.A.. Alfred University: 


Ph.D.. The American University 


M.S.. Ph.D.. The Ohio State University 


GENED. SPRECHINI (1981)* 


STEPHEN R. GRIFFITH (1970) 


Mathematics 


Philosophy 


B.S.. Wilkes College: 


Director of Lycoming Scholars 


M.A.. Ph.D.. SUNY at Binghamton 


A.B.. Cornell University: 


FRED M. THAYER, JR. (1976) 


M.A.. Ph.D.. Universit\ of Pittsburgh 


Music 


DAVID K. HALEY (1980) 


A.B., Syracuse University; 


Mathematics 


B.M.. ithaca College; 


B.A.. Acadia University; 


M.M.. SUNY at Binghamton; 


M.S.. Ph.D.. Queen's University; 


D.M.A.. Cornell University 


Habil. . Universitat Mannheim 


H. BRUCE WEAVER (1974) 


RICHARD A. HUGHES (1970) 


Business Administration 


Religion 


B.B.A.. Stetson University: 


B.A.. University of Indianapolis ; 


J.D.. Vanderbilt University: 


S.T.B.. Ph.D.. Boston University 


M.B.A.. Florida Technological University 



83 



•• 

JOHN M. WHELAN. JR. (1971) 


AMY GOLAHNY (1985) 


Philosophy 


Art 


B.A., University of Notre Dame; 


B.A., Brandeis University; 


Ph.D.. The University of Texas at Austin 


M.A., Williams College — Clark Art Institute; 


ROBERT A. ZACCARIA (1973) 


M.Phil., and Ph.D.. Columbia University 


Biology 


BAHRAM GOLSHAN (1989) 


B.A.. Bridgewater College; 


Mathematical Science 


Ph.D.. University of Virginia 


B.S., Jundi Shapour University, Iran; 


MELVIN C. ZIMMERMAN (1979)* 


M.S., Ph.D., Edinboro State University of Pennsylvania 


Biology 


G. W. HAWKES (1989) 


B.S.. SU NY at Cortland; 


English 


M.S.. Ph.D.. Miami University 


B.A., University of Washington-Seattle; 




M.A., Ph.D., SUNY-Binghamton 




THOMAS J. HENNINGER (1966) 




Director of Computer Services; Mathematics 




B.S.. Wake Forest College; 




M.A.. Universit\- of Kansas 




OWEN F. HERRING (1965) 


ASSISTANT PROFESSORS 


Philosophy 




B.A., Wake Forest College 


PENELOPE AUSTIN (1988) 
English 


JANET HURLBERT (1985) 


Instructional Services Librarian 


A.B., University of Michigan; 


B.A.. M.A., University of Denver 


M.B., University of Missouri-Columbia 


MARY LOU KASPUTIS 


BERNARD J. BALLEWEG ( 1985) 


Nursing 


Psychology 


B.S., Villa Maria College; 


B.S.. Colorado State University; 


M.S., Case Western Reserve University 


M.A.. Ph.D.. University of Montana 




JANE LAWRENCE (1986) 


HENRY E. BERKHEIMER (1988) 


Sociology 


Chemistry 


B.A.. College of St. Catherine, University of Minnesota; 


A.B., Dickinson College 


M.S.W.. Rutgers University 


M.S., Bucknell University 


MEHRDAD MADRESEHEE ( 1986) 


Ph.D., The Pennsylvania State University 


Economics 


STEVEN BIDLAKE(1988) 


B.S., University of Tehran; 


English 


M.S., National University of Iran; 


B.A., Western Washington University; 


M.S., University of Idaho; 


M.A.. University of Oregon; 


Ph.D.. Washington State University 


Ph.D.. Universir\' of Washington 


CHRiss McDonald (i987) 


ANDRZEJ J. BUCKI(1986) 


Chemistry 


Mathematics 


B.S., Manchester College; 


B.S.. Maria Curie-Sklodowska University; 


Ph.D., Miami University' of Ohio 


M.S.. Ph.D. Maria Curie-Sklodowska University; 


CAROLE MOSES (1982)** 


JOHN H. CONRAD (1959) 


English 


Education 


B.A,. Adelphi University; 


B.S., Mansfield State College; 


M.A., The Pennsylvania State University; 


M.A.. New York University 


Ph.D., SUNY at Binghamton 


SANTUSHT S. DeSILVA (1983) 


BRADLEY NASON (1983) 


Mathematics 


Mass Communication 


B.Sc, University of Sri Lanka; 


A.B., Lycoming College; 


M.A.. Ph.D.. University of Pittsburgh 


M.A.. The American University 


DAVID FISHER (1984) 




Physics 




B.S., The Pennsylvania State University; 




M.S., Ph.D.. University of Delaware 





84 



KATHLEEN D. PAGANA (1982) 


JOHN WILLIS (1989) 


Nursing 


Art 


B.S.N. , University of Maryland 


B.A., The Evergreen State College; 


M.S.N. , University of Pennsylvania 


M.F.A., The Rhode Island School of Design 


Ph.D.. University of Pennsylvania 


PEIYUAN YAN (1989) 


JUDITH A. POTTMEYER (1984) 


Mathematical Science 


Biology 


B.S., E. China Inst, of Tech.; 


B.S., Clarion State College; 


M.S., Ph.D., Pennsylvania State University 


Ph.D., Washington State University 




EVELYN M. POWERS (1988) 




Education 




B.A., James Madison University; 


INSTRUCTORS 


M.Ed., Ph.D., University of Virginia at 




Charlottesville 


MICHELLE S. FICCA(1985) 


KATHRYN M. RYAN (1981)*** 


Nursing 


Psychology 


6.5., Stroudsburg State University: 


B.S., University of Illinois; 


M.S. . The Pennsylvania State University' 


M.S., Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 


MARGARET GRAY-VICKREY (1986)*** 


MICHAEL R. SMITH (1989) 


Nursing 


Mass Communication 


B.S.N., SUNY at Pittsburgh; 


B.A., University of Maryland; 


M.S., Northern Illinois University 


M.S., Shippensburg University 


EDWARD HENNINGER (1988) 


ARTHUR STERNGOLD (1988) 


Business Administration 


Business 


B.S., Shippensburg University; 


B.A., Princeton University; 


M.B.A., Shippensburg University 


M.B.A., Northwestern University 


DEBORAH J. HOLMES (1976) 


LARRY R. STRAUSER (1973) 


Physical Education 


Sociology 


5.5., M5., The Pennsylvania State University 


A.B., Lycoming College; 


DIANE JANDA 


M.P.A., University of Arizona 


Music 


ROBERT E. VAN VOORST (1989) 


B.A., University of Texas at Austin; 


Religion 


M.M., University of Cincinnati, College Conservatory 


B.A., Hope College; 


of Music 


M.Div., Western Theological Seminary 


BARBARA MARTINI 


S.T.M., Ph.D., Union Theological Seminary 


Nursing 


RICHARD WEIDA (1987) 


B.S., M.S., Bloomsburg University 


Mathematics 


TROY WOLFSKILL 


B.S.. Muhlenberg College: 


Chemistry 


M.S.. Ph.D.. University of Delaware 


B.S., Albright College 


BUDD F. WHITEHILL (1957) 




Physical Education 




B.S.. Lock Haven University; M.Ed., 




The Pennsylvania State University 


LECTURERS & SPECIAL APPOINTMENTS 


RICHARD E. WIENECKE (1982)* 




Accounting 


RONDA L. BIRD, R.D. (1986) 


A.B., Lycoming College: 


B.A., Indiana University 


M.S.. Bucknell University 


DON M. LARRABEE II, (1972) 


M.B.A., Long Island University: 


Lecturer in Law 


C.P.A. (Pennsylvania and New York) 


A.B., Franklin and Marshall College: 


FREDRIC M. WILD, JR. (1978) 


LL.B., Fordham University 


English 


GERARD M. McKEEGAN 


B.A., Emory University; 


Nursing 


M.A., Ph.D., Ohio State University: 


B.S., Philadelphia College of Pharmacy 


M.Div.. Yale Divinity School 


and Science 



85 



PART-TIME FACULTY 

JOAN MOVER CLARK (1987) 

Music and Theatre 
MARGARET CRONIN 

English 
JAMES CROSSLEY 

Accounting 

B.S., Lycoming College 

C.P.A. (Pennsylvania) 
ROGER DAVIS (1984) 

Mathematics 

B.S.Ed., Clarion State College 

M.S.Ed., Bucknell University 
AUDREY GABRIEL 

Nursing 
R. TIM MARKS (1986) 

Education 

B.S., M.S.Ed., Clarion State College 

D.Ed., The Pennsylvania State University 
THOMAS M. SHIVETTS (1986) 

Education 

B.S.. Lycoming College 

M.S.Ed.. Bucknell University 
DALE K. WAGNER (1985) 

Business Administration 

B.A., M.A.. The Pennsylvania State University 
MARY WOLF (1985) 

Political Science 

B.A.. St. Mary's College 

M.P.A.. University of Michigan 
JENNIFER YEAGER (1984) 

Foreign Language 

B.S.Ed., University of Alabama 



Susquehanna University 
ZDZINSKI (1987) 



MARY L. RUSSELL (1936) 

Music 

B.S.. Susquehanna University Conservatory of Music 

M.A.. The Pennsylvania Stale University 
JUDITH A. WHITE 

Voice 

B. Mus. 
EDWIN E. 

Violin 

B.S.. SUNY at Fredonia 

M.A.. Columbia University Teachers College 

Ed.D.. Columbia University Teachers College 



ADJUNCT FACULTY & STAFF 

BROOKE BARRIE (1984) 

Sculpture 

Johnson Atelier Technical Institute of Sculpture 
JAMES WALTER HUFFMAN (1984) 

Assistant Technical Director of Arena Theatre 

B.A.. in Studio Art. B.A.. in Theatre. 

Bloomsburg University 
JON LASH (1984) 

Sculpture 

Johnson Atelier Technical Institute of Sculpture 
ANDRZEJ PITYNSKI (1984) 

Sculpture 

Johnson Atelier Technical Institute of Sculpture 
HERK VAN TONGEREN (1984) 

Sculpture 

Johnson Atelier Technical Institute of Sculpture 



APPLIED MUSIC TEACHERS 

DIANA L. BAILEY (1986) 

Saxophone 

B.S.. Susquehanna University 
G. LOU FEIST (1987) 

Percussions 
RICHARD J. LAKEY (1979) 

Organ and Piano 

A.B.. Westminster Choir College; M.A., 

Indiana University of Pennsylvania 

ALBERT NACINOVICH (1972) 
Brass 

B.A.. in Music Education. Mansfield University 
M.S.. in Music Education. Ithaca College 



MEDICAL STAFF 

ROBERT S. YASUI. M.D. 
College Surgeon 
M.D.. Temple University 



86 



ATHLETICS STAFF 



JANIS ARP Head Field Hockey Coach 

Head Women/Men Swimming Coach 

JOHN BODNER Assistant Basketball Coach 

CLARENCE BURCH Head Men's Basketball Coach 

JAMES BURGET Head Women/Men 

Cross Country Coach 

WILLIAM BYHAM Sports Information Director 

ROBERT CURRY Associate Athletic Director 

REES DANEKER Assistant Basketball Coach 

CHERYL DEMPSEY Head Volleyball Coach 

STEVE DEWAR Assistant Football Coach 

MIKE FIAMINGO Assistant Wrestling Coach 

CURTIS JOHNSON Head Softball Coach 

ROBERT GEORGE Assistant Football Coach 

FRANK GIRARDI Athletic Director 

Head Football Coach 

GENE HAUPT Assistant Football Coach 

EUGENE HENDERSCHED Head Golf Coach 

DEBORAH HOLMES Head Tennis Coach 

Intramurals Director 

BARBARA HORN Secretary/ Athletics 

MICHAEL HUDDOCK Assistant Basketball Coach 

JOSEPH LUMBIS Equipment Manager 

TERRY MANTLE Assistant Football Coach 

JOSEPH G. MARK Head Tennis Coach 

J. SCOTT MCNEILL Head Soccer Coach 

DAN MUTHLER Assistant Wrestling Coach 

JAMES ORR Head Women's Basketball Coach 

MADGE PINKERTON Secretary /Athletics 

DANIEL PETRA Athletic Trainer 

BUDD WHITEHILL Head Wrestling Coach 

STEVE WISER Assistant Football Coach 



ADMINISTRATIVE ASSISTANTS 



Robert E. Bay Grounds Foreman 

Trudy L. Beachem Gift Records Specialist 

Theresa M. Beatty Faculty Secretary in Science 

Nathalie Beck Executive Secretary, Development 

Patricia A. Belknap Executive Secretary 

Student Services 

Emily C. Biichle Coordinator 

Facilities Scheduling/Purchasing 

Margaret L. Bloom SUB Desk Aide 

Robert D. Bloom Security Proctor 

Helen J. Boe Typist/Clerk Admissions 

Marlene Brown AV/ILL Library Assistant 

Barbara Bowes Admin. Assistant Bookstore 

Marie B. Boyle Secretary /Admin. Asst. Security 



Brigitte C. Brahms Tech Asst. /Secretary 

Admin Services 

Peter A. Buckle Security Proctor 

Barbara J. Carlin Executive Secretary, Admissions 

Diana L. Cleveland Coordinator of Academic 

Computer Services for Mathematical Sciences 

Richard L. Cowher Press Operator 

Elizabeth G. Cowles Career Development Secretary 

June V. CreveUng Secretary, Buildings & Grounds 

Richard C. Dingle SUB Desk Aide 

JuHa E. Dougherty Circulation Assistant, Library 

Gladys Engel Secretary, Theatre Department 

Lisa R. Engel Public Relations Assistant 

June L. Evans Secretary, Nursing Department 

Robert W. Faus Ass't. Press Operator & 

Ass't. Mailroom Clerk 

S. Jean Gair Secretary, Music and Art Department 

Dee L. Given Faculty Secretary 

John E. Gohrig Assistant to Dir. of Admin. 

Services (Mailroom) 
Diane Hassinger Executive Secretary to 

Dean of College 

Mary C. Hendricks Supervisor of Housekeeping 

Esther L. Henninger Data Entry Clerk 

Bernadine G. Hileman Office Services Coordinator 

Barbara E. Horn Secretary to Athletics Director 

David M. Kelchner Data & Records Manager 

Gladys E. Knauss SUB Desk Aide 

Diane M. Kuttenberg . .Coordinator of Computer Services 

for Mathematical Sciences 

Gale D. Laubacher Cashier/Bookkeeper 

Peggie A. LeFever Assistant to Director of 

Admin. Services 

Shirley D. Lloyd Relief Switchboard Operator 

Carol. A. Long Admin. Assistant, 

Alumni & Parent Relations 

Dorothy E. Maples Box Office Manager 

D. Maxine McCormick Recorder 

Glenn E. McCreary . .Art Historian & Gallery Technician 

Rebecca R. Miller Financial Aid Office Secretary 

Ellen Moon Executive Secretary to President 

Marilyn Mullings Faculty to Secretary 

Carol T. Murray Coordinator of Academic 

Computer Services 

Judith E. Noble Library Acquisitions Assistant 

Marion R. Nyman Bursar/Executive Secretary 

to Treasurer 

Rosalie Pfaff Switchboard Operator 

Deborah E. PhilHps Data Entry Clerk, 

Admissions & Financial Aid 
Madeline A. Pinkerton Secretary in Athletics/ 

SUB Desk Aide 

Constance C. Plankenhorn Secretary to the Registrar 

David W. Poeth Assistant to Director of 

Buildings and Grounds 



87 



Pearl Ringler Bookstore Assistant 

Sherry L. Schaefer Secretary for Residence Life 

Fern L. Schon Loan Coordinator, Business Office 

Galen W. Seaman, Sr Mailroom Assistant 

Anna L. Seidel Alumni Records Clerk 

Regina D. Shaffer . .Coordinator of Summer Conferences 
and Assistant for Support Services 

Patricia Strauss-Cundiff Systems Analyst 

Sheran L. Swank Faculty Secretary 

Diane M. Thomas Computer Programmer 



Carole A. Thompson Faculty Secretary 

Glenn F. Trick Uniformed Officers Supervisor 

Patricia J. Triaca Cataloging Assistant, Library 

Kathleen M. Watt SUB Desk Aide 

Donna A. Weaver Faculty Secretary 

Geraldine H. Westcott . . .Periodicals Assistant in Library 

Laurence C. Wilcox, Jr Security Proctor 

Patricia S. Wittig Secretary, Campus Ministry Center 

Melissa C. Wolfe AV/ILL Library Assistant 

Cheryl A. Yearick . . .Library Technician, Gov't Pub/ILL 




New Insight into the world of small, smaller and smallest is gained by Dr. Melvm Zimmerman, associate professor of biology, as he adjusts 
the image on a scanning electron microscope. The microscope uses beams of electrons, rather than regular light, to "illuminate" the object being 
viewed and magnify it as much as 160.000 times. The image is created in the tubular construction at left and relayed electronically to television 
like cathrode-ray tubes in the control box at right for either direct viewing or recording on photographic fit. 



88 



1989-90 Alumni Association 
Executive Board 



The Alumni Association of Lycoming College has a mem- 
bership of nearly 11, 000 men and women. It is governed by 
an executive board consisting of 24 members-at-large, elected 
through mail ballot by the membership of the association. 
The board also has members representing specific geographic 
areas, the senior class president, the student body president, 
and past presidents of the last graduating class the Student 
Association of Lycoming College. The association annually 
designates one alumni representative as a nominee for a three- 
year term on the College Board of Trustees. The Director of 
Alumni and Parent Relations directs the activities of the 
alumni office. The Alumni Association has the following 
purpose as stated in its constitution: "As an off-campus 
constituency, the association's purpose is to seek ways of 
maintaining an active and mutually beneficial relationship 
between the College and its alumni, utilizing their talents, 
resources and counsel to further the objective and program 
of Lycoming College." 

All former students of Williamsport Dickinson Seminary 
and all former students who have successfully completed one 
year of study at Williamsport Dickinson Junior College or 
Lycoming College are considered members of the association. 

Acting as the representative of alumni on the campus 
and working also with undergraduates, the alumni office is 
responsible for keeping alumni informed and interested in 
the programs, growth, and activities of the College through 
regular publications mailed to all alumni on record. Arrange- 
ments for Homecoming, class reunions, club meetings, and 
similar activities are coordinated through this office. Through 
the Lycoming College Fund, the alumni office is closely 
associated with the development program of the College. 
Communications to the alumni association should be addres- 
sed to the Office of Alumni and Parent Relations. 



1989-90 ALUMNI ASSOCIATION 
EXECUTIVE BOARD 



Term Expires October 1989 

David G. Argall '80 — 237 West Broad Street, Tamaqua, 
PA 18252 

David E. Detwiler '75 — 134 Sunset Ridge, Forest, VA 24551 

Robert J. Glunk '59 — R.D. #3, Jersey Shore, PA 17740 

Patricia MacBride Krauser '68 — 40 Steffie Drive, Mt. Wolf, 
PA 17347 

Jacquelyn Snyder Nowak '58 — 505 Geary Avenue, New 
Cumberland, PA 17070 

Mary Landon Russell '33 — 812 Lincoln Avenue, Williams- 
port, PA 17701 

D. Keigh Cronauer Strauser '58 — 1160 Almond Street, 
Williamsport, PA 17701 

Doris Heller Teufel '54 — R.D. #1, P.O. Box 852, Williams- 
port, PA 17701 



Term Expires October 1990 

Romain F. Bastian '61 — P.O. Box 314, Milton, PA 17847- 
0314 

Richard H. Felix '56 — 1230 Pennsylvania Avenue, Williams- 
port, PA 17701 

Ronald A. Frick '83 — 724 Pennsylvania Avenue, Williams- 
port, PA 17701 

William S. Kieser '65 — R.D. #1, Box 245, Steam Valley Mt., 
Trout Run, PA 17771 

Everett W. Rubendall '37 — 308 E. Central Avenue, South 
Williamsport, PA 17701 

Robert E. Ruffaner '63 — 1620 Spring Lane, Williamsport, 
PA 17701 

Dorothy Ferrell Sandmeyer '43 & '63 — Arrowhead Circle, 
Picture Rocks, PA 17762 

Douglas P. Trump '76 — 49 Talmadge Avenue, Chatham, 
NJ 07928 



Term Expires October 1991 

Cynthia Pennington Clippinger '66 — 16 Mumma Avenue, 

Mechanicsburg, PA 17055 
Mark A. GaNung '85 — 327 Brandon Avenue, Williamsport, 

PA 17701 
Mark A. Gibbon '83 — 1514 Faxon Parkway, Williamsport, 

PA 17701 
John G. Hollenback '47 — 721 Sixth Avenue, Williamsport, 

PA 17701 
Eleanor Layton Loomis '60 — R.D. #1, Box 439, Bohlayer 

Orch, Troy, PA 16947 
Carolyn-Kay Miller Lundy '63 — 501 Upland Road, Williams- 
port, PA 17701 
Otto L. Sonder, Jr. '46 — 52 West Street, Oneonta, NY 13820 
Jean R. Alpert Staiman '47 — 135 Grampian Boulevard, 

Williamsport, PA 17701 



Members of the Board 

Serving a One-Year Term 

Student Association of Lycoming College (SALC), Presi- 
dent — Michael P. Holland — 27 Greendale Road, Cedar 
Grove, NJ 07009 

Senior Class President — Amanda L. Gates — 651 Vineyard 
Avenue, #204 Broadview Heights, OH 44147 

1988 Class President — Cynthia J. Smith — 312 Montgomery 
Avenue, Apt. C-6, Haverford Gables, Haverford, PA 19041 

Immediate Past President of SALC — Matthew J. Drakeley 
'88 — 615 Brumar Drive, Hatboro, PA 19040 



89 



Area Alumni Representatives 

Kent T. Baldwin '64 — Greater Williamsport — 929 Grampian 

Blvd., Williamsport, PA 17701 
Patrick J. Cerillo '77 — Northern New Jersey — 150 N. 

Finley Avenue, Basking Ridge, NJ 07920 
Amy Gehron Chambers '70 — Pittsburgh — 1515 Buena 

Vista, Pittsburgh, PA 15212 
Ann Weitzel Fuhrman '79 — Southcentral Pennsylvania — 

2214 Boxwood Lane, Mechanicsburg, PA 17055 



Barry C. Hamilton '70 — Greater Pittsburgh — 7 Fenimore 

Lane, St. Davids, PA 19087 
Robert & Marjorie Ferrell Jones '48 & '50 — Syracuse/ 

Rochester Area — 298 Park Place, Caledonia, NY 14423 
Charles J. Kocian '50 — Washington, DC — 2000 F St., NW 

#103, Washington, DC 20006 
James G. Scott '70 — New England — 40'/2 C Oakland St., 

Newbury Port, MA 01950 







% 



•^' '^ 




"f^iji 






90 



Index 



Academic Advisement 8 

Academic Calendar 78 

Academic Honesty/Standing 11 

Academic Honors 12 

Academic Program 5 

Accounting Curriculum 23 

Accounting-Mathematics (EIM) ... 24 

Admission to Lycoming 68 

Advanced Placement 12 

Advanced Standing by Transfer ... 68 

Advisory Committees 8 

Health Professions 9 

Legal Professions 9 

Medical Technology 9 

Theological Professions 9 

Allopathic Medicine, Advisement for 9 

American Studies (EIM) 24 

Anthropology Curriculum 61 

Application Fee and Deposits 71 

Applied Music Requirements 51 

Art Curriculum 25 

Astronomy and Physics Curriculum 28 

Athletics Training 56 

Athletic Staff 87 

Audit 15 

Awards 12 

BFA Degree 5 

Biology Curriculum 30 

Board of Trustees 79 

BSN Degree 5 

Business Administration Curriculum 32 

Campus Facilities 76 

Capitol Semester 20 

Career Development Services 66 

Chemistry Curriculum 34 

Christian Ministry, Advisement for 9 

Class Attendance 11 

College and the Church 4 

College Level Examination Program 

(CLEP) 12 

Computer Science Curriculum .... 48 

Conduct, Standards of 67 

Contingency Deposits 71 

Cooperative Programs 17 

Engineering 17 

Environmental Studies 17 

Forestry 17 

Medical Technology 18 

Military Science 18 

Optometry 18 

Podiatric Medicine 18 

Sculpture 19 

Counseling, Personal 66 

Course Credit by Examination .... 12 
Criminal Justice (EIM) 35 



Degree Programs/Requirements ... 5 

Departmental Honors 15 

Deposits/Deposit Refunds 69 

Distribution Requirements 6 

English 6 

Fine Arts 7 

Foreign Language 6 

History and Social Science 7 

Mathematics 7 

Natural Science 7 

Philosophy 7 

Religion 7 

Economics Curriculum 36 

Education Curriculum 37 

Education Financing Plans 75 

Educational Opportunity Grants . . 74 
Engineering, Cooperative Program 17 

English Curriculum 39 

English Requirement 6 

Entrance Examination (CEEB). ... 12 

Environmental Studies 17 

Established Interdisciphnary Major 

(EIM) 8 

Federal Grants and Loans 74 

Fees 71 

Financial Aid/ Assistance 71 

Fine Arts Requirements 5 

Foreign Language Requirement ... 6 
Foreign Languages and 

Literatures Curriculum 40 

Forestry, Cooperative Program ... 17 

French Curriculum 41 

German Curriculum 41 

Grading System 10 

Graduation Requirements 5 

Greek Curriculum 42 

Health Professions Careers 9 

Health Services 67 

Hebrew Curriculum 42 

History Curriculum 43 

History Requirements 7 

Honor Societ'es 12 

Independent Study 16 

Interdisciplinary Majors 8 

Established Majors (EIM) 8 

Individual Majors (IIM) 8 

International Studies 45 

Internship Programs 16 

Johnson Atelier 26 

Legal Professions, Advisement for 9 

Literature (EIM) 46 

Loans 74 

London Semester 20 

Major 7 

Admission to 7 



Departmental 7 

Interdisciplinary (EIM, IIM) .... 8 

Mass Communication (EIM) 46 

Mathematical Sciences 47 

Mathematical Requirements 6 

May Term 16 

Medical School, Advisement for . . 9 

Medical History 67 

Medical Technology 18 

Military Science 19 

Minor 8 

Music Curriculum 50 

National Direct Student Loans 

(NDSL) 74 

Natural Science Requirement 7 

Near East Culture and Archaeology 

(EIM) 52 

Nursing 52 

Optometry 18 

Optometry School, Advisement for 9 

Osteopathy School, Advisement for 9 

Part-time Student Opportunities. . . 17 

Payment of Fees 71 

Philadelphia Semester 18 

Philosophy Curriculum 55 

Philosophy Requirement 7 

Physical Education Curriculum ... 56 

Physics Curriculum 28 

Placement Services 66 

Podiatric Medicine, Cooperative 

Program 19 

Political Science Curriculum 57 

Psychology Curriculum 58 

Refunds 71 

Registration 9 

Religion Curriculum 59 

Religion Requirement 7 

Repeated Courses 10 

Reserve Officer Training Corps 

Program (ROTC) 19 

Residence and Residence Halls .... 66 

Scholarships/Grants 70 

Scholarships (ROTC) 72 

Scholar Program 20 

Sculpture 26 

Social Science Requirement 7 

Sociology-Anthropology Curriculum 61 

Spanish Curriculum 42 

Special Features 15 

Indepedent Study 16 

Internship Program 16 

May Term 16 

Overseas Studies Opportunities . 17 

State Grants and Loans 74 

Student Enrichment Semester (SES) 19 



91 



Student Records 11 

Study Abroad 17 

Supplemental Educational Opportunity 



Theological Professions, Withdrawal from College 69 

Advisement 9 Women's Studies 64 

Unit Course System 10 Work-Study Grants 75 



Grant (SEOG) 74 United Nations Semester 20 Writing Across The Curriculum 



Theatre Curriculum 63 



Veterinary School, Advisement for 9 
Washington Semester 20 



Program 6 




92 




A Heritage of Excellence